07 - Compact NSX Catalogue

Low Voltage
Compact NSX
Moulded-case circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Measurement and communication
from 100 to 630 A
Catalogue
2008
Compact NSX
Next-generation
circuit breakers
Today, next-generation Compact NSX circuit breakers provide an intelligent outlook
and set the standards of tomorrow. A power monitoring unit enhances their invariably
impeccable protective functions. For the first time, users can monitor both energy and
power, offering new performance in a remarkably compact device.
Compactness, discrimination and modularity all of the features which defined

the success of the Compact NS generation of circuit breakers combined
with new functions for safe, easy monitoring and management of installations.
The new range of Compact NSX circuit breakers stands out from the crowd, thanks
to its electronic intelligence. Through direct access to in-depth information, and
networking via open protocols, Compact NSX lets operators optimise
the management of their electrical installations.
Far more than a circuit breaker, Compact NSX is a measurement

and communication tool ready to meet energy-efficiency needs
through optimised energy consumption, increased energy availability,
and improved installation management.
1
Compact NSX 100-630 A
Safety and performance

Compactness, discrimination and modularity new Compact NSX circuit breakers
incorporate advanced monitoring and communication functions,
from 40 amps up, combined with impeccable protection.
Expert technology
A roto-active contact breaking principle provides
23
new patents pending
each circuit breaker with very high breaking confirm the innovative
capacity in a very small device, remarkable fault character of
current limitation performance, and endurance. Compact NSX
> Compact NSX benefits from a patented
double roto-active contact breaking concept,
together with a reflex tripping system
for ultimate breaking.
> Exceptional fault current limitation guarantees

robust, reliable protection and, above all,
reduces the causes of component aging, thus
extending service life for installations.
2
New breaking capacities
New performance levels for Compact NSX
improve application targeting:
> 25 kA standard low short-circuit level
applications, e.g., for service businesses,
> 36-50 kA standard applications

(industrial plants, buildings and hospitals),
> 70-100 kA high performance

at controlled cost,
> 150 kA demanding applications (maritime).
Enhanced protection
for motors Reduced installation costs
Compact NSX meets the requirements of Optimising installations allows for achieving
IEC 60947-4-1 standards for protection of up to 30 % savings:
motors: > considerable savings at the time of
> well adapted to motor-starting solutions installation, thanks to total discrimination with
up to 315 kW at 400 V, providing protection miniature circuit breakers,
against short circuits, overloads, phase
unbalance and loss, > smaller devices, more economic
switchboards mean best overall installation
> also enables set-up of additional protection cost, without overcalibration.
systems for starting and braking with the motor
running, reverse braking, jogging or reversing
in complete safety,
> add a Schneider Electric contactor;

Compact NSX complies with the requirements
of so-called type 2 coordination.
The trip units are now true With the integration Greater reliability and better
circuit breaker control of electronics, trip units discrimination allows more refined
systems. have gained in speed settings, especially for time delays.
and accuracy.
3
Monitoring and
management
Compact NSX is a single device, which contains a monitoring unit
to control energy consumption and power.
Integrated monitoring
> The new Compact NSX range incorporates
-10 %
Monitoring consumption
Micrologic electronic trip units in the circuit can reduce energy costs
breaker, offering both: by as much as 10 %.
an accurate power monitoring unit,
a highly reliable protective device.
> A Micrologic electronic tripping device

combines next-generation sensors:
an "iron" sensor for the power supply to
the electronics,
an "air" sensor (Rogowski coils) for
measurement, guaranteeing high
accuracy.
> These electronic systems are designed

to withstand high temperatures (105C),
ensuring reliability under severe operating
conditions.
> The originality lies in how Compact NSX

measures, processes and displays data,
either directly on screen, on the switchboard
front panel, or via a monitoring system.
4
Accessibility of information for power monitoring
To keep costs under control and ensure > Together with power monitoring software
service continuity, relevant information must be (e.g., PowerLogic), the Compact NSX Modbus
available in real time: communication interface provides operators
> a kilowatt-hour meter helps optimise costs with a parameter set and tools that make
and their allocation, system monitoring very easy.
> harmonic distortion rate shows the quality of > Operators have real-time data to control Logiciel de supervision
electrical supply, energy availability, to monitor power supply PowerLogic ION-E
quality, to optimise consumption of different
> alarm notification secures operational control applications or zones, reducing load peaks and
and maintenance planning, continuously supplying priority loads, and to
draw up maintenance schedules.
> event logs and tables, activated continuously,
ensure the installed equipment base operates > A software utility (RSU) allows protection
correctly, so energy efficiency is maximized. and alarm configuration, in addition to testing
communications with all installed devices.
Measurement functions are controlled Protection functions are electronically An ASIC (Application-Specific
by an additional microprocessor. managed independently of measurement Integrated Circuit) is common
functions. to all trip units, which boosts
immunity to conducted
ASIC or radiated interference
and increases reliability.
5
Simplicity
Compact NSX takes the principles of easy installation and use
which made its predecessor so successful to a higher level.
Simple in design
Compact NSX is mounted and wired reusing
Simple to install
> A Limited Torque Screw (LTS) system
65 %
time savings in installation
the same measurements as Compact NS. ensures proper installation of the tripping compared with a classic
device, for added flexibility. It insures each monitoring solution.
Cut-outs are the same whatever the type of screw is aligned correctly and tightened to the
handle. Engineering drawings are the same, required torque. The LTS system thus avoids
so installation and connection layouts can be the need for a torque wrench.
used on new projects, simplifying extensions or
retrofits, and reducing maintenance costs. > A transparent lead-sealable cover protects
access to tripping device switches and
Integration in help software, for parameter prevents settings from being changed.
settings and switchboard installation, further
eases design. > The new electrical control adjustment also
has a transparent lead- sealable cover to
prevent it from being operated accidentally.
> Compact NSX has an optional functional

terminal shield that offers excellent protection
against direct contact (IP40 on all sides, IP20
at cable entry points) and easy installation.
> All Compact NSX devices can be equipped

with a communication function via a pre-wired
connection with a Modbus interface module.
When the Modbus address is declared, the
Compact NSX device is integrated into the
network.
6
> There are four levels of functionalities:
communication of device status: On/Off
position, trip indication and fault-trip
indication,
communication of commands: open,
close, and reset,
communication of measurements: mainly
I, U, f, P, E, and THD,
communication of operating assistance
data: settings, parameters, alarms,
histograms and event tables, and
maintenance indicators.
> The switchboard "plug & play" display unit

connects to the trip unit without any special
settings or configuration. A cable fitted
with an RJ45 connector allows for easy
integration with communications networking.
Simple to use
> Users customise time-stamped alarms for
all parameters, assign them to indicator lights,
choose display priorities, and configure time
delay thresholds and modes.
> Event logs and tables are continuously-

activated. Providing a wealth of information,
they enable users to ensure that the installed
equipment base operates correctly, to optimize
settings, and to maximise energy efficiency.
> Local and remote displays offer easy access

to operators and provide the main electrical
values: I, U, V, f, energy, power, total harmonic
distortion, etc. The user-friendly switchboard
display unit with intuitive navigation is more
comfortable to read, and offers quick access to
information.
Performance, Attractively designed.

yet unimposing. The front of Compact NSX circuit breakers has an attractive
Compact NSX perfectly curved profile.
blends into Measurements are easy to read on a backlit LCD display. Screen
its environment. navigation is intuitive and settings are simplified by immediate
readouts in amps.
7
Compact NSX 100-630A
Service continuity
Compact NSX makes discrimination its main advantage in minimising the impact
of short circuits, ensuring service continuity for installations.
Total discrimination
Thanks to its 30 years of experience,
Schneider Electric, with Compact NSX, offers
perfect mastery of discrimination for ever
more reliable service continuity. Compact NSX
100 %
service continuity
circuit breakers strongly limit fault currents,
occurring as the result of short-circuits, which
reduces installation downtime and avoids over-
dimensioning cables.
When several circuit breakers are used in
series, the downstream circuit breaker trips as
close as possible to the fault, isolating only the
circuit concerned. The upstream circuit breaker
is not affected and allows the other circuits
to remain operational.
Direct access
to maintenance
Service continuity indicators
Adding an SDTAM module allows remote

indication of motor overloads and actuation
of a contactor, ensuring total service continuity:
> the SDTAM switches the contactor instead
of tripping the circuit breaker,
> the module allows for machine restart

directly from the contactor without having to
operate circuit breakers.
Preventive maintenance
Maintenance indicators provide information
on the number of operations, level of wear
on contacts and total load rates. This makes
it far easier to monitor equipment ageing and
optimise investments over time. Maintenance
is now preventive, avoiding faults.
8
Schneider Electric
expertise
Schneider Electric commits to reducing energy costs and CO2 emissions
for its customers. It offers products, solutions and services that integrate
with all levels of the energy value chain. Compact NSX is part and parcel
of the Schneider Electric energy efficiency approach.
Solutions for the future

With Compact NSX, Schneider Electric works
Up to 30 %
savings in energy costs
through flexible solutions for commercial
and industrial buildings, Schneider Electric
commits to help customers gradually move
towards an active approach to their energy
efficiency. It helps get more return from
investments and future design solutions.
4 steps
> Diagnosis
> Proposals
> Implementation
Energy performance > Follow-up
contracts
An energy performance contract offers
innovative service to modernise technical
installations.
The objective is dramatically to reduce energy

costs, whilst improving comfort and safety,
all in an environmentally-responsible way.
Environmentally responsible
Schneider Electric meets the expectations
of its markets with products adapted
to the practices of the 190 countries where
it is present and strongly commits to respect
the norms and directives of each of those
countries.
Compact NSX, like all the products in
its LV ranges, is a product designed to
comply with all European directives for
the environment. It has also received
international certifications and approval
from independent agencies.
In compliance with ISO 14001 standards,
all of its factories are non-polluting.
Designed for easy disassembly and
recycling at end of life, Compact NSX
complies with environmental directives
RoHS* and WEEE**.
* RoHS = Restriction of Hazardous Substances

** WEEE = Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
9
Compact NSX Contents
Presentation 1
Functions
A-1
and characteristics
Installation
B-1
recommendations
Dimensions
C-1
and connection
Wiring diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers F-1
Glossary G-1
11
Protection, measurement
and communication...
Compact NSX Functions and characteristics
Introduction
Overview of applications A-2
General characteristics of the Compact NSX range A-4
Characteristics and performance of Compact NSX circuit breakers
from 100 to 630 A A-6
Compact NSX trip units A-8
Overview of trip units for Compact NSX A-10
Protection of distribution systems
TM thermal-magnetic and MA magnetic trip units A-14
Micrologic 2 and 1.3-M trip units A-16
Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E trip units A-18
Power Meter functions
Electronic Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E A-20
Operating-assistance functions
Switchboard-display functions
Compact NSX communication
Communications modules A-26
Networks and software A-28
RSU and RCU utilities A-30
Supervision software A-31
Accessories for Micrologic trip units A-32
Earth-leakage protection
Add-on protection against insulation faults using a Vigi module or Vigirex relay A-34
Motor protection
General information on motor feeders A-36
Motor-feeder characteristics and solutions A-38
Compact NSX motor-feeder solutions A-39
MA and Micrologic 1.3-M instantaneous trip units A-40
Micrologic 2-M electronic trip units A-42
Micrologic 6 E-M electronic trip units A-44
Special applications
Protection of public distribution systems with Micrologic 2-AB A-48
Generator protection with Micrologic 2.2-G A-50
Protection of industrial control panels A-52
16 Hz 2/3 network protection A-53
Micrologic 5 A-Z trip unit A-53
Protection of 400 Hz systems A-54
Switch-disconnectors
Overview of applications A-56
Switch-disconnector functions A-57
Characteristics and performance of Compact NSX switch-disconnectors
from 100 to 630 NA A-58
Source-changeover systems
Presentation A-60
Manual source-changeover systems A-61
Remote-operated and automatic source-changeover systems
Coupling accessory on base plate A-62
Accessories and auxiliaries
Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version A-64
Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 plug-in and withdrawable versions A-66
Device installation A-68
Connection of fixed devices A-70
Connection of withdrawable and plug-in devices A-72
Insulation of live parts A-73
Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX100/160/250 A-74
Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX400/630 A-76
Connection of electrical auxiliaries A-78
Indication contacts A-80
SDx and SDTAM modules for Micrologic A-81
Motor mechanism A-82
Remote tripping A-83
Installation recommendations B-1 Rotary handles A-84
Dimensions and connection C-1 Additional measurement and indication modules A-86
Wiring diagrams D-1 Locks A-88
Additional characteristics E-1 Sealing accessories A-89
Catalogue numbers F-1 Individual enclosures A-90
Glossary G-1 Escutcheons and protection collars A-91
A-1
Functions Introduction
and characteristics Overview of applications
Functions Applications
Compact NSX100 to 630 offers high performance and
DB112087
a wide range of interchangeable trip units to protect G
most applications. Electronic versions provide highly
accurate protection with wide setting ranges and can
integrate measurement, metering and communication
functions. They can be combined with the FDM121
switchboard display unit to provide all the functions of a
Power Meter as well as operating assistance.
DB112088
DB112086
Power Meter
page A-20
Compact NSX equipped with Micrologic
5 / 6 trip units offer type A (ammeter) or E
(energy) metering functions as well as
communication. Using Micrologic
sensors and intelligence, Compact NSX
provides access to measurements of all
DB112089
the main electrical parameters on the
built-in screen, on a dedicated FDM121
display unit or via the communication
system.
Operating assistance
page A-22
Integration of measurement functions
provides operators with operating
assistance functions including alarms
tripped by user-selected measurement
values, time-stamped event tables and
histories, and maintenance indicators.
DB112090
Switchboard display unit

page A-24
The main measurements can be read on
the built-in screen of Micrologic 5 / 6 trip
units.
They can also be displayed on the
FDM121 switchboard display unit along
with pop-up windows signalling the main
alarms.
Communication
page A-26
DB112091
Compact NSX equipped with Micrologic

5 / 6 trip units provide communication
capabilities. Simple RJ45 cords connect
to a Modbus interface module.
A-2
Protection of Compact NSX devices are equipped with MA or TM They can be easily installed at all levels in distribution
thermal-magnetic trip units or Micrologic 2 / 5 / 6 systems, from the main LV switchboard to the
distribution electronic trip units to provide protection against short- subdistribution boards and enclosures.
systems circuits and overloads for: All Compact NSX devices can protect against
(AC 220/690 V) b distribution systems supplied by transformers insulation faults by adding a Vigi module or Vigirex
b distribution systems supplied by engine generator relay.
page A-14 sets
b long cables in IT and TN systems.
Protection of The Compact NSX range includes a number of b more complete protection against overloads and
versions to protect motor applications: short-circuits with additional motor-specific protection
motors b basic short-circuit protection with MA magnetic trip (phase unbalance, locked rotor, underload and long
(AC 220/690 V) units or the electronic Micrologic 1-M version, start) with Micrologic 6 E-M trip units. These versions
page A-36 combined with an external relay to provide thermal also offer communication, metering and operating
protection assistance.
b protection against overloads, short-circuits and The exceptional limiting capacity of Compact NSX
phase unbalance or loss with Micrologic 2-M trip units circuit breakers automatically provides type-2
coordination with the motor starter, in compliance with
standard IEC 60947-4-1.
Protection of Special applications:: For all these applications, circuit breakers in the
The Compact NSX range offers a number of versions Compact NSX range offer positive contact indication
special for special protection applications: and are suitable for isolation in accordance with
applications b service connection to public distribution systems standards IEC 60947-1 and 2.
page A-48 page A-48
b generators page A-50
b industrial control panels page A-52
with:
v compliance with international standards
IEC 60947-2 and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 N14
v compliance with US standard UL 489
v installation in universal and functional enclosures.
b 16 Hz 2/3 systems page A-53
b 400 Hz systems page A-54
Control and A switch-disconnector version of Compact NSX circuit For information on other switch-disconnector ranges,
breakers is available for circuit control and isolation. see the Interpact (offering positive contact indication
isolation using All add-on functions of Compact NSX circuit breakers and visible break) and Fupact (fusegear) catalogues.
switch- may be combined with the basic switch-disconnector
disconnectors function, including:
b earth-leakage protection
page A-56 b motor mechanism
b ammeter, etc.
Source To ensure a continuous supply of power, some A source-changeover system can be:
electrical installations are connected to two power b manual with mechanical device interlocking
changeover sources: b remote controlled with mechanical and/or electrical
systems b a normal source device interlocking
page A-60 b a replacement source to supply the installation when b automatic by adding a controller to manage
the normal source is not available. switching from one source to the other on the basis of
A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system external parameters.
between two circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors
avoids all risk of parallel connection of the sources
during switching.
A-3
and characteristics General characteristics of the
Compact NSX range
Compliance with standards

DB112018
Compact NSX circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with the following:
1 b international recommendations:
2 v IEC 60947-1: general rules
v IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers
NSX250 H 3 v IEC 60947-3: switch-disconnectors
v IEC 60947-4: contactors and motor starters
4 v IEC 60947-5.1 and following: control circuit devices and switching elements;
100 100
70 70 automatic control components
5
65 65 b European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and corresponding national standards:
50 50 6 v France NF
35 35
10 10 v Germany VDE
v United Kingdom BS
v Australia AS
7 v Italy CEI
b the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyd's Register
8 of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.), standard NF C 79-130 and recommendations
9 issued by the CNOMO organisation for the protection of machine tools.
100
65 10 For U.S. UL, Canadian CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please
35
consult us.
Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate: Pollution degree

1 Type of device: frame size and breaking capacity class Compact NSX circuit breakers are certified for operation in pollution-degree III
2 Ui: rated insulation voltage. environments as defined by IEC standards 60947-1 and 60664-1 (industrial
3 Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage. environments).
4 Ics: service breaking capacity.
5 Icu: ultimate breaking capacity for various values of the
rated operational voltage Ue Climatic withstand
6 Ue: operational voltage. Compact NSX circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests defined by the
7 Colour label indicating the breaking capacity class.
following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
8 Circuit breaker-disconnector symbol.
9 Reference standard. b IEC 60068-2-1: dry cold (-55 C)
10 Main standards with which the device complies. b IEC 60068-2-2: dry heat (+85 C)
Note: when the circuit breaker is equipped with an extended b IEC 60068-2-30: damp heat (95 % relative humidity at 55 C)
rotary handle, the door must be opened to access the rating b IEC 60068-2-52 severity level 2: salt mist.
plate.
Environment
Compact NSX respects the European environment directive EC/2002/95 concerning
the restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS).
Product environment profiles (PEP) have been prepared, describing the
environmental impact of every product throughout its life cycle, from production to
the end of its service life.
All Compact NSX production sites have set up an environmental management
system certified ISO 14001.
Each factory monitors the impact of its production processes. Every effort is made to
prevent pollution and to reduce consumption of natural resources.
Ambient temperature
b Compact NSX circuit breakers may be used between -25 C and +70 C. For
temperatures higher than 40C (65C for circuit breakers used to protect motor
feeders), devices must be derated (pages B-8 and B-9).
b Circuit breakers should be put into service under normal ambient, operating-
temperature conditions. Exceptionally, the circuit breaker may be put into service
when the ambient temperature is between -35 C and -25 C.
b The permissible storage-temperature range for Compact NSX circuit breakers in
the original packing is -50 C (1) and +85 C.
(1) -40 C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.
A-4
Electromagnetic compatibility
Compact NSX devices are protected against:
b overvoltages caused by circuit switching (e.g. lighting circuits)
b overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances
b devices emitting radio waves such as mobile telephones, radios, walkie-talkies,
radar, etc.
b electrostatic discharges produced by users.
Immunity levels for Compact NSX comply with the standards below.
b IEC/EN 60947-2: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear, part 2: Circuit
breakers:
v Annex F: Immunity tests for circuit breakers with electronic protection
v Annex B: Immunity tests for residual current protection
b IEC/EN 61000-4-2: Electrostatic-discharge immunity tests
b IEC/EN 61000-4-3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic-field immunity
tests
b IEC/EN 61000-4-4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity tests
b IEC/EN 61000-4-5: Surge immunity tests
b IEC/EN 61000-4-6: Immunity tests for conducted disturbances induced by radio-
frequency fields
b CISPR 11: Limits and methods of measurement of electromagnetic disturbance
characteristics of industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment.
Discrimination
Compact NSX reinforces the discrimination capabilities of the Compact NS range by
applying the rapid calculation capacity of the Micrologic trip units.
Total discrimination is now possible between NSX100 and modular Multi 9 circuit
breakers rated y 63 A (see page A-8).
Suitable for isolation with positive contact

PB103578-53
indication
All Compact NSX circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined in IEC
standard 60947-2:
b The isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position.
b The operating handle cannot indicate the OFF position unless the contacts are
effectively open.
b Padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open.
Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability of
the position-indication system.
The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing:
b the mechanical reliability of the position-indication system
b the absence of leakage currents
b overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections.
The tripped position does not insure isolation with positive contact indication.
Only the OFF position guarantees isolation.
DB112093
Installation in class II switchboards

All Compact NSX circuit breakers are class II front face devices. They may be
installed through the door of class II switchboards (as per IEC standards 61140 and
60664-1) without downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no
special operations, even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or
a motor mechanism.
Degree of protection
The following indications are in accordance with standards IEC 60529 (IP degree of
protection) and IEC 62262 (IK protection against external mechanical impacts).
Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields
b With toggle: IP40, IK07.
b With standard direct rotary handle / VDE: IP40 IK07
Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard
b With toggle: IP40, IK07.
b With direct rotary handle:
v standard / VDE: IP40, IK07
v MCC: IP43 IK07
v CNOMO: IP54 IK08
b With extended rotary handle: IP56 IK08
b With motor mechanism: IP40 IK07.
A-5
and characteristics Characteristics and performance of
Compact NSX circuit breakers
from 100 to 630 A
PB103354-40
Common characteristics
Rated voltages
Insulation voltage (V) Ui 800
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp 8
(kV)
Operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690
Suitability for isolation IEC/EN 60947-2 yes
Utilisation category A
Pollution degree IEC 60664-1 3
Circuit breakers
Breaking capacity levels
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 C
Number of poles
Compact NSX100/160/250. Breaking capacity (kA rms)
lcu AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V
380/415 V
440 V
PB103279-44
500 V
525 V
660/690 V
Service breaking capacity (kA rms)
lcs AC 50/60 Hz 220/240 V
380/415 V
440 V
500 V
525 V
660/690 V
Durability (C-O cycles) Mechanical
Electrical 440 V In/2
In
690 V In/2
In
Characteristics as per Nema AB1
Breaking capacity (kA rms) AC 50/60 Hz 240 V
480 V
600 V
Characteristics as per UL 508
Breaking capacity (kA rms) AC 50/60 Hz 240 V
480 V
Compact NSX400/630.
600 V
Protection and measurements
Short-circuit protection Magnetic only
Overload / short-circuit protection Thermal magnetic
Electronic
with neutral protection (Off-0.5-1-OSN) (1)
with ground-fault protection
with zone selective
interlocking (ZSI) (2)
Display / I, U, f, P, E, THD measurements / interrupted-current measurement
Options Power Meter display on door
Counters
Histories and alarms
Metering Com
Device status/control Com
Earth-leakage protection By Vigi module
By Vigirex relay
Installation / connections
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions (mm) Fixed, front connections 2/3P
WxHxD 4P
Weight (kg) Fixed, front connections 2/3P
4P
(1) OSN: Over Sized Neutral protection for neutrals carrying Connections
high currents (e.g. 3rd harmonics). Connection terminals Pitch With/without spreaders
(2) ZSI: Zone Selective Interlocking using pilot wires.
(3) 2P circuit breaker in 3P case for B and F types, only with Large Cu or Al cables Cross-section mm
thermal-magnetic trip unit.
A-6
Control
Manual With toggle b
With direct or extended rotary handle b
Electrical With remote control b
Versions
Fixed b
Withdrawable Plug-in base b
Chassis b
NSX100 NSX160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX630

B F N H S L B F N H S L B F N H S L F N H S L F N H S L
100 160 250 400 630

2 (3), 3, 4 2 (3), 3, 4 2 (3), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 100 120 150 40 85 100 120 150
25 36 50 70 100 150 25 36 50 70 100 150 25 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150
20 35 50 65 90 130 20 35 50 65 90 130 20 35 50 65 90 130 30 42 65 90 130 30 42 65 90 130
15 25 36 50 65 70 15 30 36 50 65 70 15 30 36 50 65 70 25 30 50 65 70 25 30 50 65 70
- 22 35 35 40 50 - 22 35 35 40 50 - 22 35 35 40 50 20 22 35 40 50 20 22 35 40 50
- 8 10 10 15 20 - 8 10 10 15 20 - 8 10 10 15 20 10 10 20 25 35 10 10 20 25 35
40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 100 120 150 40 85 100 120 150
25 36 50 70 100 150 25 36 50 70 100 150 25 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150
20 35 50 65 90 130 20 35 50 65 90 130 20 35 50 65 90 130 30 42 65 90 130 30 42 65 90 130
7.5 12.5 36 50 65 70 15 30 36 50 65 70 15 30 36 50 65 70 25 30 50 65 70 25 30 50 65 70
- 11 35 35 40 50 - 22 35 35 40 50 - 22 35 35 40 50 10 11 11 12 12 10 11 11 12 12
- 4 10 10 15 20 - 8 10 10 15 20 - 8 10 10 15 20 10 10 10 12 12 10 10 10 12 12
50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
50000 20000 20000 12000 8000
30000 10000 10000 6000 4000
20000 15000 10000 6000 6000
10000 7500 5000 3000 2000
40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 90 100 120 150 40 85 100 120 150 40 85 100 120 150
20 35 50 65 90 130 20 35 50 65 90 130 20 35 50 65 90 130 30 42 65 90 130 30 42 65 90 130
- 8 20 35 40 50 - 20 20 35 40 50 - 20 20 35 40 50 - 20 35 40 50 - 20 35 40 50
- 85 85 85 - - - 85 85 85 - - - 85 85 85 - - 85 85 85 - - 85 85 85 - -
- 25 50 65 - - - 35 50 65 - - - 35 50 65 - - 35 50 65 - - 35 50 65 - -
- 10 10 10 - - - 10 10 10 - - - 15 15 15 - - 20 20 20 - - 20 20 20 - -
b b b b b
b b b - -
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110 140 x 255 x 110
140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x 110
2.05 2.2 2.4 6.05 6.2
2.4 2.6 2.8 7.90 8.13
35/45 mm 35/45 mm 35/45 mm 45/52.5 mm 45/52.5 mm

45/70 mm 45/70 mm
300 300 300 4 x 240 4 x 240
A-7
and characteristics Compact NSX trip units
With Micrologic electronic trip units, Compact NSX Thermal-magnetic or electronic trip unit?
stands out from the crowd. Thanks to the new
Thermal-magnetic trip units protect against overcurrents and short-circuits using
generation of sensors and its processing capability,
tried and true techniques. But today, installation optimisation and energy efficiency
protection is enhanced even further. It also provides have become decisive factors and electronic trip units offering more advanced
measurements and operating information. protection functions combined with measurements are better suited to these needs.
Micrologic electronic trip units combine reflex tripping and intelligent operation.
Thanks to digital electronics, trip units have become faster as well as more accurate
and reliable. Wide setting ranges make installation upgrades easier. Designed with
processing capabilities, Micrologic trip units can provide measurement information
and device operating assistance. With this information, users can avoid or deal more
effectively with disturbances and can play a more active role in system operation.
They can manage the installation, anticipate on events and plan any necessary
servicing.
Accurate measurements for complete protection

Compact NSX devices take advantage of the vast experience acquired since the
launch of Masterpact NW circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units.
From 40 amperes on up to the short-circuit currents, they offer excellent
measurement accuracy. This is made possible by a new generation of current
transformers combining "iron-core" sensors for self-powered electronics and "air-
core" sensors (Rogowski toroids) for measurements.
The protection functions are managed by an ASIC component that is independent of
the measurement functions. This independence ensures immunity to conducted and
radiated disturbances and a high level of reliability.
Numerous security functions

Torque-limiting screws
The screws secure the trip unit to the circuit breaker. When the correct tightening
torque is reached, the screw heads break off. Optimum tightening avoids any risk of
temperature rise. A torque wrench is no longer required.
Easy and sure changing of trip units
All trip units are interchangeable, without wiring. A mechanical mismatch-protection
system makes it impossible to mount a trip unit on a circuit breaker with a lower
rating.
"Ready" LED for a continuous self-test
The LED on the front of the electronic trip units indicates the result of the self-test
runs continuously on the measurement system and the tripping release. As long as
the green LED is flashing, the links between the CTs, the processing electronics and
the Mitop release are operational. The circuit breaker is ready to protect. No need for
a test kit. A minimum current of 15 to 50 A, depending on the device, is required for
this indication function.
A patented dual adjustment system for protection functions.
Available on Micrologic 5 / 6, the system consists of:
b an adjustment using dials sets the maximum value
b an adjustment, made via the keypad or remotly, fine-tunes the setting. This setting
may not exceed the first one. It can be read directly on the Micrologic screen, to
within one ampere and a fraction of a second.
Coordinated tripping systems

Compact NSX detects faults even faster and its tripping time is reduced. It protects
the installation better and limits contact wear.
DB115565
E.g. NSX100F Ir Isd Ii Reflex threshold Icu
Currents 100 A 1000 A

z
1500 A
z
2400 A 36000 A
L
Time delay 1 - 200 s
Protection Overload:
function Slow trip inversely S or S0
proportional to 20 - 500 ms
the current level Short time:
Impedant short-circuit, I
instantaneous trip with 10 - 50 ms
adjustable S or fixed Instantaneous:
S0 time delay Ultra-fast detection
with micro delay < 5 ms
for discrimination Reflex:
Energy-based ultra-fast
detection with major current
limiting (1)
(1) This tripping system is completely independent of the trip unit.
Because it directly actuates the mechanism, it precedes the trip unit by a few milliseconds.
A-8
Unmatched discrimination
DB111354
Discrimination
NS400 NSX250 Compact NSX provides maximum continuity of service and savings through an
unmatched level of discrimination:
b given the high accuracy of measurements, overload discrimination is ensured
even between very close ratings
b for major faults, the fast processing of the Micrologic trip units means the
upstream device can anticipate the reaction of the downstream device. The
NS160 NSX100 upstream breaker adjusts its tripping delay to provide discrimination
(100 A) b for very high faults, the energy of the arc dissipated by the short-circuit in the
downstream breaker causes reflex tripping. The current seen by the upstream
device is significantly limited. The energy is not sufficient to cause tripping, so
discrimination is maintained whatever the short-circuit current.
Multi 9
For total discrimination over the entire range of possible faults, from the long-time
pick-up Ir to the ultimate short-circuit current Icu, a ratio of 2.5 must be maintained
between the ratings of the upstream and downstream devices.
Compact NSX100 with Micrologic for total discrimination This ratio is required to ensure selective reflex tripping for high short-circuits.
with Multi 9 devices rated y 40 A or a C60. Better
coordination between protection functions reduces the
difference in ratings required for total discrimination.
Understanding the names of Micrologic electronic trip units

Protection Frame Measurements Applications
1: I 2: NSX100/160/250 A: Ammeter Distribution, otherwise

2: LS0I G: Generator
DB112094
DB112155
5: LSI AB: Public distribution

6: LSIG M: Motors
Z: 16 Hz 2/3
I: Instantaneous 3: NSX400/630 E: Energy

L: Long time
DB112120
DB112156
S0: Short time (1)

(fixed delay)
S: Short time
G: Ground fault
Examples
Micrologic 1.3 Instantaneous only 400 or 630 A Distribution
Micrologic 2.3 LS0I 400 or 630 A Distribution
Micrologic 5.2 A LSI 100, 160 or 250 A Ammeter Distribution
Micrologic 6.3 E-M LSIG 400 or 630 A Energy Motor
(1) LS0I protection is standard on Micrologic 2. To ensure discrimination, it offers short-time protection S0 with a non-adjustable
delay and instantaneous protection.
A-9
and characteristics Overview of trip units
for Compact NSX
Compact NSX offers a range of trip units in Type of protection and applications
interchangeable cases, whether they are magnetic,
MA magnetic TM-D thermal-magnetic
thermal-magnetic or electronic. Versions 5 and 6 of the
electronic trip unit offer communication and metering.
Using Micrologic sensors and intelligence, Compact
DB112028
DB112029
NSX supplies all the information required to manage
the electrical installation and optimise energy use.
b Distribution and motors b Distribution

b Generators
Circuit breakers and trip units

Compact NSX100/160/250 DB112022
DB112023
DB112094
MA Distribution and TM-D Distribution

motors TM-G Generators
DB112092
Compact NSX400/630
1.3-M Distribution and
DB112120
motors
Settings and indications

DB112037
DB112038
Adjustment and Adjustment and

reading reading
Pick-up set in amps using Pick-up set in amps using
dials dials
Non-adjustable time Non-adjustable time
delay delay
A-10
Micrologic 2 electronic Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E electronic trip units
5 A or E 6 A or E 6 E-M
DB112030
DB112032
DB112033
DB115635
class
b Distribution b Distribution b Distribution b Motors

b Service connection (public and generators and generators
distribution)
b Generators
b Motors (I only)
A: current metering functions
b Motors E :current and energy metering functions.
DB112024
DB112026
DB111401
2.2 Distribution 5.2 A Distribution 6.2 A Distribution 6.2 E-M Motors
2.2-AB Service connection (public and generators and generators
distribution) 5.2 E Distribution 6.2 E Distribution
2.2-G Generators and generators and generators
2.2-M Motors 5.2 A-Z 16 Hz 2/3 networks
Micrologic 6.3 E-M

DB112025
DB112027
DB111402
Ready
>30A >95
Alarm
% T
380
350 400
320 440 Ir Cl. Isd Iunbal tunbal Ijam tjam Ig tg
280 470
250 500
500
Ir (A) Ii=6500A
A IEC60947-4-1
.5 .6 .7 Class
.4 .8
N 1/A 2/B 3/C test
.3 .9
.2 OFF Mode OK Ir 7.2Ir Isd
Ig (x In)
2.3 Distribution 5.3 A Distribution 6.3 A Distribution 6.3 E-M Motors

2.3-AB Service connection (public and generators and generators
distribution) 5.3 E Distribution 6.3 E Distribution
1.3-M Motors (I only) and generators and generators
2.3-M Motors 5.3 A-Z 16 Hz 2/3 networks
Alarm History 2/3

DB112039
DB112041
DB111366
Total reactive
Power
Date: 07 May 2007
Time: 10:28:03.01 PM
ESC OK
Adjustment and reading Adjustment and reading

Pick-up set in amps with fine Pick-up set in amps Connection to switchboard
adjustment using dials display unit
Non-adjustable time delay
DB112042
DB111367
DB112019
Fine adjustment via

keypad
Front indications
DB112043
0.5
DB112040
Adjustable time delays
Communication to Modbus
DB112019
Test connector
Self test Front indications

DB112040
Test connector
Self test
A-11
and characteristics Overview of trip units for Compact NSX
The capabilities of Micrologic 5 / 6 A and E trip units
DB112526
come into full play with the FDM121 switchboard
display unit.
When the two are connected via a simple cord with
RJ45 connectors, the combination offers full Power
Meter capabilities and all the measurements required
to monitor the electrical installation.
DB112044
Ammeter Micrologic (A)

I measurements
Current measurements
b Phase and neutral currents I1, I2, I3, IN
b Average current of the 3 phases Iavg
b Highest current of the three phases Imax
b Ground-fault current Ig (Micrologic 6.2 / 6.3 A)
b Maximeter/minimeter for I measurements
Operating and maintenance assistance

Indications, alarms and histories
b Indication of fault types
b Alarms for high/low alarm thresholds linked to I
measurements
b Trip, alarm and operating histories
b Time-stamped tables for settings and maximeters
Maintenance indicators
b Operation, trip and alarm counters
b Operating hours counter
b Contact wear
b Load profile and thermal image
Communication
b Modbus with add-on module
A-12
DB112045
Energy Micrologic (E)
I, U, f, P, E, THD measurements
Current measurements
b Phase and neutral currents I1, I2, I3, IN
b Average current of the 3 phases Iavg
b Highest current of the three phases Imax
b Ground-fault current Ig (Micrologic 6.2 / 6.3 A)
b Maximeter/minimeter for I measurements
b Current unbalance between phases
Voltage measurements
b Phase-to-phase (U) et phase-to-neutral (V) voltages
b Average voltages Uavg, Vavg
b Ph-Ph (U) and Ph-N (V) voltage unbalance
Frequency measurements
b Frequency (f)
Power-quality indicators
b Total harmonic distortion (THD) for current and
voltage
Power measurements
b Active, reactive and apparent power, total and per
phase
b Power factor and cos
Maximeters/minimeters
b For all I, U, f, P, E measurements
Demand current and power measurements
b Demand values, total and per phase
b Maximum demand
Energy metering
b Active, reactive and apparent energy, total and per
phase
Operating and maintenance assistance

Indications, alarms and histories
b Indication of fault types
b Alarms for high/low thresholds linked to I, U, f, P, E
measurements
b Trip, alarm and operating histories
b Time-stamped tables for settings and I, U, f, P, E
maximeters
b Operation, trip and alarm counters
b Operating hours counter
b Contact wear
b Load profile and thermal image
Communication
b Modbus with add-on module
A-13
Functions Protection of distribution
and characteristics
systems
TM thermal-magnetic and MA magnetic
trip units
TM thermal-magnetic and MA magnetic trip units can TM-D and TM-G thermal-magnetic trip units
be used on Compact NSX100/160/250 circuit breakers
DB112046
with performance levels B/F/H/N/S/L.
TM trip units are available in 2 versions:
b TM-D, for the protection of distribution cables
b TM-G, with a low threshold, for the protection of
generators or long cable lengths.
Vigi modules or Vigirex relays can be added to all the
circuit breakers to provide external earth-leakage Circuit breakers equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units are used mainly in
protection. industrial and commercial electrical distribution applications:
b TM-D, for protection of cables on distribution systems supplied by transformers
b TM-G, with a low pick-up for generators (lower short-circuit currents than with
transformers) and distribution systems with long cable lengths (fault currents limited
by the impedance of the cable).
Protection ..............................................................................
Thermal protection (Ir)
Thermal overload protection based on a bimetal strip providing an inverse time curve
I2t, corresponding to a temperature rise limit. Above this limit, the deformation of the
strip trips the circuit breaker operating mechanism.
This protection operates according to:
b Ir that can be adjusted in amps from 0.7 to 1 times the rating of the trip unit (16 A to
250 A), corresponding to settings from 11 to 250 A for the range of trip units
b a non-adjustable time delay, defined to ensure protection of the cables.
Magnetic protection (Im)
Short-circuit protection with a fixed or adjustable pick-up Im that initiates
instantaneous tripping if exceeded.
b TM-D: fixed pick-up, Im, for 16 to 160 A ratings and adjustable from 5 to 10 x In for
200 and 250 A ratings
b fixed pick-up for 16 to 63 A ratings.
Protection against insulation faults
Two solutions are possible by adding:
b a Vigi module acting directly on the trip unit of the circuit breaker
b a Vigirex relay connected to an MN or MX voltage release.
Protection versions
b 3-pole:
v 3P 3D: 3-pole frame (3P) with detection on all 3 poles (3D)
v 3P 2D: 3-pole frame (3P) with detection on 2 poles (2D).
b 4-pole:
v 4P 3D: 4-pole frame (4P) with detection on 3 poles (3D).
v 4P 4D: 4-pole frame (4P) with detection on all 4 poles (same threshold for phases
and neutral).
MA magnetic trip units

DB112047
In distribution applications, circuit breakers equipped with MA magnetic-only trip

units are used for:
b short-circuit protection of secondary windings of LV/LV transformers with overload
protection on the primary side.
b as an alternative to a switch-disconnector at the head of a switchboard in order to
provide short-circuit protection.
Their main use is however for motor protection applications, in conjunction with a
thermal relay and a contactor or motor starter (see "Motor protection", page A-36).
Protection ..............................................................................
Short-circuit protection with an adjustable pick-up Im that initiates instantaneous
tripping if exceeded.
b Im = In x ... set in amps on an adjustment dial covering the range 6 to 14 x In
for 2.5 to 100 A ratings or 9 to 14 In for 150 to 220 A ratings.
Protection versions
b 3-pole (3P 3D): 3-pole frame (3P) with detection on all 3 poles (3D).
Note: All the trip units have a transparent lead-sealable cover b 4-pole (4P 3D): 4-pole frame (4P) with detection on 3 poles (3D).
that protects access to the adjustment dials.
A-14
Thermal-magnetic trip units TM16D to 250D TM16G to 63G
Ratings (A) In at 40 C (1) 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 16 25 40 63
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b b b b b b b b - - - - b b b b
Compact NSX160 - - b b b b b b b b - - - b b b
Compact NSX250 - - - - - b b b b b b b - - b b
Thermal protection
Pick-up (A) Ir = In x ... adjustable in amps from 0.7 to 1 x In
tripping between
1.05 and 1.20 Ir
Time delay (s) tr non-adjustable non-adjustable
tr at 1.5 x In 120 to 400 120 to 400
tr at 6 x Ir 15 -
Magnetic protection
Pick-up (A) Im fixed adjustable fixed
accuracy 20 % Compact NSX100 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 63 80 80 125
Compact NSX160/250 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 1250 1250 5 to 10xIn 63 80 80 125
Time delay tm fixed
Neutral protection
Unprotected neutral 4P 3D no detection no 4P3D version
Fully protected neutral 4P 4D 1 x Ir 1 x Ir
Magnetic trip units MA 2.5 to 220
Ratings (A) In at 65 C 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 150 220
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b b b b b b - -
Compact NSX160 - - - b b b b -
Compact NSX250 - - - - - b b b
Instantaneous magnetic protection
Pick-up (A) Im = In x ... adjustable in amps adjustable in amps from 9 to
accuracy 20 % from 6 to 14 x In (9 settings) 14 x In
Time delay (ms) tm none
(1) For temperatures greater than 40C, the thermal protection characteristics are modified. See the temperature derating table.
A-15
and characteristics
systems
Micrologic 2 and 1.3-M trip units
Micrologic 2 trip units can be used on Compact Micrologic 2

NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers with performance
DB112050
levels B/F/H/N/S/L.
They provide:
b standard protection of distribution cables
b indication of:
v overloads (via LEDs)
v overload tripping (via the SDx relay module).
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 1.3-M trip Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 2 trip units can be used to protect
units, without thermal protection, are used in certain distribution systems supplied by transformers. For generators and long cables,
applications to replace switch-disconnectors at the Micrologic 2-G trip units offer better suited low pick-up solutions (see page A-50).
head of switchboards. Micrologic 1.3-M trip units are
dedicated to Compact NSX400/630 A circuit breakers. Protection ..............................................................
Settings are made using the adjustment dials with fine adjustment possibilities.
Overloads: Long time protection (Ir)
Inverse time protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick-up Ir set
using a dial and a non-adjustable time delay tr.
Short-circuits: Short-time protection with fixed time delay (Isd)
Protection with an adjustable pick-up Isd. Tripping takes place after a very short
delay used to allow discrimination with the downstream device.
Short-circuits: Non-adjustable instantaneous protection
Instantaneous short-circuit protection with a fixed pick-up.
Neutral protection
b On 3-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.
b On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch:
v 4P 3D: neutral unprotected
v 4P 3D + N/2: neutral protection at half the value of the phase pick-up, i.e. 0.5 x Ir
v 4P 4D: neutral fully protected at Ir.
DB112051
PB103377
Indications.............................................................
Front indications
b Green Ready LED: flashes slowly when the circuit breaker is ready to trip in the
event of a fault.
b Orange overload pre-alarm LED: steady on when I > 90 % Ir
b Red overload LED: steady on when I > 105 % Ir
DB112019
Remote indications
An overload trip signal can be remoted by installing an SDx relay module inside the
circuit breaker.
This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit via an optical
link and makes it available on the terminal block. The signal is cleared when the
circuit breaker is reclosed. For description, see page A-81.
Micrologic 1.3-M for magnetic protection only

DB112106
50A
SDx remote indication relay

module with its terminal block.
Micrologic 1.3-M trip units provide magnetic protection only, using electronic
technology. They are dedicated to 400/630 A 3-pole (3P 3D) circuit breakers or 4-
pole circuit breakers with detection on 3 poles (4P, 3D) and are used in certain
Note: all the trip units have a transparent lead-sealable cover applications to replace switch-disconnectors at the head of switchboards. They are
that protects access to the adjustment dials. especially used in 3-pole versions for motor protection, see page A-40.
A-16
Micrologic 2
Ratings (A) In at 40 C (1) 40 100 160 250 400 630
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b b - - - -
Compact NSX160 b b b - - -
Compact NSX250 b b b b - -
Compact NSX400 - - - b b -
Compact NSX630 - - - b b b
L Long-time protection
Ii
Pick-up (A) Io value depending on trip unit rating (In) and setting on dial
tripping between In = 40 A Io = 18 18 20 23 25 28 32 36 40
1.05 and 1.20 Ir In = 100 A Io = 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100
In = 160 A Io = 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160
In = 250 A (NSX250) Io = 100 110 125 140 160 175 200 225 250
In = 250 A (NSX400) Io = 70 100 125 140 160 175 200 225 250
In = 400 A Io = 160 180 200 230 250 280 320 360 400
In = 630 A Io = 250 280 320 350 400 450 500 570 630
Ir = Io x ... 9 fine adjustment settings from 0.9 to 1 (0.9 - 0.92 - 0.93 - 0.94 - 0.95 - 0.96 -
0.97 - 0.98 - 1) for each value of Io
Time delay (s) tr non-adjustable
accuracy 0 to -20% 1.5 x Ir 400
6 x Ir 16
7.2 x Ir 11
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
S0 Short-time protection with fixed time delay
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x ... 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
accuracy 10 %
Time delay (ms) tsd non-adjustable
Non-tripping time 20
Maximum break time 80
I Instantaneous protection
Pick-up (A) Ii non-adjustable 600 1500 2400 3000 4800 6900
accuracy 15 % Non-tripping time 10 ms
Maximum break time 50 ms for I > 1.5 Ii
(1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the Micrologic setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. See the
temperature derating table.
Micrologic 1.3-M
Ratings (A) In at 65 C 320 500
Circuit breaker Compact NSX400 b -
Compact NSX630 b b
S Short time protection
Pick-up (A) Isd adjustable directly in amps
accuracy 15 %
9 settings: 1600, 1920, 2440, 2560, 9 settings: 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000,
2880, 3200, 3520, 3840, 4160 A 4500, 5000, 5500, 6000, 6500 A
Pick-up (A) Ii non-adjustable 4800 6500
accuracy 15 % Non-tripping time 0
Maximum break time 30 ms
A-17
and characteristics
systems
Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E trip units
Micrologic 5 / 6 A (Ammeter) or E (Energy) trip units
DB112109
can be used on Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit
breakers with performance levels B/F/H/N/S/L. They all
have a display unit.
They offer basic LSI protection (Micrologic 5) or LSI and
ground-fault protection G (Micrologic 6).
They also offer measurement, alarm and
communication functions. Protection
Settings can be adjusted in two ways, using the dials and/or the keypad .
The keypad can be used to make fine adjustments in 1 A steps below the maximum
value defined by the setting on the dial. Access to setting modifications via the
keypad is protected by a locking function displayed on the screen and controlled
by a microswitch . The lock is activated automatically if the keypad is not used for
5 minutes. Access to the microswitch is protected by a transparent lead-sealable
cover. With the cover closed, it is still possible to display the various settings and
Measurement
DB115566
measurements using the keypad.

Display
Settings Overloads: Long time protection (Ir)
Maintenance
Inverse time protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick-up Ir set
using a dial or the keypad for fine adjustments. The time delay tr is set using the
keypad.
Short-circuits: Short-time protection (Isd)
Short-circuit protection with an adjustable pick-up Isd and adjustable time delay tsd,
with the possibility of including a portion of an inverse time curve (I2t On).
Short-circuits: Instantaneous protection (Ii)
Instantaneous protection with adjustable pick-up Ii.
Additional ground fault protection (Ig) on Micrologic 6
Residual type ground-fault protection with an adjustable pick-up Ig (with Off position)
Trip unit menus. and adjustable time delay tg. Possibility of including a portion of an inverse time
curve (I2t On).
Neutral protection
Isd fault b On 4-pole circuit breakers, this protection can be set via the keypad:
DB115567
v Off: neutral unprotected

v 0.5: neutral protection at half the value of the phase pick-up, i.e. 0.5 x Ir
v 1.0: neutral fully protected at Ir
v OSN: Oversized neutral protection at 1.6 times the value of the phase pick-up.
Used when there is a high level of 3rd order harmonics (or orders that are multiples
of 3) that accumulate in the neutral and create a high current. In this case, the device
must be limited to Ir = 0.63 x In for the maximum neutral protection setting of 1.6 x Ir.
b With 3-pole circuit breakers, the neutral can be protected by installing an external
neutral sensor with the output (T1, T2) connected to the trip unit.
Faulty phase Interrupted current Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)
A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of Micrologic control
Display of interrupted current.
units to provide zone selective interlocking for short-time (Isd) and ground-fault (Ig)
protection, without a time delay. For Compact NSX 100 to 250, the ZSI function is
available only in relation to the upstream circuit breaker (ZSI out).
PB103377
Display of type of fault ..........................................

On a fault trip, the type of fault (Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig), the phase concerned and the interrupted
current are displayed. An external power supply is required.
Indications.............................................................
Front indications
event of a fault.
Remote indications
An SDx relay module installed inside the circuit breaker can be used to remote the
following information:
b overload trip
b overload prealarm (Micrologic 5) or ground fault trip (Micrologic 6).
SDx remote indication relay
module with its terminal block. This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit via an optical
circuit breaker is closed.
Note: all the trip units have a transparent lead-sealable cover These outputs can be reprogrammed to be assigned to other types of tripping or
that protects access to the adjustment dials. alarm. The module is described in detail in the section dealing with accessories.
A-18
Protection Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E trip units
Ratings (A) In at 40 C (1) 40 (2) 100 160 250 400 630
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b b - - - -
Compact NSX160 b b b - - -
Compact NSX250 b b b b - -
Compact NSX400 - - - - b -
Compact NSX630 - - - - b b
Pick-up (A) Ir = ... dial setting value depending on trip unit rating (In) and setting on dial
1.05 and 1.20 Ir
In = 100 A Io = 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100
In = 160 A Io = 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160
In = 250 A Io = 100 110 125 140 160 175 200 225 250
In = 400 A Io = 160 180 200 230 250 280 320 360 400
In = 630 A Io = 250 280 320 350 400 450 500 570 630
keypad setting Fine adjustment in 1 A steps below maximum value set on dial
Time delay (s) tr = ... keypad setting 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
accuracy 0 to -20 % 1.5 x Ir 15 25 50 100 200 400
6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
7.2 x Ir 0.35 0.7 1.4 2.8 5.5 11
S Short-time protection with adjustable time delay
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x ... dial setting 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
accuracy 10 % for Micrologic 5 Fine adjustment in 0.5 x Ir steps using the keypad
keypad settings Adjustment in steps of 0.5 x In over the range 1.5 x In to:
for micrologic 6 15 x In (40 to 160 A), 12 x In (250 to 400 A) or 11 x In (630 A)
Time delay (s) tsd = ... keypad I2Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
setting I2On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Non-tripping time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
Maximum break time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x keypad setting Adjustment in steps of 0.5 x In over the range 1.5 x In to:
accuracy 15 % 15 x In (40 to 160 A), 12 x In (250 to 400 A) or 11 x In (630 A)
Non-tripping time 10 ms
Maximum break time 50 ms for I > Ii
G Ground-fault protection - for Micrologic 6 A or E
Pick-up (A) Ig = In x dial setting
accuracy 10 % In = 40 A 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Off
In > 40 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1 Off
Fine adjustment in 0.05 A steps using the keypad
Time delay (s) tg = ... keypad I2Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
setting I2On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Non-tripping time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
Maximum break time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Test Ig function built-in
(2) For 40 A rating, the neutral N/2 adjustment is not possible.
A-19
Functions Power Meter functions
and characteristics Electronic Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E
In addition to protection functions, Micrologic 5 / 6 trip Micrologic A and E measurement functions are made possible by Micrologic
units offer all the functions of Power Meter products as intelligence and the accuracy of the sensors. They are handled by a microprocessor
well as operating-assistance for the circuit breaker. that operates independent of protection functions.
b display of settings
b measurement functions: Display ..................................................................
v Ammeter (A)
v Energy (E) Micrologic LCD
b alarms The user can display all the protection settings and the main measurements on the
b time-stamped histories and event tables LCD screen of the trip unit.
b maintenance indicator b Micrologic A: instantaneous rms current measurements
b communication. b Micrologic E: voltage, frequency and power measurements and energy metering,
in addition to the measurements offered by Micrologic A
To make the display available under all conditions and increase operating comfort,
an external power supply is recommended for Micrologic A.
It is indispensable to:
b display faults and interrupted current measurements
b use all the functions of Micrologic E (e.g. metering of low power and energy
values)
b ensure operation of the communication system.
PB103365
The external power supply can be shared by several devices. For description, see
page A-32.
FDM121 display unit

An FDM121 switchboard display unit can be connected to a Micrologic trip unit using
a prefabricated cord to display all measurements on a screen. The result is a
veritable 96 x 96 mm Power Meter.
In addition to the information displayed on the Micrologic LCD, the FDM121 screen
shows demand, power quality and maximeter/minimeter values along with alarms,
histories and maintenance indicators.
The FMD121 display unit requires a 24 V DC power supply. The Micrologic trip unit is
Micrologic built-in LCD display showing an energy
measurement.
supplied by the same power supply via the cord connecting it to the FDM121.
PC screen
When the Micrologic, with or without an FDM121 switchboard display unit, is
DB112211
Main Menu
Quick View connected to a communication network, all information can be accessed via a PC.
Metering
Alarms
Services
Measurements .....................................................
ESC OK Instantaneous rms measurements
The Micrologic A and E continuously display the RMS value of the highest current of
the three phases and neutral (Imax). The navigation buttons can be used to
scroll through the main measurements.
FDM121 display: navigation. In the event of a fault trip, the current interrupted is memorised.
The Micrologic A measures phase, neutral, ground fault currents.
The Micrologic E offers voltage, frequency and power measurements in addition to
the measurements provided by Micrologic A
Maximeters / minimeters
Every instantaneous measurement provided by Micrologic A or E can be associated
DB112131
DB112132
V 4/7
with a maximeter/minimeter. The maximeters for the highest current of the 3 phases
I
I1 310 A I2 315 A
402 V % 100 120
U1
and neutral, the demand current and power can be reset via the trip unit keypad, the
FDM121 display unit or the communication system.
% % 398 V % 100 120
I3 302 A IN 23 A U2
401 V % 100 120

U3
%
ESC
%
ESC
Energy metering
The Micrologic E also measures the energy consumed since the last reset of the
meter. The active energy meter can be reset via the keypad and the FDM121 display
unit or the communication system.
Current. Voltage.
Demand and maximum demand values
Micrologic E also calculates demand current and power values. These calculations
DB112133
DB112134
PQS E can be made using a block or sliding interval that can be set from 5 to 60 minutes in
P 64 kW Ep 14397 kWh steps of 1 minute. The window can be synchronised with a signal sent via the
Q 38 kVar Eq 8325 kVarh
communication system. Whatever the calculation method, the calculated values can
S 51 kVA Es 13035 kVAh
be recovered on a PC via Modbus communication.
Ordinary spreadsheet software can be used to provide trend curves and forecasts
ESC ESC
based on this data. They will provide a basis for load shedding and reconnection
operations used to adjust consumption to the subscribed power.
Power quality
Power. Consumption.
Micrologic E calculates power quality indicators taking into account the presence of
Examples of measurement screens on the FDM121 display harmonics up to the 15th order, including the total harmonic distortion (THD) of
unit. current and voltage.
A-20
PB103354
PB103360
PB103364
Micrologic 5 / 6 integrated Power Meter functions Type Display
A E Micrologic FDM121
LCD display
Display of protection settings
Pick-ups (A) and delays All settings can be displayed Ir, tr, Isd, tsd, Ii, Ig, tg b b b
Measurements
Instantaneous rms measurements
Currents (A) Phases and neutral I1, I2, I3, IN b b b b
Average of phases Iavg = (I1 + I2 + I3) / 3 b b - b
Highest current of the 3 phases and neutral Imax of I1, I2, I3, IN b b b b
Ground fault (Micrologic 6) % Ig (pick-up setting) b b b b
Current unbalance between phases % Iavg - b - b
Voltages (V) Phase-to-phase U12, U23, U31 - b b b
Phase-to-neutral V1N, V2N, V3N - b b b
Average of phase-to-phase voltages Uavg = (U12 + U21 + U23) / 3 - b - b
Average of phase-to-neutral voltages Vavg = (V1N + V2N + V3N) / 3 - b - b
Ph-Ph and Ph-N voltage unbalance % Uavg and % Vavg - b - b
Phase sequence 1-2-3, 1-3-2 - b b b
Frequency (Hz) Power system f - b - b
Power Active (kW) P, total / per phase - b b/- b
Reactive (kVAR) Q, total / per phase - b b/- b
Apparent (kVA) S, total / per phase - b b/- b
Power factor and cos (fundamental) PF and cos , total and per phase - b - b
Maximeters / minimeters
Associated with instantaneous rms Reset via Micrologic or FDM121 display unit b b - b
measurements
Energy metering
Energy Active (kW), reactive (kVARh), apparent Total since last reset - b b b
(kVAh) Absolute or signed mode (1)
Demand current (A) Phases and neutral Present value on the selected window - b - b
Maximum demand since last reset - b - b
Demand power Active (kWh), reactive (kVAR), Present value on the selected window - b - b
apparent (kVA) Maximum demand since last reset - b - b
Calculation window Sliding, fixed or com-synchronised Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes in 1 minute - b - (2)
steps
Power quality
Total harmonic Of voltage with respect to rms value THDU,THDV of the Ph-Ph and Ph-N voltage - b - b
distortion (%) Of current with respect to rms value THDI of the phase current - b - b
(1) Absolute mode: E absolute = E out + E in; Signed mode: E signed = E out - E in.
(2) Available via the communication system only.
Additional technical characteristics

Measurement accuracy
Accuracies are those of the entire measurement system, including the sensors:
b Current: Class 1 as per IEC 61557-12
b Voltage: 0.5 %
b Power and energy: Class 2 as per IEC 61557-12
b Frequency: 0.1 %.
A-21
Functions Operating-assistance functions
and characteristics Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E trip units
Personalised alarms with time-stamping ............

Alarm types
The user can assign an alarm to all Micrologic A or E measurements or events:
b up to 12 alarms can be used together:
v two alarms are predefined and activated automatically:
- Micrologic 5: overload (Ir)
- Micrologic 6: overload (Ir) and ground fault (Ig)
v thresholds, priorities and time delays can be set for ten other alarms.
b the same measurement can be used for different alarms to precisely monitor
certain values, e.g. the frequency or the voltage
b alarms can also be assigned to various states: phase lead/lag, four quadrants,
phase sequence
b selection of display priorities, with pop-up possibility
b alarm time-stamping.
PB103365
Alarm settings
Alarms cannot be set via the keypad or the FDM121 display unit. They are set via
communication with the PC. Set-up includes the threshold, priority, activation delay
before display and deactivation delay. It is also possible to reprogram the standard
assignment for the two SDx relay outputs to user-selected alarms.
Alarm reading
Remote alarm indications
b reading on FDM121 display unit or on PC via the communication system
b remote indications via SDx relay with two output contacts for alarms.
Micrologic built-in LCD display.
Histories and event tables.....................................

Micrologic A and E have histories and event tables that are always active.
DB112212
Main Menu Three types of time-stamped histories

Quick View
b Tripping due to overruns of Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig: last 17 trips
b Alarms: last 10 alarms
Metering
Alarms
Services
b Operating events: last 10 events
Each history record is stored with:
ESC OK
b indications in clear text in a number of user-selectable languages
b time-stamping: date and time of event
b status: pick-up / drop-out
FDM121 display: navigation. Two types of time-stamped event tables
b Protection settings
b Minimeters / maximeters
Display of alarms and tables
The time-stamped histories and event tables may be displayed on a PC via the
DB112127
DB112128
Alarm History 2/3 Alarm History 2/3

communication system.
Total reactive Over maximum Embedded memory
Power Current unbalance
Micrologic A and E have a non-volatile memory that saves all data on alarms,
Date: 07 May 2007 Date: 10 Nov 2007
Time: 10:28:03.01 PM Time: 06:35:08.04 AM histories, event tables, counters and maintenance indicators even if power is lost.
ESC OK ESC OK
Maintenance indicators .........................................

Micrologic A and E have indicators for, among others, the number of operating
cycles, contact wear and operating times (operating hours counter) of the Compact
Overpower alarm. Phase unbalance alarm. NSX circuit breaker.
It is possible to assign an alarm to the operating cycle counter to plan maintenance.
DB112129
DB112130
Alarm History 2/3 Alarm History 3/3 The various indicators can be used together with the trip histories to analyse the
Under voltage Under voltage level of stresses the device has been subjected to.
Pick-up Drop-out
The information provided by the indicators cannot be displayed on the Micrologic
Date: Date:
LCD. It is displayed on the PC via the communication system.
05 Nov 2007 05 Nov 2007
Time: 02:31:03.61 AM Time: 02:32:26.12 AM
ESC OK ESC OK
Management of installed devices
Each circuit breaker equipped with a Micrologic 5 or 6 trip unit can be identified via the
communication system:
Alarm pick-up and drop-out. b serial number
b firmware version
b hardware version
Examples of operating-assistance screens on the FDM121
b device name assigned by the user.
display unit.
This information together with the previously described indications provides a clear
view of the state of the installed devices.
A-22
PB103354
PB103360
PB103364
Micrologic 5 / 6 operating assistance functions Type Display
A E Micrologic FDM121
LCD display
Personalised alarms
Settings Up to 10 alarms assigned to all A and E measurements b b - (2)
Phase lead/lag, four quadrants, phase sequence, display priority selection - b - (2)
Display Alarms and tripping b b - (2)
Remote indications Activation of two dedicated contacts on SDx module b b - -

Time-stamped histories
Trips Cause of tripping Ir, Isd, Ii (Micrologic 5, 6) b b - (2)
(last 17) (time-stamping with ms) Ig (Micrologic 6) b b - (2)
Alarms b b - (2)
(last 10)
Operating events Event types Modification of protection setting by dial - b - (2)
(last 10) Opening of keypad lock - b - (2)
Test via keypad - b - (2)
Test via external tool - b - (2)
Time setting (date and time) - b - (2)
Reset for maximeter/minimeter and energy meter b b b b

Time stamping Presentation Date and time, text, status b b - (2)
Time-stamped event tables

Protection settings Setting modified (value displayed) Ir tr Isd tsd Ii Ig tg b b - (2)
Time-stamping Date and time of modification b b - (2)
Previous value Value before modification b b - (2)
Min/Max Values monitored I1 I2 I3 IN b - - (2)
I1 I2 I3 IN U12 U23 U31 f - b - (2)
Time-stamping of each value Date and time of min/max record b b - (2)
Current min/max value Min/max value b b - (2)
Counter Mechanical cycles (1) Assignable to an alarm b b - (2)
Electrical cycles (1) Assignable to an alarm b b - (2)
Trips One per type of trip b b - (2)
Alarms One for each type of alarm b b - (2)
Hours Total operating time (hours) b b - (2)
Indicator Contact wear % b b - (2)
Load profile Hours at different load levels % of hours in four current ranges: 0-49 % In, 50-79 % b b - (2)
In, 80-89 % In and u 90 % In
(1) The BSCM module (page A-27) is required for these functions.
(2) Available via the communication system only.

Contact wear
Each time Compact NSX opens, the Micrologic 5 / 6 trip unit measures the interrupted current
and increments the contact-wear indicator as a function of the interrupted current, according to
test results stored in memory. Breaking under normal load conditions results in a very slight
increment. The indicator value may be read on the FDM121 display. It provides an estimation of
contact wear calculated on the basis of the cumulative forces affecting the circuit breaker. When
the indicator reaches 80%, it is advised to replace the circuit breaker to ensure the availability of
the protected equipment.
Circuit breaker load profile
Micrologic 5 / 6 calculates the load profile of the circuit breaker protecting a load circuit. The
profile indicates the percentage of the total operating time at four current levels (% of breaker In):
b 0 to 49 % In
b 50 to 79 % In
b 80 to 89 % In
b u 90 % In.
This information can be used to optimise use of the protected equipment or to plan ahead for
extensions.
A-23
Functions Switchboard-display functions
and characteristics Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E trip units
Micrologic measurement capabilities come into full play FDM121 switchboard display
with the FDM121 switchboard display. It connects to The FDM121 is a switchboard display unit that can be integrated in the Compact
Compact NSX via a simple cord and displays NSX100 to 630 A system. It uses the sensors and processing capacity of the
Micrologic information. The result is a true integrated Micrologic trip unit. It is easy to use and requires no special software or settings. It is
unit combining a circuit breaker and a Power Meter. immediately operational when connected to the Compact NSX by a simple cord.
Additional operating assistance functions can also be The FDM121 is a large display, but requires very little depth. The anti-glare graphic
displayed. screen is backlit for very easy reading even under poor ambient lighting and at sharp
angles.
Display of Micrologic measurements and alarms

The FDM121 is intended to display Micrologic 5 / 6 measurements, alarms and
operating information. It cannot be used to modify the protection settings.
Measurements may be easily accessed via a menu.
All user-defined alarms are automatically displayed. The display mode depends on
the priority level selected during alarm set-up:
b high priority: a pop-up window displays the time-stamped description of the alarm
and the orange LED flashes
b medium priority: the orange "Alarm" LED goes steady on
b low priority: no display on the screen.
All faults resulting in a trip automatically produce a high-priority alarm, without any
special settings required.
In all cases, the alarm history is updated.
If power to the FDM121 fails, all information is stored in the Micrologic non-volatile
memory. The data can be consulted via the communication system when power is
restored.
Status indications and remote control

When the circuit breaker is equipped with the BSCM module (page A-27), the
FDM121 display can also be used to view circuit breaker status conditions:
b O/F: ON/OFF
b SD: trip indication
b SDE: Fault-trip indication (overload, short-circuit, ground fault)
Main characteristics
b 96 x 96 x 30 mm screen requiring 10 mm behind the door (or 20 mm when the
PB103582
PB103807-32
24 volt power supply connector is used).

b White backlighting.
b Wide viewing angle: vertical 60, horizontal 30.
b High resolution: excellent reading of graphic symbols.
b Alarm LED: flashing orange for alarm pick-up, steady orange after operator reset if
alarm condition persists.
b Operating temperature range -10 C to +55 C.
b CE / UL marking.
b 24 V DC power supply, with tolerances 24 V -20 % (19.2 V) to 24 V +10 % (26.4 V).
When the FDM121 is connected to the communication network, the 24 V is supplied
FDM121 display. Surface mount accessory. by the communication system wiring system.
b Consumption 40 mA.
Mounting
PB103581-31
The FDM121 is easily installed in a switchboard.

b Standard door cut-out 92 x 92 mm.
b Attached using clips.
To avoid a cut-out in the door, an accessory is available for surface mounting by
drilling only two 22 mm diameter holes.
The FDM121 degree of protection is IP54 in front. IP54 is maintained after
switchboard mounting by using the supplied gasket during installation.
Connection
The FDM121 is equipped with:
b a 24 V DC terminal block:
v plug-in type with 2 wire inputs per point for easy daisy-chaining
v power supply range of 24 V -20 % (19.2 V) to 24 V +10 % (26.4 V)
b two RJ45 jacks.
The Micrologic connects to the internal communication terminal block on the
Compact NSX via the pre-wired NSX cord. Connection to one of the RJ45
connectors on the FDM121 automatically establishes communication between the
Micrologic and the FDM121 and supplies power to the Micrologic measurement
Connection with FDM121 display unit. functions.
When the second connector is not used, it must be fitted with a line terminator.
A-24
Navigation
DB112135
I
I1 310 A I2 315 A Five buttons are used for intuitive and fast navigation.
The Context button may be used to select the type of display (digital, bargraph,
% %
I3 302 A IN 23 A analogue).
The user can select the display language (Chinese, English, French, German,
%
ESC
%
Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, etc.) Other languages can be downloaded.
Screens
Main menu
1 2 3 4 5 6 When powered up, the FDM121 screen automatically displays the ON/OFF status of
the device.
1 Escape
2 Down
3 OK Quick view
4 Up
5 Context Metering
6 Alarm LED
Alarms
Services.
When not in use, the screen is not backlit. Backlighting can be activated by pressing
one of the buttons. It goes off after 3 minutes.
Fast access to essential information

b Quick view provides access to five screens that display a summary of essential
DB112136
DB112137
Produit Id Main Menu

operating information (I, U, f, P, E, THD, circuit breaker On / Off).
Micrologic 5.3A Quick View
Serial number: P07451

Metering Access to detailed information
Part number: LU432091
Alarms b "Metering" can be used to display the measurement data (I, U-V, f, P, Q, S, E,
Firmware: 1.02
Services THD, PF) with the corresponding min/max values.
ESC ESC OK b Alarms displays active alarms and the alarm history.
b Services provides access to the operation counters, energy and maximeter reset
function, maintenance indicators, identification of modules connected to the internal
bus and FDM121 internal settings (language, contrast, etc.)
Product identification. Quick view.
DB112138
DB112139
Metering U Average 9/10

I
387 V % 100 120
avg
U-V
392 V % 100 120
PQS MIN
E 388 V % 100 120

MAX
F - PF - cos
ESC OK ESC
Metering: sub-menu. Metering: U average.

DB112140
DB112141
NonResettableEnergy 1/3 Display

Contrast
EpIN 5111947 kWh
Brightness
EpOut 12345678 kWh
Language
ESC ESC OK
Metering: meter. Services.
A-25
Functions Compact NSX communication
and characteristics Communications modules
All Compact NSX devices can be equipped with the Four functional levels
communication function via a prewired connection The Compact NSX can be integrated in a Modbus communication environment. Four
system and a Modbus network interface. functional levels can be used separately or combined.
The interface can be connected directly or via the Communication of status indications
FDM121 switchboard display unit. Four functional This level is compatible with all Compact NSX circuit breakers, whatever the trip unit,
levels can be combined to adapt to all supervision and with all switch-disconnectors. Using the BSCM module, the following information
requirements. is accessible:
b ON/OFF position (O/F)
b trip indication (SD)
b fault-trip indication (SDE).
Communication of commands
Also available on all circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, this level
(communicating remote control) can be used to:
b open
b close
b reset.
Communication of measurements with Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E
This level provides access to all available information:
b instantaneous and demand values
b maximeters/minimeters
b energy metering
b demand current and power
b power quality.
Communication of operating assistance with Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E
b protection and alarm settings
b time-stamped histories and event tables
b maintenance indicators.
Communication components and connections

Modbus
DB115568
24 V DC
DB112060
10
10
1.3 m
Connections 1 Modbus network

b Compact NSX is connected to the Modbus interface or 2 Modbus interface
FDM121 display unit via the internal terminal block for the NSX 3 NSX cord
cord equipped with an RJ45 connector. 4 Internal terminal block for communication via NSX cord
v cord available in three lengths: 0.35 m, 1.3 m and 3 m. 5 BSCM module
v insulated 0.35 m version for installations > 480 V AC 6 Prefabricated wiring
v lengths up to 10 m possible using extensions. 7 Micrologic trip unit
b The FDM121 display unit is connected to the Modbus 8 FDM121 display
interface by a communication cable with RJ45 connectors on 9 RJ45 cable
both ends. 10 Line terminator (on unused connector if applicable)
A-26
Modbus interface module
Functions
DB112083
This module, required for connection to the network,
contains the Modbus address (1 to 99) declared by the
user via the two dials in front. It automatically adapts
(baud rate, parity) to the Modbus network in which it is
installed.
It is equipped with a lock-out switch to enable or disable
operations involving writing to Micrologic, i.e. reset,
counter reset, setting modifications, device opening
and closing commands, etc.
There is a built-in test function to check the connections
of the Modbus interface module with the Micrologic and
FDM121 display unit.
Mounting
The module is mounted on a DIN rail. A number of Modbus interface module.
modules may be clipped one next to the other.
For this, a stacking accessory is available for fast clip-
BSCM module
connection of both the Modbus link and the 24 V DC
supply. Functions
The Modbus interface module supplies 24 V DC to the The optional BSCM Breaker Status & Control Module
corresponding Micrologic, FDM121 display and BSCM is used to acquire device status indications and control
module. Module consumption is 60 mA / 24 V DC. the communicating remote-control function.
It includes a memory used to manage the maintenance
indicators.
Status indications
Indication of device status:
O/F, SD and SDE.
DB112035
The BSCM module manages the following indicators:
b mechanical operation counter
b electrical operation counter
b history of status indications.
It is possible to assign an alarm to the operation
counters.
Controls
The module can be used to carry out communicating
remote control operations: (open,
open, close and reset) in
different modes (manual, auto).
Mounting
The BSCM module can be installed on all Compact
NSX circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors. It
simply clips into the auxiliary contact slots. It occupies
the slots of one O/F contact and one SDE contact. The
BSCM is supplied with 24 V DC power automatically
1 Five-point Modbus and 24 V DC connector via the NSX cord when the communication system is
2 Two Modbus address dials (1 to 99) installed.
3 Modbus traffic LED
4 Lock-out to disable writing to the NSX
5 Test LED
6 Test button
7 Two connectors for RJ45 cable
DB112084
DB112085
BSCM module.
Mounting with stacking accessory.
A-27
and characteristics Networks and software
Compact NSX uses the Modbus communication Modbus

protocol, compatible with SMS PowerLogic supervision Modbus is the most widely used communication
systems. protocol in industrial networks. It operates in master-
Two downloadable utilities facilitate implementation of slave mode. The devices (slaves) communicate one
communication functions. after the other with a gateway (master).
Masterpact, Compact NSX, PowerLogic and Sepam
products all operate with this protocol. A Modbus
network is generally implemented on an LV or MV
switchboard scale.
Depending on the data monitored and the desired
refresh rate, a Modbus network connected to a
gateway can serve 4 to 16 devices. For larger
installations, a number of Modbus networks can be
connected to an Ethernet network (TCP/IP/Modbus
protocol) via their gateways.
DB115569
Automatic
Firewall notification
Nomad
Internet mode
Site Intranet
Ethernet (TCP/IP/Modbus)
Consultation Consultation
MPS100 EGX400 RSU RSU
RCU RCU
Modbus Modbus
FDM121
Masterpact Compact NSX Sepam PowerLogic

Power Meter
A-28
Micrologic utilities
b Two utilities, RSU and RCU, presented on the next
page, are available to assist in starting up a
communicating installation. Intended for Compact NSX
and Masterpact, the software can be downloaded from
the Schneider Electric internet site.
b The "Live update" function enables immediate
updating to obtain the most recent upgrades. These
easy-to-use utilities include starting assistance and on-
line help. They are compatible with Microsoft Windows
2000, XP and Vista.
DB112125
RSU configuration screen for a Micrologic 5.2.

DB112214
Gateway
The gateway has two functions:
b access to the company intranet (Ethernet) by
converting Modbus frames to the TCP/IP/Modbus
protocol
b optional web-page server for the information from
the devices. RCU mini-supervision screen for current measurements.
Examples include MPS100, EGX400 and EGX100.
MPS100
b Plug and play device. It comes loaded with a web-
page application for graphic display of currents and
voltages and viewing of circuit-breaker status and
power and energy values.
To use the application, simply declare the Modbus
addresses of the connected slaves. Automatically
recognised devices include all Masterpact and
Compact NSX Micrologic trip units and the
PM500/700/800 and PM9c power monitoring units.
b Can be used for automatic alarm notification via a
messaging server available on the site intranet or via
mobile phones (e-mail converted into SMS).
b Can be used for logging of data that can be
automatically sent as e-mail attachments, e.g. a weekly
consumption report.
DB112126
Web page.
A-29
and characteristics RSU and RCU utilities
Two utilities, RSU and RCU, are available to assist in RSU (Remote Setting Utility)
starting up a communicating installation. This utility is used to set the protection functions and alarms for each Masterpact and
They can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric Compact NSX device.
internet site and include a "Live update" function that After connection to the network and entry of the circuit-breaker Modbus address, the
enables immediate updating. software automatically detects the type of trip unit installed.
There are two possible operating modes.
Off-line with the software disconnected from the

communication network
For each selected circuit breaker, the user can do the following.
Determine the protection settings
The settings are carried out on a screen that shows the front of the trip unit. The
Micrologic setting dials, keypad and screen are simulated for easy use of all
DB118724
Micrologic setting functions.

Save and duplicate the protection settings
Each configuration created can be saved for subsequent device programming. It can
also be duplicated and used as the basis for programming another circuit breaker.
On-line with the software connected to the network

Similarly, for each selected circuit breaker, the user can do the following.
Display the current settings
The software displays the trip unit and provides access to all settings.
View the corresponding protection curves
A graphic curve module in the software displays the protection curve corresponding
to the settings. It is possible to lay a second curve over the first for discrimination
DB118725
studies.
Modify settings in a secure manner
b There are different levels of security:
v password: by default, it is the same for all devices, but can be differentiated for
each device
v locking of the Modbus interface module which must be unlocked before the
corresponding device can be set remotely
v maximum settings limited by the positions of the two dials on the trip unit.
These dials, set by the user, determine the maximum settings that can be made via
the communication system.
b Settings are modified by:
RSU: Micrologic Remote Setting Utility. v either direct, on-line setting of the protection settings on the screen
v or by loading the settings prepared in off-line mode. This is possible only if the
positions of the dials allow the new settings.
All manual settings made subsequently on the device have priority.
Program alarms
b Up to 12 alarms can be linked to measurements or events.
b two alarms are predefined and activated automatically:
v Micrologic 5: overload (Ir)
v Micrologic 6: overload (Ir) and ground fault (Ig)
b thresholds, priorities and time delays can be set for 10 other alarms. They may be
selected from a list of 91 alarms
Set the outputs of the SDx relays
This is required when the user wants to change the standard configuration and
assign different signals to the 2 outputs of the SDx relay.
DB118723
RCU (Remote Control Utility)

The RCU utility can be used to test communication for all the devices connected to
the Modbus network. It is designed for use with Compact NSX, Masterpact,
Advantys OTB and Power Meter devices. It offers a number of functions.
Mini supervisor
b Display of I, U, f, P, E and THD measurements for each device, via navigation
b Display of ON/OFF status
Open and close commands for each device
A common or individual password must first be entered.
RCU: Remote Control Utility for communication tests. When all functions have been tested, this utility is replaced by the supervision
software selected for the installation.
A-30
Supervision software
Schneider Electric electrical installation supervision, Types of software

management and expert system software integrates Masterpact and Compact NSX communication functions are designed to interface
Compact NSX identification modules. with software dedicated to electrical installations:
b switchboard supervision
b electrical installation supervision
b power system management: electrical engineering expert systems
b process control
b SCADA (Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition), EMS (Enterprise Management
System) or BMS (Building Management System) type software.
Integration of Compact NSX

DB111370
Compact NSX devices are integrated via Modbus interface modules connected via
FDM121 display units or NSX cords.
For easy connection of the different modules, the prefabricated cables are identified
by ULP (Universal Logic Plug) symbols. The connection points on compatible
modules are marked in the same manner.
Schneider Electric solutions

Electrical switchboard supervision via MPS100 or EGX400
Web servers
A simple solution for customers who want to consult the main electrical parameters
of switchboard devices without dedicated software.
Up to 16 switchboard devices are connected via Modbus interfaces to an MPS100 or
EGX400 Ethernet gateway integrating the functions of a web page server. The
embedded Web pages can be easily configured with just a few mouse clicks. The
information they provide is updated in real time.
Connection symbol for Compact NSX compatible modules. The Web pages can be consulted using a standard Web browser on a PC connected
via Ethernet to the company Intranet or remotely via a modem. Automatic notification
of alarms and threshold overruns is possible via e-mail or SMS (Short Message
Service).
PE86106-62
Electrical installation supervision via PowerView software

PowerLogic PowerView software is ideally suited to the supervision needs of small
system applications, monitoring up to 32 devices. Installed on a PC under Windows,
it represents a cost-effective and easy-to-implement power-monitoring solution that
offers:
b automatic detection of compatible devices
b real-time monitoring of data including power consumption
b a report generator with a number of pre-defined reports that can be exported to
Excel
b cost allocation
b time-stamped data-logging possibilities
b Modbus serial and Modbus TCP/IP compatible communication.
SMS electrical engineering expert system software

PowerLogic SMS is a family of web-enabled software products for high-end power-
monitoring applications. It is designed for large power systems.
SMS products offer detailed analysis of electrical events, long-duration data logging
and extensive, economical report-building capabilities (e.g. consumption monitoring
and tariff management).
PowerView software.
A wide variety of screens can be displayed in real time, including more than 50
tables, analogue meters, bargraphs, alarms logs with links to display waveforms and
DB112145
predefined reports on energy quality and service costs.
Other software
Compact NSX devices can forward their measurement and operating information to
special software integrating the electrical installation and other technical facilities:
b SCADA process control software: Vijeo CITECT
b BMS Building Management System software: Vista.
Please consult us.
SMS software screen.
A-31
Functions Accessories for
and characteristics
Micrologic trip units
External neutral current transformer (ENCT)

PB103843-18
The external transformer is a sensor required for a three-pole circuit breaker in a

system with a distributed neutral to measure the neutral current in order to:
b protect the neutral conductor
b protect against insulation faults.
This current transformer can be connected to Micrologic 5 / 6 trip units. The
transformer rating must be compatible with that of the circuit breaker.
Required current transformers for different circuit breaker models
Type of circuit breaker Rating Catalogue
number
NSX100/160/250 25 100 A LV429521
External neutral current transformers.
150 250 A LV430563
NSX400/630 400 630 A LV432575
PB103842-47
External neutral voltage tap (ENVT)

The neutral voltage transformer is required for Micrologic E power metering with a
three-pole circuit breaker in a system with a distributed neutral. It is used to connect
the neutral to the Micrologic trip unit to measure phase-to-neutral (Ph-N) voltages.
External neutral voltage tap (cat. no. LV434208).
External 24 V DC power-supply module

Use
An external 24 V DC power supply is required for installations with communication,
PB103583-18
whatever the type of trip unit.

On installations without communication, it is available as an option for Micrologic 5/6
in order to make it possible to:
b modify settings when the circuit breaker is open
b display measurements when the current flowing through the circuit breaker is low
(15 to 50 A depending on the rating)
b maintain the display of the cause of tripping and interrupted current.
Characteristics
A single external 24 V DC supply may be used for the entire switchboard.
The required characteristics are:
b output voltage: 24 V DC 5 %
b ripple: 1%.
External 24 V DC power-supply module.
b overvoltage category: OVC IV - as per IEC 60947-1
External 24 V DC power-supply modules with an output current of 1 A are available:
Available external power-supply modules Cat. no.
Power supply V DC (5 %) 24/30 54440
48/60 54441
100/125 54442
V AC (+10 %, -15 %) 110/130 54443
200/240 54444
380/415 54445
Output voltage 24 V DC (5 %)
Ripple 1 %
Overvoltage category (OVC) OVC IV - as per IEC 60947-1
An external 24 V DC power-supply module with an output current of 3 A is also
available:
Available external power-supply modules Cat. no.
Power supply V DC 110/230
ABL8RPS24030
V AC 110/240
Output voltage 24 V DC (5 %)
Ripple 1 %
Overvoltage category (OVC) OVC II
Total consumption
To determine the required output current of the 24 V DC power supply, it is necessary
to sum up the currents consumed by the different loads supplied:
Consumption of Compact NSX modules Consumption (mA)
Module
Micrologic 5/6 20
BSCM module 10
FDM121 40
Modbus communication interface 60
NSX cord U > 480 V AC 30
A-32
Test battery
PB103790-20
This pocket battery connects to the Micrologic test connector. It powers up the
Micrologic and the Ready LED. It supplies the screen and allows settings to be made
via the keypad.
Test battery (cat. no. LV434206).
Battery module
PB103833-18
The battery module is a back-up supply for the external power-supply module. The
input/output voltages are 24 V DC and it can supply power for approximately three
hours (100 mA).
Battery module (cat. no. 54446). 24 V DC power-supply terminal block

The 24 V DC power-supply terminal block can be installed only on Micrologic 5/6 trip
PB103799-24
PB103789-24
units. It is required to power the trip unit when the trip unit is not connected to an
FDM121 display unit or to the communication system. When used, it excludes
connection of an NSX cord.
NSX cord
b For voltage U y 480 V, available in 3 prefabricated lengths: 0.35 m, 1.3 m and 3 m.
b For voltages U > 480 V, a special 1.3 m cord with an insulation accessory is
24 V DC power-supply NSX cord U > 480 V required.
terminal block (cat. no. (cat. no. LV434204).
LV434210).
b A set of cords with RJ45 connectors is available to adapt to different distances
between devices.
Maintenance case
PB103803-27
The case includes:

b configuration and maintenance module
b power supply (110...220 V AC / 50-60 Hz 24 V DC - 1 A)
b special cable for connection to the trip-unit test connector
b standard USB cable
b standard RJ45 cable
b user manual
Maintenance case (cat. no. TRV00910). b optional Bluetooth link (to PC).
Configuration and maintenance module

PB103794-32
Included in the maintenance kit, this module tests Micrologic operation and provides
access to all parameters and settings. It connects to the Micrologic test connector
and can operate in two modes.
b Stand-alone mode to:
v supply the Micrologic and check operation via the Ready LED
v check mechanical operation of the circuit breaker (trip using pushbutton).
b PC mode, connected to a PC via USB or Bluetooth link. This mode provides
access to protection settings, alarm settings and readings of all indicators. Using the
Configuration and maintenance module (cat. no. TRV00911). associated RSU software utility, it is possible to store, in a dedicated file for each
device, all the data that can transferred to another device.
This mode also offers operating-test functions:
DB115570
v check on trip time delay (trip curve)

30 v check on non-tripping time (discrimination)
v check on ZSI (Zone Selective Interlocking) function
v alarm simulation
Display
v display of setting curves
v display of currents
v printing of test reports.
Test connector
T
TES
USB or Bluetooth link
110/240 V
Using the configuration and maintenance module.
A-33
Functions Earth-leakage protection
and characteristics Add-on protection against insulation
faults using a Vigi module or Vigirex relay
There are two ways to add earth-leakage protection to Circuit breaker with add-on Vigi module
any three or four-pole Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit
breaker equipped with a magnetic, thermal-magnetic (Vigicompact NSX)
or Micrologic 2, 5 or 6 trip unit:
b by adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker to form b For general characteristics of circuit breakers, see pages A-6 and A-7.
a Vigicompact NSX b Add-on Vigi modules. Earth-leakage protection is achieved by installing a Vigi
module (characteristics and selection criteria on next page) directly on the circuit
b by using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids.
breaker terminals It directly actuates the trip unit (magnetic, thermal-magnetic or
Micrologic).
Circuit breaker combined with a Vigirex relay

Compact NSX circuit breaker + Vigirex relay
Vigirex relays may be used to add external earth-leakage protection to Compact
PB103579-21
NSX circuit breakers. The circuit breakers must be equipped with an MN or MX

voltage release. The Vigirex relays add special tripping thresholds and time delays
for earth-leakage protection.
Vigirex relays are very useful when faced with major installation constraints (circuit
breaker already installed and connected, limited space available, etc.).
Vigirex-relay characteristics
b Sensitivity adjustable from 30 mA to 250 mA and 9 time-delay settings (0 to
4.5 seconds).
b Closed toroids up to 630 A (30 to 300 mm in diameter), split toroids up to 250 A
(46 to 110 mm in diameter) or rectangular sensors up to 630 A.
b 50/60 Hz, 400 Hz distribution systems.
Options
b Trip indication by a fail-safe contact
b Pre-alarm contact and LED, etc.
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630. b IEC 60947-2, annex M
b IEC/EN 60755: general requirements for residual-current operated protective
devices
044322
b IEC/EN 61000-4-2 to 4-6: immunity tests

b CISPR11: radio-frequency radiated and conducted emission tests
b UL1053 and CSA22.2 No. 144 for RH10, RH21 and RH99 relays at supply
voltages up to and including 220/240 V.
Earth-leakage relay.
051352
Separate toroids.
A-34
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers with
PB103579-21
earth-leakage protection
Addition of the Vigi module does not alter circuit-breaker characteristics:
b compliance with standards
b degree of protection, class II front-face insulation
b positive contact indication
b electrical characteristics
b trip-unit characteristics
b installation and connection modes
b indication, measurement and control auxiliaries
b installation and connection accessories.
Dimensions and weights NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630

Dimensions 3 poles 105 x 236 x 86 135 x 355 x 110
W x H x D (mm) 4 poles 140 x 236 x 86 180 x 355 x 110
Weight (kg) 3 poles 2.5 8.8
4 poles 3.2 10.8
Vigi earth-leakage protection modules

b IEC 60947-2, annex B.
b Decree dated 14 November 1988 (for France).
b IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mA
b operation down to -25 C as per VDE 664.
Remote indications
Vigi modules may be equipped with an auxiliary contact (SDV) to remotely signal
tripping due to an earth fault.
PB103580-36
Use of 4-pole Vigi module with a 3-pole Compact NSX

In a 3-phase installation with an uninterrupted neutral, an accessory makes it
possible to use a 4-pole Vigi module with connection of the neutral cable.
Power supply
Vigi modules are self-supplied internally by the distribution-system voltage and
therefore do not require any external source. They continue to function even when
supplied by only two phases.
Vigi module selection

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DB112147
Type Vigi ME Vigi MH Vigi MB

Number of poles 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1)
NSX100 b b -
NXS160 b b -
NSX250 - b -
NSX400 - - b
NSX630 - - b
Protection characteristics
1 Sensitivity setting
2 Time-delay setting (for selective earth-leakage protection). Sensitivity fixed adjustable adjustable
3 Lead-seal fixture for controlled access to settings. IDn (A) 0.3 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 - 30
4 Test button simulating an earth-fault for regular checks on
Time delay fixed adjustable adjustable
the tripping function
5 Reset button (reset required after earth-fault tripping). Intentional delay < 40 0 - 60 (2) - 150 (2) - 310 (2) 0 - 60 - 150 - 310
6 Rating plate (ms)
7 Housing for SDV auxiliary contact. Max. break time < 40 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800
(ms)
Rated voltage 200...440 200... 440 - 440...550 200...440 - 440...550
V AC 50/60 Hz
Plug-in devices
(1) Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 3P circuit breakers used for two-phase protection.
The Vigi module can be installed on a plug-in base. (2) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.
Special accessories are required (see catalogue
number chapter). Operating safety
The Vigi module is a user safety device. It must be tested at regular intervals (every 6
months) via test button.
A-35
Functions Motor protection
and characteristics General information on motor feeders
The parameters to be considered for motor-feeder Motor-feeder function

protection depend on: A motor feeder comprises a set of devices for motor protection and control, as well
b the application (type of machine driven, operating as for protection of the feeder itself.
safety, frequency of operation, etc.)
b the level of continuity of service required by the load Isolation
or the application The purpose is to isolate the live conductors from the upstream distribution system to
b the applicable standards for the protection of life and enable work by maintenance personnel on the motor feeder at no risk. This function
property. is provided by a motor circuit breaker offering positive contact indication and lockout/
The required electrical functions are: tagout possibilities.
b isolation
b switching, generally at high endurance levels
Switching
The purpose is to control the motor (ON / OFF), either manually, automatically or
b protection against overloads and short-circuits,
remotely, taking into account overloads upon start-up and the long service life
adapted to the motor
required. This function is provided by a contactor. When the coil of the contactor's
b additional special protection.
electromagnet is energised, the contactor closes and establishes, through the poles,
A motor feeder must comply with the requirements of the circuit between the upstream supply and the motor, via the circuit breaker.
standard IEC 60947-4-1 concerning contactors and
their protection: Basic protection
b coordination of feeder components b Short-circuit protection
b thermal-relay trip classes Detection and breaking, as quickly as possible, of high short-circuit currents to avoid
b contactor utilisation categories damage to the installation. This function is provided by a magnetic or thermal-
b coordination of insulation. magnetic circuit breaker.
b Overload protection
Detection of overload currents and motor shutdown before temperature rise in the
motor and conductors damages insulation. This function is provided by a thermal-
magnetic circuit breaker or a separate thermal relay.
Overloads: I < 10 x In
They are caused by:
b an electrical problem, related to an anomaly in the distribution system (e.g. phase failure,
voltage outside tolerances, etc.)
b a mechanical problem, related to a process malfunction (e.g. excessive torque) or damage to
the motor (e.g. bearing vibrations).
These two causes will also result in excessively long starting times.
Impedant short-circuits: 10 x In < I < 50 x In
This type of short-circuit is generally due to deteriorated insulation of motor windings or
damaged supply cables.
Short-circuits: I > 50 x In
This relatively rare type of fault may be caused by a connection error during maintenance.
b Phase unbalance or phase loss protection

Phase unbalance or phase loss can cause temperature rise and braking torques that
can lead to premature ageing of the motor. These effects are even greater during
starting, therefore protection must be virtually immediate.
Additional electronic protection

DB115571
b Locked rotor
Isolation
and short-circuit protection
b Under-load
Circuit breaker with b Long starts and stalled rotor
magnetic protection b Insulation faults.
Motor-feeder solutions
Standard IEC 60947 defines three types of device combinations for the protection of
Power switching
Contactor motor feeders.
Three devices
b magnetic circuit breaker + contactor + thermal relay.
Two devices
Overload protection
or thermal protection
Thermal protection, b thermal-magnetic circuit breaker + contactor.
separate or built into
the circuit breaker One device
b thermal-magnetic circuit breaker + contactor in an integrated solution (e.g.
Tesys U).
Specific or internal
motor protection Additional protection
functions
Switchgear functions in a motor feeder.
A-36
Device coordination
The various components of a motor feeder must be coordinated. Standard
IEC 60947-4-1 defines three types of coordination depending on the operating
condition of the devices following a standardised short-circuit test.
Type-1 coordination
b No danger to life or property.
b The contactor and/or the thermal relay may be damaged.
b Repair and replacement of parts may be required prior to further service.
Type-2 coordination
b No danger to life or property.
b No damage or adjustments are allowed. The risk of contact welding is accepted as
long as they can be easily separated.
b Isolation must be maintained after the incident, the motor feeder must be suitable
for further use without repair or replacement of parts.
b A rapid inspection is sufficient before return to service.
Total coordination
b No damage and no risk of contact welding is allowed for the devices making up the
motor feeder. The motor feeder must be suitable for further use without repair or
replacement of parts.
This level is provided by integrated 1-device solutions such as Tesys U.
Contactor utilisation categories

For a given motor-feeder solution, the utilisation category determines the contactor
withstand capacity in terms of frequency of operation and endurance. Selection,
which depends on the operating conditions imposed by the application, may result in
oversizing the contactor and circuit-breaker protection. Standard IEC 60947 defines
the following contactor utilisation categories.
Contactor utilisation categories (AC current)
Contactor utilisation Type of load Control function Typical applications
categories
AC1 Non-inductive (cos u 0.8) Energising Heating, distribution
AC2 Slip-ring motor (cos u 0.65) Starting Wiring-drawing machine
Switching off motor during running
Counter-current braking
Inching
AC3 Squirrel-cage motor Starting Compressors, elevators, pumps, mixers,
(cos = 0.45 for y 100 A) Switching off motor during running escalators, fans, conveyer systems, air-
(cos = 0.35 for > 100 A) conditioning
AC4 Starting Printing machines, wire-drawing machines
Switching off motor during running
Regenerative braking
Plugging
Inching
Utilisation category AC3 - common coordination tables for circuit breakers

and contactors
This category covers asynchronous squirrel-cage motors that are switched off during
running, which is the most common situation (85 % of cases). The contactor makes
the starting current and switches off the rated current at a voltage approximately one
sixth of the nominal value. The current is interrupted without difficulty.
The circuit breaker-contactor coordination tables for Compact NSX are for use with
contactors in the AC3 utilisation category, in which case they ensure type-2
coordination.
Utilisation category AC4 - possible oversizing
This category covers asynchronous squirrel-cage motors capable of operating under
regenerative braking or inching (jogging) conditions
The contactor makes the starting current and can interrupt this current at a voltage
that may be equal to that of the distribution system.
These difficult conditions make it necessary to oversize the contactor and, in
general, the protective circuit breaker with respect to category AC3.
A-37
and characteristics Motor-feeder characteristics and
solutions
The trip class determines the trip curve of the thermal Trip class of a thermal-protection device
protection device (inverse-time curve) for a motor The motor feeder includes thermal protection that may be built into the circuit
feeder. breaker. The protection must have a trip class suited to motor starting. Depending on
Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines trip classes 5, 10, 20 the application, the motor starting time varies from a few seconds (no-load start) to a
and 30. few dozen seconds (high-inertia load).
These classes are the maximum durations, in seconds, Standard IEC 60947-4-1 defines the trip classes below as a function of current
for motor starting with a starting current of 7.2 Ir, where setting Ir for thermal protection.
Ir is the thermal setting indicated on the motor rating Trip class of thermal relays as a function of their Ir setting
plate.
Class 1.05 I r (1) 1.2 Ir (1) 1.5 Ir (2) 7.2 I r(1)
5 t>2h t < 2h t < 2 mn 2s<ty5s
10 t>2h t < 2h t < 4 mn 4 s < t y 10 s
20 t>2h t < 2h t < 8 mn 6 s < t y 20 s
30 t>2h t < 2h t < 12 mn 9 s < t y 30 s
(1) Time for a cold motor (motor off and cold).
Example: In class 20, the motor must have finished
(2) Time for warm motor (motor running under normal conditions).
starting within 20 seconds (6 to 20 s) for a starting
current of 7.2 Ir.
Currents of squirrel-cage motors at full rated load

Standardised values in kW Standardised values in HP
Rated Standardised values in kW Rated Indicative values of the rated operational currents Ie (A) for
operational currents Ie (A) for: operational 110 - 200 V 208 V 220 - 380 - 440 - 550 -
power 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V power 120 V 240 V 415 V 480 V 600 V
kW A A A A hp
0.06 0.35 0.32 0.16 0.12 1/2 4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2 1.3 1.1 0.9
0.09 0.52 0.3 0.24 0.17 3/4 6.4 3.7 3.5 3.2 1.8 1.6 1.3
0.12 0.7 0.44 0.32 0.23 1 8.4 4.8 4.6 4.2 2.3 2.1 1.7
0.18 1 0.6 0.48 0.35 1 1/2 12 6.9 6.6 6 3.3 3 2.4
0.25 1.5 0.85 0.68 0.49 2 13.6 7.8 7.5 6.8 4.3 3.4 2.7
0.37 1.9 1.1 0.88 0.64 3 19.2 11 10.6 9.6 6.1 4.8 3.9
0.55 2.6 1.5 1.2 0.87 5 30.4 17.5 16.7 15.2 9.7 7.6 6.1
0.75 3.3 1.9 1.5 1.1 7 1/2 44 25.3 24.2 22 14 11 9
1.1 4.7 2.7 2.2 1.6 10 56 32.2 30.8 28 18 14 11
1.5 6.3 3.6 2.9 2.1 15 84 48.3 46.2 42 27 21 17
2.2 8.5 4.9 3.9 2.8 20 108 62.1 59.4 54 34 27 22
3 11.3 6.5 5.2 3.8 25 136 78.2 74.8 68 44 34 27
4 15 8.5 6.8 4.9 30 160 92 88 80 51 40 32
5.5 20 11.5 9.2 6.7 40 208 120 114 104 66 52 41
50 260 150 143 130 83 65 52
7.5 27 15.5 12.4 8.9
60 - 177 169 154 103 77 62
11 38 22 17.6 12.8
75 - 221 211 192 128 96 77
15 51 29 23 17
100 - 285 273 248 165 124 99
18.5 61 35 28 21
125 - 359 343 312 208 156 125
22 72 41 33 24
150 - 414 396 360 240 180 144
30 96 55 44 32
200 - 552 528 480 320 240 192
37 115 66 53 39
250 - - - 604 403 302 242
45 140 80 64 47
300 - - - 722 482 361 289
55 169 97 78 57
75 230 132 106 77 Note: 1 hp = 0.7457 kW.
90 278 160 128 93
110 340 195 156 113
132 400 230 184 134
160
200
487
609
280
350
224
280
162
203
Asynchronous-motor starting parameters
The main parameters of direct on-line starting of three-phase asynchronous motors
250 748 430 344 250
(90 % of all applications) are listed below.
315 940 540 432 313
b Ir: rated current
This is the current drawn by the motor at full rated load (e.g. approximately 100 A rms
for 55 kW at 400 V).
DB115572
b Id: starting current

This is the current drawn by the motor during starting, on average 7.2 In for a
duration td of 5 to 30 seconds depending on the application (e.g. 720 A rms for 10
seconds). These values determine the trip class and any additional "long-start"
td protection devices that may be needed.
b Id: peak starting current
Starting This is the subtransient current during the first two half-waves when the system is
time energised, on the average 14 In for 10 to 15 ms (e.g. 1840 A peak).
td The protection settings must effectively protect the motor, notably via a suitable
thermal-relay trip class, but let the peak starting current through.
Ir Id Id
Typical motor-starting curve
A-38
Compact NSX motor-feeder solutions
Compact NSX motor circuit breakers are designed for Compact NSX motor-protection range
motor-feeder solutions using: Compact NSX trip units can be used to create motor-feeder solutions comprising two
b three devices, including an MA or 1.3-M magnetic- or three devices. The protection devices are designed for continuous duty at 65 C.
only trip unit
Three-device solutions
b two devices including a TM-D or 2-M thermal-
b 1 NSX circuit breaker with an MA or Micrologic 1.3-M trip unit
magnetic trip unit. b 1 contactor
They are designed for use with contactors in the AC3 b 1 thermal relay.
utilisation category (80 % of all cases) and they ensure
Two-device solutions
type-2 coordination with the contactor.
b 1 Compact NSX circuit breaker
For the AC4 utilisation category, the difficult conditions
v with a Micrologic 2.2-M or 2.3-M electronic trip unit
generally make it necessary to oversize the protection
v with a Micrologic 6 E-M electronic trip unit. This version offers additional protection
circuit breaker with respect to the AC3 category.
and Power Meter functions.
b 1 contactor.
Type of motor protection 3 devices 2 devices

Compact NSX circuit breaker NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630 NSX100 to 630
Type-2 coordination with Contactor + thermal relay Contactor
Trip unit Type MA Micrologic 1.3-M Micrologic 2-M Micrologic 6 E-M
Technology Magnetic Electronic Electronic Electronic
Thermal relay Separate b b

Built-in, class 5 b b
10 b b
20 b b
30 b
Protection functions of Compact NSX circuit breaker
Short-circuits b b b b
Overloads b b
Insulation Ground-fault b
faults
Special motor Phase unbalance b b
functions Locked rotor b
Under-load b
Long start b
Built-in Power Meter functions
I, U, energy b
Counters (cycles, trips, b
alarms, hours)
Contact-wear indicator b
Load profile and thermal b
image
A-39
and characteristics MA and Micrologic 1.3-M
instantaneous trip units
MA magnetic trip units are used in 3-device motor- MA magnetic trip units
feeder solutions. They can be mounted on all
DB112110
Compact NSX100/160/250 circuit breakers with
performance levels B/F/H/N/S/L.
They provide short-circuit protection for motors up to
110 kW at 400 V.
Circuit breakers with an MA trip unit are combined with a thermal relay and a
contactor or a starter.
Protection
Short-circuit protection with an adjustable pick-up Im that initiates instantaneous
tripping if exceeded.
b Im = In x ... is set on an adjustment dial in multiples of the rating:
v 6 to 14 x In (2.5 to 100 A ratings)
v 9 to 14 x In (150 to 200 A ratings)
Protection version
b 3-pole (3P 3D): 3-pole frame (3P) equipped with detection on all 3 poles (3D).
Micrologic 1.3-M trip units are used in 3-device motor- Micrologic 1.3-M trip units
feeder solutions on Compact NSX400/630 circuit
DB112106
breakers with performance levels B/F/H/N/S/L. 50A
They provide short-circuit protection for motors up to

250 kW at 400 V.
They also provide the benefits of electronic technology:
b accurate settings
b tests
b "Ready" LED.
Circuit breakers with a Micrologic 1.3-M trip unit are combined with a thermal relay
and a contactor.
Protection ..............................................................
Settings are made using a dial.
Protection with an adjustable pick-up Isd. There is a very short delay to let through
motor starting currents.
b Isd is set in amperes from 5 to 13 x In, as follows:
v from 1600 to 4160 A for the 320 A rating.
v from 2500 to 6500 A for the 500 A rating.
Short-circuits: Non-adjustable instantaneous protection (li)
Instantaneous protection with non-adjustable pick-up Ii.
Protection version
b 3-pole (3P 3D): 3-pole frame (3P) equipped with detection on all 3 poles (3D).
Indications
Front indications
event of a fault.
Note: all the trip units have a transparent lead-sealable cover

A-40
Magnetic trip units MA 2.5 to 220
Ratings (A) In at 65 C (1) 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 (1) 150 220
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b b b b b b - -
Compact NSX160 - - - b b b b -
Compact NSX250 - - - - - b b b
Instantaneous magnetic protection
Pick-up (A) Im = In x ... Adjustable from 6 to 14 x In Adjustable from
accuracy 20 % (settings 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14) 9 to 14 x In
(settings 9, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14)
Time delay (ms) tm fixed
(1) MA100 3P adjustable from 6 to 14 x In.
MA100 4P adjustable from 9 to 14 x In.
Micrologic 1.3-M
Ratings (A) In at 65 C (1) 320 500
Circuit breaker Compact NSX400 b -
Compact NSX630 b b
S Short-time protection
Pick-up (A) Isd Adjustable directly in amps
accuracy 15 %
9 settings: 1600, 1920, 2440, 2560, 9 settings: 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000,
2880, 3200, 3520, 3840, 4160 A 4500, 5000, 5500, 6000, 6500 A
Time delay (ms) tsd Non-adjustable
Pick-up (A) Ii non-adjustable 4800 6500
accuracy 15 % Non-tripping time 0
(1) Motor standards require operation at 65 C. Circuit-breaker ratings are derated to take this requirement into account.
A-41
and characteristics Micrologic 2-M electronic trip units
DB112111
Micrologic 2-M trip units provide built-in thermal and
magnetic protection. They are used in 2-device motor-
feeder solutions on Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit
breakers with performance levels B/F/H/N/S/L.
They provide protection for motors up to 315 kW at
400 V against:
b short-circuits
b overloads with selection of a trip class (5, 10 or 20) Circuit breakers with a Micrologic 2.2 / 2.3-M trip unit include protection similar to an
b phase unbalance. inverse-time thermal relay. They are combined with a contactor.
Protection ..............................................................
Settings are made using a dial.
Overloads (or thermal protection): Long-time protection and trip class (Ir)
Inverse-time thermal protection against overloads with adjustable pick-up Ir.
Settings are made in amperes. The tripping curve for the long-time protection, which
indicates the time delay tr before tripping, is defined by the selected trip class.
Trip class (class)
The class is selected as a function of the normal motor starting time.
b Class 5: starting time less than 5 s
For a given class, it is necessary to check that all motor-feeder components are
sized to carry the 7.2 Ir starting current without excessive temperature rise during the
time corresponding to the class.
Protection with an adjustable pick-up Isd. There is a very short delay to let through
motor starting currents.
Instantaneous protection with non-adjustable pick-up Ii.
Phase unbalance or phase loss (lunbal) ( )
This function opens the circuit breaker if a phase unbalance occurs:
b that is greater than the 30% fixed pick-up Iunbal
b following the non-adjustable time delay tunbal equal to:
v 0.7 s during starting
v 4 s during normal operation.
Phase loss is an extreme case of phase unbalance and leads to tripping under the
same conditions.
PB103376
Indications
Front indications
event of a fault.
b Red alarm LED for motor operation: goes ON when the thermal image of the rotor
and stator is greater than 95% of the permissible temperature rise.
Remote indications via SDTAM module
Compact NSX devices with a Micrologic 2 can be equipped with an SDTAM module
dedicated to motor applications for:
b a contact to indicate circuit-breaker overload
b a contact to open the contactor. In the event of a phase unbalance or overload,
this output is activated 400 ms before circuit-breaker tripping to open the contactor
and avoid circuit breaker tripping.
This module takes the place of the MN/MX coils and an OF contact.
SDTAM remote indication relay module

with its terminal block.
Note: all the trip units have a transparent lead-sealable cover

A-42
Micrologic 2.2 / 2.3-M
Ratings (A) In at 65 C (1) 25 50 100 150 220 320 500
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b b b - - - -
Compact NSX160 b b b b - - -
Compact NSX250 b b b b b - -
Compact NSX400 - - - - - b -
Compact NSX630 - - - - - b b
L Overloads (or thermal protection): Long-time protection and trip class
Pick-up (A) Ir value depending on trip unit rating (In) and setting on dial
tripping between In = 25 A Ir = 12 14 16 18 20 22 23 24 25
1.05 and 1.20 Ir In = 50 A Ir = 25 30 32 36 40 42 45 47 50
In = 100 A Ir = 50 60 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
In = 150 A Ir = 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
In = 220 A Ir = 100 120 140 155 170 185 200 210 220
In = 320 A Ir = 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320
In = 500 A Ir = 250 280 320 350 380 400 440 470 500
Trip class as per IEC 60947-4-1 5 10 20
Time delay (s) tr 1.5 x Ir 120 240 480 for warm motor
depending on selected trip class 6 x Ir 6.5 13.5 26 for cold motor
7.2 x Ir 5 10 20 for cold motor
Cooling fan non-adjustable - motor self-cooled
S0 Short-circuits: Short-time protection with fixed time delay
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x ... 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
accuracy 15 %
I Short-circuits: Non-adjustable instantaneous protection
Pick-up (A) Ii non-adjustable 425 750 1500 2250 3300 4800 6500
accuracy 15 %
Time delay (ms) Non-tripping time 0
Phase unbalance or phase loss
Pick-up (A) Iunbal in % average current (2) > 30 %
accuracy 20 %
Time delay (s) non-adjustable 0.7 s during starting
4 s during normal operation
(1) Motor standards require operation at 65C. Circuit-breaker ratings are derated to take this requirement into account.
(2) The unbalance measurement takes into account the most unbalanced phase with respect to the average current.

DB112114
Phase unbalance
An unbalance in three-phase systems occurs when the three voltages are not equal in amplitude
and/or not displaced 120 with respect to each other. It is generally due to single-phase loads
that are incorrectly distributed throughout the system and unbalance the voltages between the
phases.
These unbalances create negative current components that cause braking torques and
temperature rise in asynchronous machines, thus leading to premature ageing.
Phase loss
Phase loss is a special case of phase unbalance.
Unbalance of phase currents and voltages b During normal operation, it produces the effects mentioned above and tripping must occur
after four seconds.
b During starting, the absence of a phase may cause motor reversing, i.e. it is the load that
DB115573
determines the direction of rotation. This requires virtually immediate tripping (0.7 seconds).
Motor-off zone Starting time in compliance with the class (Micrologic 2-M)
For normal motor starting, Micrologic 2-M checks the conditions below with respect to the
1 to 200 s
thermal-protection (long-time) pick-up Ir:
b current > 10 % x Ir (motor-off limit)
b overrun of 1.5 x Ir threshold, then return below this threshold before the end of a 10 s time
delay.
Return If either of these conditions is not met, the thermal protection trips the device after a maximum
Long
start time time equal to that of the selected class.
limit Pick-up Ir must have been set to the current indicated on the motor rating plate.
Long starts (Micrologic 6 E-M)
When this function is not activated, the starting conditions are those indicated above.
Starting When it is activated, this protection supplements thermal protection (class).
time A long start causes tripping and is characterised by:
b current > 10 % x Ir (motor-off limit) with:
b either overrun of the long-time pick-up (1 to 8 x Ir) without return below the pick-up before the
end of the long-time time delay (1 to 200 s)
Overrun
b or no overrun of the long-time pick-up (1 to 8 x Ir) before the end of the long-time time delay (1
to 200 s).
10 % Ir Ir Pick-up Ir must have been set to the current indicated on the motor rating plate.
1.5 Ir (Micrologic 2-M)
or Ilong (Micrologic 6 E-M) This protection should be coordinated with the selected class.
Motor starting and long starts
A-43
and characteristics Micrologic 6 E-M electronic trip units
DB112116
Micrologic 6.E-M is used in 2-device motor-feeder
solutions.
It provides the same protection as Micrologic 2-M:
b short-circuits
b overloads with selection of the same trip classes (5,
10 or 20), plus trip class 30 for starting of machines
with high inertia.
In addition, it offers specific motor-protection functions Protection
that can be set via the keypad. The protection functions are identical to those of Micrologic 2-M and can be fine-
adjusted via the keypad .
Access to setting modifications via the keypad is protected by a locking function
that is controlled by a microswitch . The lock is activated automatically if the
keypad is not used for 5 minutes. Access to the microswitch is protected by a
transparent lead-sealable cover. It is possible to scroll through settings and
measurements with the cover closed.
Overloads (or thermal), class and short-circuits
The long-time, short-time and instantaneous functions are identical to those of
Micrologic 2-M.
In addition, there is trip class 30 for long-time protection and a setting for self-cooled
or fan-cooled motors ( ).
Ground-fault protection (Ig)
Residual type ground-fault protection with an adjustable pick-up Ig (with Off position)
and adjustable time delay tg.
Phase unbalance or phase loss (lunbal)
This function opens the circuit breaker if a phase unbalance occurs:
b that is greater than the Iunbal pick-up that can be fine-adjusted from 10 to 40 %
(30 % by default)
b following the tunbal time delay that is:
v 0.7 s during starting
v adjustable from 1 to 10 seconds (4 seconds by default) during normal operation.
Phase loss is an extreme case of phase unbalance and leads to tripping under the
same conditions.
Locked rotor (Ijam)
This function detects locking of the motor shaft caused by the load.
During motor starting (see page A-43), the function is disabled.
During normal operation, it causes tripping:
b above the Ijam pick-up that can be fine-adjusted from 1 to 8 x Ir
b in conjunction with the tjam time delay that can be adjusted from 1 to 30 seconds.
Under-load (Iund)
This function detects motor no-load operation due to insufficient load (e.g. a drained
pump). It detects phase undercurrent.
During motor starting (see page A-43), the function is always enabled.
During normal operation, it causes tripping:
b below the Iund pick-up that can be fine-adjusted from 0.3 to 0.9 x Ir
b in conjunction with the tund time delay that can be adjusted from 1 to 200
seconds.
PB103376
Long starts (Ilong)

This protection supplements thermal protection (class).
It is used to better adjust protection to the starting parameters.
It detects abnormal motor starting, i.e. when the starting current remains too high or
too low with respect to a pick-up value and a time delay.
It causes tripping:
b in relation with a llong pick-up that can be fine-adjusted from 1 to 8 x Ir
b in conjunction with the tlong time delay that can be adjusted from 1 to 200
seconds.
(see "long starts" page A-43)
Display of type of fault

On a fault trip, the type of fault (Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig, lunbal, ljam), the phase concerned and
the interrupted current are displayed.
Indications
Front indications
SDTAM remote indication relay module event of a fault.
with its terminal block. b Red alarm LED for motor operation: goes ON when the thermal image of the rotor
or stator is greater than 95% of the permissible temperature rise.
Note: all the trip units have a transparent lead-sealable cover Remote indications via SDTAM or SDx module
See description on page A-42 for SDTAM and page A-81 for SDx.
A-44
Micrologic 6.2 / 6.3 E-M
Ratings (A) In at 65 C (1) 25 50 80 150 220 320 500
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b b b - - - -
Compact NSX160 b b b b - - -
Compact NSX250 b b b b b - -
Compact NSX400 - - - - - b -
Compact NSX630 - - - - - b b
L Overloads: Long-time protection
Pick-up (A) Ir Dial setting Value depending on trip-unit rating (In) and setting on dial
Tripping between In = 25 A Ir = 12 14 16 18 20 22 23 24 25
1.05 and 1.20 Ir In = 50 A Ir = 25 30 32 36 40 42 45 47 50
In = 80 A Ir = 35 42 47 52 57 60 65 72 80
In = 150 A Ir = 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
In = 220 A Ir = 100 120 140 155 170 185 200 210 220
In = 320 A Ir = 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320
In = 500 A Ir = 250 280 320 350 380 400 440 470 500
Keypad setting Fine adjustments in 1 A steps below maximum value defined by dial setting
Trip class as per IEC 60947-4-1 5 10 20 30
Time delay (s) tr 1.5 x Ir 120 240 480 720 for warm motor
depending on selected trip class 6 x Ir 6.5 13.5 26 38 for cold motor
7.2 x Ir 5 10 20 30 for cold motor
Cooling fan Settings for self-cooled or fan-cooled motors
S0 Short-circuits: Short-time protection with fixed time delay
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x ... 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
accuracy 15 % Fine adjustment In 0.5 x Ir steps using the keypad
Time delay tsd non-adjustable
Non-tripping time 20 ms
I Short-circuits: Non-adjustable instantaneous protection
Pick-up (A) Ii non-adjustable 425 750 1200 2250 3300 4800 6500
G Ground faults
Pick-up (A) Ig = In x ... Dial setting
accuracy 10 % In = 25 A Ig = 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Off
In = 50 A Ig = 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Off
In > 50 A Ig = 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1 Off
fine adjustments in 0.05 x In steps
Time delay (ms) tg 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Non-tripping time 20 80 140 230 350
Maximum break time 80 140 200 320 500
Phase unbalance or phase loss
Pick-up (A) lunbal = in % average current (2) adjustable from 10 to 40 %, default setting = 30 %
accuracy 20 % fine adjustments in 1 % steps using the keypad
activated during motor starting
Time delay (s) tunbal 0.7 s during starting
1 to 10 seconds during normal operation, default setting = 4 seconds
fine adjustments in 1 s steps using the keypad
Locked rotor
Pick-up (A) Ijam = Ir x ... 1 x 8 Ir with Off position, default setting = Off
accuracy 10 % fine adjustments in 0.1 x Ir steps using the keypad
disabled during motor starting
Time delay (s) tjam = 1 to 30 seconds
fine adjustments in 1 s steps using the keypad, default setting = 5 s
Under-load (under-current)
Pick-up (A) Iund = Ir x ... 0.3 x 0.9 Ir with Off position, default setting = Off
accuracy 10 % Fine adjustments in Ir x 0.01 steps using the RSU software
Time delay (s) tund = 1 to 200 seconds
fine adjustments in 1 s steps using the RSU software, default setting = 10 s
Long starts
Pick-up (A) Ilong = Ir x ... 1 x 8 Ir with Off position, default setting = Off
accuracy 10 % Fine adjustments in Ir x 0.1 steps using the RSU software
Time delay (s) tlong = 1 to 200 seconds
fine adjustments in 1 s steps using the RSU software, default setting = 10 s
(1) Motor standards require operation at 65 C. Circuit-breaker ratings are derated to take this requirement into account.
(2) The unbalance measurement takes into account the most unbalanced phase with respect to the average current.
A-45
and characteristics Micrologic 6 E-M electronic trip units (cont.)
Micrologic 6 E-M provides Power Meter functions with Power Meter functions
energy metering. With the FDM121 display unit, all The built-in Power Meter functions of the Micrologic 6 E-M are the same as those for
metering data and operating indicators are available on the Micrologic 6-E presented in the section on distribution (see page A-20). When
the switchboard front panel. This version also displays used exclusively in the three-phase version, neutral measurements are excluded.
the thermal image of the motor.
Operating-assistance functions
The operating-assistance functions of the Micrologic 6 E-M are the same as those
for the Micrologic 6-E presented in the section on distribution (see page A-22).
Special functions for motor feeders

Additional operating functions specifically for motor feeders are available.
PB103365
Phase sequence
The order in which the phases L1, L2, L3 are connected determines the direction of
motor rotation. If two phases are inverted, the direction is reversed.
Information on the direction of rotation is provided. It can be linked to an alarm to
detect an inversion in the direction following servicing on the supply under de-
energised conditions and disable restarting.
Thermal image of the rotor and stator
Micrologic 6 E-M offers a thermal-image function.
Taking into account the Ir setting and the class, an algorithm simulates rotor and
stator temperature rise. It includes the slow temperature rise of the stator and its
Micrologic 6 E-M. metal mass. Also included is the faster temperature rise of the copper rotor.
The thermal protection function trips the circuit breaker when the calculated thermal
image reaches 100 % of the permissible temperature rise.
The communication indicates the thermal-image value as a percentage of the
DB111404
DB111405
I permissible temperature rise. One or more alarms may be assigned to selected

I1
165 A % 100 120
thresholds. A red LED on the front signals when the value exceeds 95 %.
165 A % 100 120
motor = 97%
An SDx module with two outputs programmed for thermal-image values can be used
I2
164A % 100 120

to implement other alarm functions.
I3
ESC ESC
Current values. Thermal-image alarm.

DB118726
PC screen with motor thermal image and value monitoring.
The additional technical characteristics are identical to those of Micrologic 6-E (see pages A-21
and A-23).
A-46
Micrologic 6 E-M integrated Power Meter and operating-assistance functions Display
Micrologic FDM121
LCD display
Measurements
Instantaneous rms measurements
Currents (A) Phase currents and average value I1, I2, I3 and Iavg = (I1 + I2 + I3) / 3 b b
Highest current of the 3 phases Imax of I1, I2, I3 b b
Ground-fault protection % Ig (pick-up setting) b b
Current unbalance between phases % Iavg - b
Voltages (V) Phase-to-phase voltages and average value U12, U23, U31 and Uavg = (U12 + U21 + U23) / 3 b b
Unbalance between phase-to-phase voltages % Uavg - b
Phase sequence 1-2-3, 1-3-2 b -
Frequency (Hz) Power system F b b
Power Active (kW), reactive (kVAR), apparent (kVA) P, Q, S total and per phase - b
Power factor and cos (fundamental) PF, cos , total and per phase - b
Maximeters / minimeters Associated with instantaneous rms Reset via Micrologic and the display unit - b
measurements
Energy metering
Energy Active (kWh), reactive (kVARh), Total since last reset b b
apparent (kVAh) Absolute or signed mode (1) - b
Demand current (A) Phases Present value on the selected window - (2)
Maximum demand since last reset - (2)
Demand power Active (kWh), reactive (kVARh), apparent Present value on the selected window - (2)
(kVAh) Maximum demand since last reset - (2)
Calculation window Sliding, fixed or com-synchronised Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes in 1 minute steps - (2)
Absolute or signed mode(1) - (2)
Power quality
Total harmonic distortion Of voltage with respect to rms value THDU,THDV of the Ph-Ph and Ph-N voltage - b
(%) Of current with respect to rms value THDI of the phase current - b
Personalised alarms
Settings Up to 10 alarms can be assigned to all measurements and events - (2)
as well as to phase lead/lag, four quadrants, phase sequence and thermal image - (2)
Time-stamped histories
Trips last 17 Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig, Iunbal, Ijam, Iund, Ilong - (2)
Alarms last 10 - (2)
Operating events last 10 events and type: Modification of protection setting by dial - (2)
Opening of keypad lock - (2)
Test via keypad - (2)
Test via external tool - (2)
Time setting (date and time) - (2)
Reset for maximeter/minimeter and energy meter b (2)
Time stamping Presentation Date and time, text, status - (2)
Time-stamped event tables

Protection settings One of the following settings modified Ir tr Isd tsd Ii Ig tg - (2)
Time-stamping of modification Date and time of modification - (2)
Previous value Value before modification - (2)
Min/Max Value monitored I1 I2 I3 U12 U23 U31 f - (2)
Time-stamping of min/max value Date and time of record - (2)
Present min/max value Min/max recorded for the value - (2)
Counter Mechanical cycles (3) Assignable to an alarm - (2)
Electrical cycles (3) Assignable to an alarm - (2)
Trips One per type of trip - (2)
Alarms One for each type of alarm - (2)
Hours Total operating time (hours) - (2)
Indicator Contact wear % - b

Load profile Hours at different load levels % of hours in four current ranges: 0-49 % In, 50-79 % - (2)
In, 80-89 % In, u 90 % In
Thermal image Stator and rotor % of permissible temperature rise - (2)
(1) Absolute mode: E absolute = E out + E in; Signed mode: E signed = E out - E in.
(2) Available via communication system.
(3) The BSCM module (page A-27) is required for these functions.
A-47
Functions Special applications
and characteristics Protection of public distribution systems
with Micrologic 2-AB
DB112117
Micrologic AB trip units are used in public distribution
systems to limit the current supplied according to the
consumer's contract. They are available in 100, 160,
240 and 400 A ratings and are supplied with a lead-seal
device to protect the settings.
Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic AB trip units are installed as
incoming devices for consumer installations connected to the public LV distribution
system.
With respect to the utility, they have two functions.
056650-33
b Consumption is limited to the contractual power level. If the limit is exceeded, a

fast thermal-protection function trips the device at the head of the consumer's
installation without the utility having to intervene.
b Total discrimination is ensured with the upstream fuses on the public distribution
system in the event of a fault, overload or short-circuit in the consumer's installation,
protecting the utility line.
In addition, they provide the consumer with:
b protection for the installation as a whole, with the possibility of adding a Vigi earth-
leakage protection module
b the possibility of downstream discrimination.
This type of Compact NSX is often used in conjunction with an Interpact INV switch-
INV switch-disconnector with visible break. disconnector located outside the consumer's building and providing the visible-break
function.
This means the operator can directly see, through a transparent cover, the physical
PB103266-35
separation of the main contacts. The Interpact INV range is also suitable for isolation
with positive contact indication.
This means utility operators can work on the service-connection unit after isolating it
from the upstream line.
Protection ..............................................................
Settings are made using the adjustment dials with fine-adjustment possibilities
and a lead-seal fixture.
Overloads: Long-time protection (Ir)
Inverse-time thermal protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick-up
Compact NSX with Micrologic 2-AB. Ir and a very short, non-adjustable time delay tr (15 seconds for 1.5 x Ir).
Short-circuits: Short-time protection (Isd) with fixed time delay
Short-circuit protection with an adjustable pick-up Isd. The short-time pick-up values
are high enough to avoid nuisance tripping in the event of transient current spikes.
Short-circuits: Non-adjustable instantaneous protection
Instantaneous short-circuit protection with a fixed pick-up.
Neutral protection
Available on four-pole circuit breakers only. Neutral protection may be set using a
three-position switch:
b 4P 3D: neutral unprotected
b 4P 3D + N/2: neutral protection at half the value of the phase pick-up, i.e. 0.5 x Ir
b 4P 4D: neutral fully protected at Ir.
PB103377
Indications.............................................................
Front indications
event of a fault.
Remote indications
overload-trip signal. This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic
trip unit via an optical link and makes it available on the terminal block. The signal is
cleared when the circuit breaker is closed.
The module is described in detail in the section dealing with accessories page A-81.
SDx remote indication relay module

A-48
Micrologic 2.2 / 2.3-AB
Ratings (A) In at 40C (1) 100 160 240 400
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b - - -
Compact NSX160 b b - -
Compact NSX250 b b b -
Compact NSX400 - - - b
Compact NSX630 - - - b
Ii
Pick-up (A) Ir value depending on trip unit rating (In) and setting on dial
tripping between In = 100 A Ir = 40 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
1.05 and 1.20 Ir
In = 160 A Ir = 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
In = 240 A Ir = 140 150 160 170 180 200 220 240
In = 400 A Ir = 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400
1.5 Ir 15
6 Ir 0.5
7.2 Ir 0.35
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x ... 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
accuracy 10 %
Time delay (ms) tsd non-adjustable: 20
I Non-adjustable instantaneous protection
Pick-up (A) Ii non-adjustable 1500 1600 2880 4800
accuracy 15 %
Time delay (ms) Non-tripping time 10
Technical details
DB115574
Utility Advantages of the AB trip unit

line AB or b Controls the power drawn with respect to contractual power levels. If the contractual level is
standard overrun, the circuit breaker opens and the consumer is not billed excess costs.
service- b If a short-circuit occurs, the circuit breaker opens and the upstream HRC fuses on utility lines
connection are not affected. No expensive utility servicing is billed to the consumer.
circuit breaker
Utility
property
limit
Coupling
enclosure Outgoing circuits
LV distribution switchboard
Consumer connection diagram.
A-49
and characteristics Generator protection
with Micrologic 2.2-G
DB112118
Micrologic G trip units are used for the protection of
systems supplied by generators or comprising long
cable lengths. They can be mounted on all Compact
NSX100/160/250 circuit breakers.
With extensive setting possibilities, Micrologic 5 offers
the same functions from 100 to 630 A.
A thermal-magnetic trip unit is also available for the
NSX100 to 250 (see page A-15). Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic G trip units protect systems supplied by
generators (lower short-circuit currents than with transformers) and distribution
systems with long cable lengths (fault currents limited by the impedance of the
cable).
Protection
Settings are made using the adjustment dials with fine adjustment possibilities.
Overloads: Long-time protection (Ir)
Inverse-time thermal protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick-up
Ir and a very short, non-adjustable time delay tr (15 seconds for 1.5 x Ir).
Short-circuits: Short-time protection (Isd) with fixed time delay
Short-circuit protection with an adjustable pick-up Isd, delayed 200 ms, in
compliance with the requirements of marine classification companies.
Instantaneous short-circuit protection with a fixed pick-up required for generator
protection.
Neutral protection
b On 3-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.
b On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch:
v 4P 3D: neutral unprotected
v 4P 3D + N/2: neutral protection at half the value of the phase pick-up, i.e. 0.5 x Ir
v 4P 4D: neutral fully protected at Ir.
Indications
Front indications
PB103377
event of a fault.
Remote indications
overload-trip signal.
The module is described in detail in the section dealing with accessories.

A-50
Micrologic 2.2-G
Ratings (A) In at 40C (1) 40 100 160 250
Circuit breaker Compact NSX100 b b - -
Compact NSX160 b b b -
Compact NSX250 b b b b
Pick-up (A) Io value depending on trip unit rating (In) and setting on dial
1.05 and 1.20 Ir Ii
In = 100 A Io = 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100
In = 160 A Io = 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160
In = 250 A (NSX250) Io = 100 110 125 140 150 176 200 225 250
Ir = Io x ... 9 fine-adjustment settings from 0.9 to 1 for each Io value
accuracy 0 to -20% 1.5 x Ir 15
6 x Ir 0.5
7.2 x Ir 0.35
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x ... 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
accuracy 10 %
I Non-adjustable instantaneous protection
Pick-up (A) Ii non-adjustable 600 1500 2400 3000
A-51
and characteristics Protection of industrial control panels
Compact NSX circuit breakers are also used in Industrial control panels
industrial control panels. Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped for public distribution or motor protection
They serve as an incoming devices or can be functions as described in the previous pages can be used in industrial control panels.
combined with contactors to protect motor feeders: The accessories for the Compact NSX range are suitable for the special needs of
b compliance with worldwide standards including IEC these switchboards.
60947-2 and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14
boverload and short-circuit protection Auxiliaries
b isolation with positive contact indication, making it All auxiliaries can be added to the circuit breaker by the user:
possible to service machines safely by isolating them b padlocking devices (in the OFF position)
from all power sources b rotary handle
b installation in universal and functional type b status-indication auxiliary contacts (ON, OFF and tripped)
enclosures b shunt (MX) or undervoltage (MN) releases
b NA switch-disconnector version. b early-make or early-break contacts.
Rotary handle
Direct or extended versions for mounting up to 600 mm behind the front:
b black front with black handle
b yellow front with red handle (for machine tools or emergency off as per IEC 204 /
VDE 0013).
All rotary handles can be padlocked in the OFF position. Optional door interlock,
recommended for MCC panels (motor control centres).
When the device is equipped with an extended rotary handle, a control accessory
mounted on the shaft makes it possible to operate the device with the door open.
The device can be padlocked in the OFF position in compliance with UL508.
Early-make or early-break contacts
DB115233
These contacts can be used respectively to supply an MN undervoltage release

before the circuit breaker closes or to open the contactor control circuit before the
circuit breaker opens.
Special functions
b Indication of thermal overloads with the SDx module.
b Early opening of the contactor for overload faults with the SDTAM module.
b Links with PLCs via the communication system.
b Measurement of all electrical parameters with Micrologic A and E.
b Programmable alarms with Micrologic 5 and 6.
Installation in enclosures
Compact circuit breakers can be installed in a metal enclosure together with other
devices (contactors, motor-protection circuit breakers, LEDs, etc.) (see page A-90).
Compliance with North American

industrial control equipment standards
Compact NSX devices have received UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 approval for
industrial control equipment of the "Manual Motor Controller", "Across the Line
Starter", "General Use" and "Disconnecting Means" types.
Type NA devices are switch-disconnectors that must always be protected upstream.
UL508 approval
Circuit breakers Trip units Approvals
Compact NSX100 to 630 TMD, Micrologic 2, 5 and 6 General Use
F/N/H Motor Disconnecting Means
NA, MA, Micrologic 1.3 M, 2.2 M, Manual Motor Controller
2.3 M, Micrologic 6.2 E-M and Across the Line Starter
6.3 E-M Motor Disconnecting Means
DB115234
Cert Table of 3-phase motor ratings in hp (1 hp = 0.7457 kW)

of Co ificate

.
s Inc
Labo
ratorie
mplia V AC ratings 115 230 460 575
rs
rwrite E nce
Unde CAT E TMD NA, MA
TIFI C
CER PLIAN Micrologic 2, 5 Micrologic 1.3 M, 2.2 M,
O M
OF C and 6 2.3 M
Micrologic 6.2 E-M and
6.3 E-M
25 25 3 7.5 15 20
50 50 7.5 15 30 40
100 100 15 30 75 100
160 150 25 50 100 150
250 220 40 75 150 200
400 320 - 125 250 300
550 500 - 150 350 500
The deratings indicated on pages B-8 and B-9 apply to TMD, Micrologic 2, 5 and 6 trip units,
rated at 40 C.
A-52
16 Hz 2/3 network protection
Micrologic 5 A-Z trip unit
Compact NSX circuit breakers may be used on 16 Hz 16 Hz 2/3 networks

2/3 systems with special thermal-magnetic and Single-phase distribution networks with a frequency of 16 Hz 2/3 are used for
electronic (Micrologic 5 A-Z) trip units. railroad applications in certain European countries.
Breaking capacity for 16 Hz 2/3 at 250/500 V

Compact NSX circuit breakers of the 3P 2D or the 3P 3D type protect 16 Hz 2/3
networks at 250 V or 500 V.
They can be equipped with either:
b a TM-D thermal-magnetic trip unit for Compact NSX100 to 250
b or an electronic Micrologic 5.2 A-Z trip unit for Compact NSX100 to 250 or
a 5.3 A-Z for Compact NSX400/630.
The possible breaking-capacity performance levels are B, F, N and H as indicated
below.
Breaking capacity Icu
Operating voltage TMD and Micrologic 5 A-Z trip units
Performance B F N H
250 V / 500 V Icu (kA) 25 36 50 70
Protection
TM-D thermal-magnetic trip units
DB112046
The 16 Hz 2/3 frequency does not modify the thermal settings with respect to those
at 50 Hz (see page A-15). The magnetic pick-ups are modified as shown below.
Magnetic protection for Compact NSX 100/160/250 at 50 Hz and at 16 Hz 2/3
Rating (A) In at 40 C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Pick-up (A) Im accur. 20% Fixed Adjustable
NSX100 50Hz 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800
16Hz 2/3 170 270 360 450 450 450 580 720
NSX160/250 50Hz 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 1250 1250 5 to 10 In
16 Hz 2/3 170 270 360 450 450 450 580 720 1100 1100 4.5 to 9 In
Micrologic 5 A-Z trip units

DB112153
Micrologic 5.2 A-Z and 5.3 A-Z are dedicated to 16 Hz 2/3 networks.
They use a suitable sampling frequency. The protection settings are identical to
those of Micrologic 5 A (see page A-19). They also offer a current-measurement
function for this specific frequency.
Trip-unit selection
Rating 16 63 100 160 250 400 630
Compact
NSX100 TM-D
NSX160 TM-D
NSX250 TM-D
NSX100 to 250 Micrologic 5.2 A -Z
NSX400/630 Micrologic 5.3 A-Z
Wiring for NSX100 to 630 A

Phase and isolated neutral interrupted- 250 / 500 V 2 poles in series - Earthed neutral - 250 / 500 V
B and F (3P 2D version) N and H (3P 3D version) B and F (3P 2D version) N and H (3P 3D version)
L N L N L N L N
DB115575
DB115576
DB115577
DB115578
load load load load
Remark. For an operating voltage > 250 V, the installation
A-53
and characteristics Protection of 400 Hz systems
Compact NSX circuit breakers may be used on 400 Hz 400 Hz distribution systems
systems. The main 400 Hz applications are in aeronautics and certain military ships. Modern
aircraft have three-phase 115/200 V 400 Hz networks.
Impact on protective devices

Due to the higher frequency, circuit breakers are subjected to additional temperature
rise for identical current levels, resulting from higher losses caused by Foucault
currents and an increase in the skin effect (reduction in the useful CSA of
conductors). To remain within the rated temperature-rise limits of devices, current
derating is required.
The power levels of 400 Hz applications rarely exceed a few hundred kW with
relatively low short-circuit currents, generally not exceeding four times the rated
current.
The standard Compact NSX and Masterpact NT/NW ranges are suitable for 400 Hz
applications if derating coefficients are applied to the protection settings. See the
derating table below.
Breaking capacity of Compact NSX circuit breakers

in 400 Hz, 440 V systems
Circuit breaker Breaking capacity Icu

NSX100 10 kA
NSX160 10 kA
NSX250 10 kA
NSX400 10 kA
NSX630 10 kA
Trip units equipped with thermal-magnetic

PB103366
protection
The 400 Hz current settings are obtained by multiplying the 50 Hz values by the
following adaptation coefficient:
b K1 for thermal trip units
b K2 for magnetic trip units.
These coefficients are independent of the trip-unit setting.
Thermal trip units
The current settings are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K1 < 1).
Magnetic trip units
Micrologic TM-D trip unit.
The current settings are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K2 > 1).
Consequently, when the trip units are adjustable, they must be set to the minimum
value.
Adaptation coefficients for thermal-magnetic trip units
Circuit Trip unit In (A) Thermal at 40C Im (A) Magnetic
breaker 50Hz K1 400 Hz 50Hz K2 400 Hz
NSX100 TM16G 16 0.95 15 63 1.6 100
TM25G 25 0.95 24 80 1.6 130
TM40G 40 0.95 38 80 1.6 130
TM63G 63 0.95 60 125 1.6 200
NSX100 TM16D 16 0.95 15 240 1.6 300
TM25D 25 0.95 24 300 1.6 480
TM40D 40 0.95 38 500 1.6 800
TM63D 63 0.95 60 500 1.6 800
TM80D 80 0.9 72 650 1.6 900
TM100D 100 0.9 90 800 1.6 900
NSX250 TM100D 100 0.9 90 800 1.6 900
TM160D 160 0.9 144 1250 1.6 2000
TM200D 200 0.9 180 1000 to 2000 1.6 1600 to
3200
TM250D 250 0.9 225 1250 to 2500 1.6 2000 to
4000
Example
NSX100 equipped with a TM16G with 50 Hz settings Ir = 16 A and Im = 63 A.
400 Hz settings Ir = 16 x 0.95 = 15 A and Im = 63 A x 1.6 = 100 A.
A-54
Protection of 400 H systems (cont.)
Protection(cont.)
PB103363
Micrologic electronic trip units

Micrologic 2.2, 2.3 or 5.2, 5.3 with A or E measurement functions are suitable for
400 Hz. The use of electronics offers the advantage of greater operating stability
when the frequency varies. However the units are still subject to temperature rise
caused by the frequency.
The practical consequences are:
b limit settings: see the Ir derating table below
b the long-time, short-time and instantaneous pick-ups are not modified (see pages
A-17 or A-19)
b the accuracy of the displayed measurements is 2 % (class II).
Thermal derating: maximum Ir setting
Micrologic 5 E trip unit. Circuit breaker Maximum setting Max. Ir setting at 400 Hz
coefficient
NSX100 1 100
NSX250 0.9 225
NSX400 0.8 320
NSX630 0.8 500
Example
An NSX250N, equipped with a Micrologic 2.2, Ir = 250 A at 50 Hz, must be limited to
use at Ir = 250 x 0.9 = 225 A.
044314
Its short-time pick-up with fixed time delay is adjustable from 1.5 to 10 Ir (60 to 400 A).
The instantaneous pick-up remains at 3000 A.
OF auxiliary contacts in 400 Hz networks

Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
OF auxiliary contact.
Contacts Standard Low level
044313
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 CA12 CA15

Operational current 24 V 6 6 5 3
(A) 48 V 6 6 5 3
110 V 6 5 5 2.5
220/240 V 6 4 5 2
380/415 V 6 2 5 1.5
MX or MN voltage release.
MN and MX voltage releases for Compact
R NSX100/630 at 400 Hz and 440 V
DB115579
For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems, only 125 V DC MN or MX releases may be

a MN/MX used. The release must be supplied by the 400 Hz system via a rectifier bridge (to be
U volt 125 V DC selected from the table below) and an additional resistor with characteristics
depending on the system voltage.
a 400 Hz U (V) 400 Hz Rectifier Additional resistor
220/240 V Thomson 110 BHz or 4.2 kW-5 W
Wiring diagram. General Instrument W06 or
Semikron SKB at 1.2/1.3
PB103377
380/420 V Semikron SKB at 1.2/1.3 10.7 kW-10 W
Note: other models of rectifier bridges may be used if their characteristics are at least equivalent
to those stated above.
SDx indication contacts

The SDx module may be used in 400 Hz systems for voltages from 24 to 440 V.
overload-trip signal.
These outputs can be reprogrammed to be assigned to other types of tripping or
alarm (see page A-81).

A-55
Functions Switch-disconnectors
and characteristics Overview of applications
A switch-disconnector is a control device that can be Position of switch-disconnectors

used to open and close a circuit under normal Compact NSX switch-disconnectors are used primarily for the following applications:
operating conditions. b busbar coupling and isolation
It is suitable for isolation as indicated on the front by the b isolation of industrial distribution boards and industrial control panels
symbol . b isolation of subdistribution boards for modular devices
b isolation of local enclosures
b isolation of final distribution enclosures for commercial applications
b industrial control panel switch-disconnectors.
DB115580
Source coupling
switch-disconnector
Replacement
source
Main power distribution Main power distribution
board for commercial board for industrial
applications applications
y 1000 A 15 - 40 kA y 1600 A 20 - 80 kA
Subdistribution board Industrial distribution

for modular products board
y 160 A : 15 - 25 kA
y 160 A 15 - 25 kA y 400 A y 400 A : 20 - 80 kA
Final
distribution
Local enclosure for Local
isolation commercial isolation Industrial control
enclosure applications enclosure panel
y 63 A y 10 kA y 40 A y 5 kA
y 63 A y 630 A
y 10 kA y 25 kA
M M M M M
N.B. Adjacent to or built into the machine.
Building utilities Building final distribution Continuous processes Manufacturing processes

and individual machines
A-56
Switch-disconnector functions
Compact NSX100 to 630 NA switch-disconnectors are Suitability for isolation with positive contact
available in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable versions.
They use the same accessories and offer the same indication
connection possibilities as the circuit-breaker versions. Compact NSX switch-disconnectors are suitable for isolation as defined by standard
They may be interlocked with another Compact switch- IEC 60947-3. The corresponding conformity tests guarantee:
disconnector or circuit breaker to form a source- b the mechanical reliability of the position indication, i.e. the O (OFF) position
indicated by the control device always reflects the open position of the contacts:
changeover system.
v the required distance between contacts is provided
v padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open
b the absence of leakage currents
b overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections.
Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability of
the position-indication system.
PB103199-28
Emergency-off function
A Compact NSX NA is combined with an MN or MX release connected to an
emergency-off button. In an emergency, an operator at a remote location can
interrupt the circuit at rated load to isolate the entire switchboard and the
downstream loads.
Motor mechanism
Compact NSX NA devices equipped with a motor mechanism module enable remote
closing and opening. This function may be combined with the emergency-off
function. In this case, the emergency off function is combined with a closing lock-out
that must be intentionally reset (electrical diagram with closing lock-out).
Compact NSX switch-disconnector.
Earth-leakage protection
PB103372-34
A Vigi module may be added to a switch-disconnector to monitor all leakage currents

in the outgoing circuits of the switchboard on which the switch-disconnector is
installed. When the Vigi module detects an earth-leakage current, the switch-
disconnector interrupts the load current. This function may be combined with the
motor mechanism and the emergency-off function using an MN or MX release.
Switch-disconnector protection
The switch-disconnector can make and break its rated current. For an overload or a
short-circuit, it must be protected by an upstream device, in compliance with
installation standards.
The circuit-breaker/switch-disconnector coordination tables determine the required
upstream circuit breaker. However, due to their high-set magnetic release, Compact
Compact NSX switch-disconnector NSX100 to 630 A switch-disconnectors are self-protected.
equipped with a motor mechanism module.
Switch-disconnector utilisation category

Depending on the rated operational current and the mechanical durability (A for
PB103629-31
frequent operation or B for infrequent operation), standard IEC 60947-3 defines the
utilisation categories as shown in the table below. Compact NSX NA switch-
disconnectors comply with utilisation categories AC22A or AC23A.
Utilisation category Typical applications

Infrequent Frequent
operation operation
AC-21A AC-21B Resistive loads including moderate overloads (cos =
0.95)
AC-22A AC-22B Mixed resistive and inductive loads including moderate
overloads (cos = 0.65)
AC-23A AC-23B Motor loads or other highly inductive loads (cos = 0.45
or 0.35)
Compact NSX switch-disconnector

equipped with a Vigi module.
A-57
Functions Switch-disconnectors
and characteristics Characteristics and performance of
Compact NSX switch-disconnectors
from 100 to 630 NA
Installation standards require upstream protection.
However Compact NSX100 to 630 NA switch-
disconnectors are self-protected by their high-set Rated voltages
magnetic release. Insulation voltage (V) Ui 800
Impulse withstand voltage (kV)Uimp 8
Operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690
Suitability for isolation IEC/EN 60947-3 yes
Utilisation category AC 22 A/AC 23 A - DC 22 A/DC 23 A
Pollution degree IEC 60664-1 3
Switch-disconnectors
PB103199-39
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3

Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C
Number of poles
Operational current (A) depending on le AC 50/60 Hz
the utilisation category 220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V (2)
500/525 V
660/690 V
DC
250 V (1 pole)
500 poles (2 poles in series)
750 V (3 poles in series)
Short-circuit making capacity lcm min. (switch-disconnector alone)
(kA peak) max. (protection by upstream circuit
Compact NSX100 to 250 NA. breaker)
Rated short-time withstand current lcw for 1s
(A rms) 3s
20 s
PB103271-45
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical

electrical AC
440 V In/2
In
690 V In/2
In
DC 250 V (1 pole) and In/2
500 V (2 poles in series)In
Positive contact indication
Pollution degree
Protection
Add-on earth-leakage protection By Vigi module
By Vigirex relay
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltages releases MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Voltage-presence indicator
Current-transformer module
Compact NSX400 to 630 NA.
Ammeter module
Insulation monitoring module
Remote communication by bus
Device-status indication
Device remote operation
Operation counter
Installation / connections
Dimensions (mm) fixed, front connections 2/3P
WxHxD 4P
Weight (kg) fixed, front connections 3P
4P
(1) 2P in 3P case. Source-changeover systems (see chapter on Source-changeover systems)
(2) Suitable for 480 V NEMA. Manual source-changeover systems
Remote-operated or automatic source-changeover systems
A-58
Control
Manual With toggle b
With direct or extended rotary handle b
Electrical With remote control b
Versions
Fixed b
Withdrawable Plug-in base b
Chassis b
NSX100NA NSX160NA NSX250NA NSX400NA NSX630NA
100 160 250 400 630

2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A
100 160 250 - -
100 160 250 - -
100 160 250 - -
2.6 3.6 4.9 7.1 8.5
330 330 330 330 330
1800 2500 3500 5000 6000

1800 2500 3500 5000 6000
690 960 1350 1930 2320
50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A
35000 30000 15000 10000 6000
20000 15000 7500 5000 3000
15000 10000 6000 5000 3000
8000 5000 3000 2500 1500
10000 10000 10000 - -
5000 5000 5000 - -
b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110

140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110
1.5 to 1.8 5.2
2.0 to 2.2 6.8
b b
b b
A-59
Functions Source-changeover systems
and characteristics Presentation
Some installations use two supply sources to counter Manual source changeover
the temporary loss of the main supply. This is the most simple system. It is controlled manually by a maintenance technician
A source-changeover system is required to safely and consequently the time required to switch from the normal source to the
switch between the two sources. replacement source can vary.
The replacement source can be a generator set or A manual source-changeover system is made up of:
another network. b two devices (circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors) controlled manually
b mechanical interlocking.
The interlock prevents connection to both sources at the same time, even
momentarily.
Remote-operated source-changeover systems

PB103937
This is the most commonly employed system. No human invention is required. The
transfer from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically.
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two circuit breakers or
switch-disconnectors equipped with motor mechanisms and:
b an electrical interlocking system implemented in a number of manners
b a mechanical interlocking system that protects against the consequences of an
electrical malfunction and prevents incorrect manual operation.
Automatic source-changeover systems

An automatic controller may be added to the remote-operated source-changeover
system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes.
This solution ensures optimum energy management:
PB103936
b switching to a replacement source depending on external requirements

b source management
b load shedding
b emergency source replacement, etc.
Service sector:
b hospital operating rooms
b safety systems for tall buildings
b computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc.)
b lighting systems in shopping centres, etc.
PB103934
Industry:
b assembly lines
b engine rooms on ships
b critical auxiliaries in thermal power stations, etc.
PB103935
Infrastructures:
b runway lighting systems
b port and railway installations
b control systems for military installations, etc.
A-60
Manual source-changeover systems
Interlocking of two or three toggle-controlled

DB112198
devices
Interlocking system
Two devices can be interlocked using this system. Two identical interlocking systems
can be used to interlock three devices installed side by side.
Authorised positions:
b one device closed (ON), the others open (OFF)
b all devices open (OFF).
The system is locked using one or two padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm).
This system can be expanded to more than three devices.
Interlocking of two or three toggle-controlled devices. There are two interlocking-system models:
b one for Compact NSX100 to 250
b one for Compact NSX400/630.
Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
All toggle-controlled fixed or plug-in Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers and
switch-disconnectors of the same frame size can be interlocked. The devices must
be either all fixed or all plug-in versions.
Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles

DB112194
Interlocking system
ON
Interlocking involves padlocking the rotary handles on two devices which may be
I
either circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors.
ON Authorised positions:
I tripped
b one device closed (ON), the other open (OFF)
b both devices open (OFF).
reset
tripped O OFF
reset
The system is locked using up to three padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm).
O OFF
There are two interlocking-system models:
b one for Compact NSX100 to 250
b one for Compact NS400/630.
Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles. Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
All rotary-handle fixed or plug-in Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers and
switch-disconnectors of the same frame size can be interlocked. The devices must
be either all fixed or all plug-in versions.
Interlocking of a number of devices using keylocks

(captive keys)
Interlocking using keylocks is very simple and makes it possible to interlock two or
DB112195
more devices that are physically distant or that have very different characteristics, for
example medium-voltage and low-voltage devices or a Compact NSX100 to 630
circuit breaker and switch-disconnector.
Interlocking system
Each device is equipped with an identical keylock and the key is captive on the
closed (ON) device. A single key is available for all devices. It is necessary to first
open (OFF position) the device with the key before the key can be withdrawn and
used to close another device.
A system of wall-mounted captive key boxes makes a large number of combinations
possible between many devices.
Interlocking with keylocks. All rotary-handle Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
can be interlocked between each other or with any other device equipped with the
same type of keylock.
Interlocking of two devices on a base plate

Interlocking system
DB112196
A base plate designed for two Compact NSX devices can be installed horizontally or
vertically on a mounting rail. Interlocking is carried out on the base plate by a
mechanism located behind the devices. In this way, access to the device controls
and trip units is not blocked.
All rotary-handle and toggle-controlled Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers and
switch-disconnectors can be interlocked. Devices must be either all fixed or all plug-
in versions, with or without earth-leakage protection or measurement modules.
An adaptation kit is required to interlock:
b two plug-in devices
b a Compact NSX100-250 with an NSX400-630.
Connection to the downstream installation can be made easier using a coupling
accessory (see next page).
Interlocking on a base plate.
A-61
Functions Source-changeover systems
and characteristics Remote-operated and automatic source-
changeover systems
Coupling accessory on base plate
Remote-operated systems
PB103832-51
It is made up of two devices with motor mechanisms, mounted on a base plate and
combined with:
b an electrical interlocking unit
b optional mechanical interlocking system.
Electrical interlocking unit (IVE)
Interlocks two devices equipped with motor mechanisms and auxiliary contacts.
The IVE unit is mandatory to ensure the necessary time-delays required for safe
switching.
Mechanical interlocking system
The mechanical interlocking system is strongly recommended to limit the effects of
design or wiring errors and to avoid manual switching errors.
Remote-operated source-changeover system.
DB112197
Automatic systems
4 An automatic controller can manage switching from one source to the other.
The controller can be:
b a device provided by the customer
b an integrated BA controller
b an integrated UA controller.
An integrated BA or UA automatic controller manages source transfer according to
user-selected sequences that can include source priorities, start-up of a generator,
QN return to the Normal source, etc. An ACP auxiliaries control plate facilitates
installation of the BA and UA controllers. The plate includes two circuit breakers to
5...8
auto
5...8
manu
manu
auto
protect the control circuits and two contactors to control the motor mechanisms of
the devices.
3 1 2
1 Circuit breaker QN equipped with a motor mechanism and

auxiliary contacts, connected to the Normal source
2 Circuit breaker QR equipped with a motor mechanism and
auxiliary contacts, connected to the Replacement source
3 Base plate with mechanical interlocking
4 Electrical interlocking unit IVE
5 Coupling accessory (downstream connection)
Coupling accessory on base plate

DB112199
1 This accessory may be used with a manual or remote-operated source-changeover

system (with or without an automatic controller). It respects the mounting distance
between the devices secured to the ACP plate and provides downstream coupling of
the two sets of busbars. It is compatible with standard device accessories.
The short terminal shields of the device can be installed on the upstream connectors
of the coupling accessory. Downstream, it is possible to use the connection
accessories and the long or short terminal shields of the device.
1 Short terminal shields

2 Terminals
3 Interphase barriers
3 4 Long terminal shields
Standard device accessories may be used for the coupling

accessory on the base plate.
A-62
By combining a remote-operated source-changeover Functions of the BA and UA controllers
system with an integrated BA or UA automatic
Controller BA UA
controller, it is possible to automatically control source
transfer according to user-selected sequences. Compatible circuit breakers Compact NSX100 to 630
circuit breakers
4-position switch
Automatic operation b b
Forced operation on Normal source b b
PB100855-30
Forced operation on Replacement source b b

Stop (both Normal and Replacement sources OFF) b b
Automatic operation
Monitoring of the Normal source and automatic transfer from one b b
source to the other
Engine generator set start-up control b
Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of engine generator set b
Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority loads b
Transfer to Replacement source if one of the Normal source phases b
is absent
BA controller.
Test
By opening the P25M circuit breaker upstream of the controller b b
PB100856-30
By pressing the test button on the front of the controller b

Indications
Circuit-breaker status indication on the front of the controller: ON, b b
OFF, fault trip
Automatic-mode indication contact b b
Other functions
Selection of type of Normal source b
(single-phase or three-phase)
Voluntary transfer to Replacement source b b
UA controller. Forced operation on Normal source if Replacement source is not b

operational
Additional test contact (not part of controller) b b
PB100857-35
Transfer to Replacement source only if contact closed (e.g. for a UR

frequency check)
Setting of maximum start-up time for the Replacement-source b
Power supply
Control voltages (1) 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz b b
380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz b b
440 V 60 Hz b b
Operating thresholds
Undervoltage 0.35 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un b b
Phase failure 0.5 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un b
Voltage presence voltage u 0.85 Un b b
Characteristics of output contacts (dry, volt-free contacts)
Rated thermal current (A) 8
Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V
AC DC
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13
Auxiliary control plate for a BA or UA controller.
Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 6 8 2
48 V 8 7 5 5 2 -
110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 -
220/240 V 8 6 4 3 - -
250 V - - - - 0.4 -
380/415 V 5 - - - - -
440 V 4 - - - - -
660/690 V - - - - - -
(1) The controller is powered by the ACP auxiliaries control plate. The same voltage must
be used for the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit-breaker operating mechanisms. If this
voltage is the same as the source voltage, then the Normal and Replacement sources can
be used directly for the power supply. If not, an isolation transformer must be used.
A-63
Functions Accessories and auxiliaries
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630
fixed version
Insulation accessories A-73
DB115581
Interphase barriers
Sealable terminal
shields
Electrical auxiliaries A-80
Indication contact
Voltage release
SDTAM module
SDx module
Protection and measurements A-86
Micrologic 2 trip unit
Vigi module
Micrologic 5 / 6 trip unit
TM-D, TM-G trip unit
Ammeter module
A-64
Connection A-70
One-piece spreader
Cable connectors
Rear connectors
Terminal Cable connectors

extensions
Communication and display
A-26
BSCM module
NSX cord
Modbus interface
FDM121
Control accessories A-82
Direct rotary handle Extended rotary handle
Motor mechanism
A-65
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630
plug-in and withdrawable versions
Insulation accessories A-73
DB115888
Interphase barriers
Sealable long terminal

shields for plug-in base
Electrical accessories A-78
Automatic withdrawable auxiliary connector
Manual auxiliary connector
Mechanical accessories A-69
Circuit-breaker side plate
Chassis side plate
A-66
Connection A-70 and A-72
Cable connectors Rear connectors
Lugs
Rear connectors
Adapter
Cable connectors
Terminal extensions
Circuit breaker
Plug-in base
Power connection
accessories
Power connections
Power connections for Vigicompact
A-67
and characteristics Device installation
Compact NSX circuit breakers may be installed Fixed circuit breakers

horizontally, vertically or flat on their back, without Fixed circuit breakers are designed for standard connection using bars or cables
derating performance levels. with lugs. Bare-cable connectors are available for connection to bare copper or
There are three installation versions: aluminium cables.
b fixed For connection of large cables, a number of solutions with spreaders may be used
b plug-in (on a base) for both cables with lugs or bare cables.
b withdrawable (on a chassis).
DB112200
DB112201
DB112202
For the last two, components must be added (base,
chassis) to the fixed version.
Many connection components are shared by the three
versions.
Mounting on a backplate. Mounting on rails. Mounting on DIN rail (with

DB112208
adapter).
PB103354-32
DB112203
DB112204
L3
L2
L1
8 Nm
L2
8 Nm
L3
8 Nm
L3
L2
L1
Mounting on a Prisma Mounting on busbars with an

mounting plate. adapter.
Fixed Compact NSX250. Installation positions.
Plug-in circuit breakers
DB112209
PB103598-32
The plug-in version makes it possible to:

b extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch the
connections on the base
b allow for the addition of future circuits by installing bases that will be equipped with
a circuit breaker at a later date
b isolate the power circuits when the device is mounted on or through a panel. It acts
as a barrier for the connections of the plug-in base. Insulation is made complete by
the mandatory short terminal shields on the device. The degrees of protection are:
v circuit breaker plugged in = IP4
v circuit breaker removed = IP2
v circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters = IP4.
Parts of a plug-in configuration
A plug-in configuration is made by adding a "plug-in kit" to a fixed device.
To avoid connecting or disconnecting the power circuits under load conditions, a
Plug-in Compact NSX250. Installation positions. safety trip causes automatic tripping if the device is ON, before engaging or
withdrawing it. The safety trip, supplied with the kit, must be installed on the device. If
the device is disconnected, the safety trip does not operate. The device can be
operated outside the switchboard.
Accessories
Optional insulation accessories are available.
b Terminal shields to protect against direct contact.
b Interphase barriers to reinforce insulation between phases and protect against
direct contact.
Mounting
DB112206
DB112205
DB112207
Mounting on a backplate. Mounting through a front Mounting on rails.

panel.
A-68
Withdrawable circuit breakers
PB103599-42
In addition to the advantages provided by the base, installation on a chassis

facilitates handling. It offers three positions, with transfer from one to the other after
mechanical unlocking:
b connected: the power circuits are connected
b disconnected: the power circuits are disconnected, the device can be operated to
check auxiliary operation
b removed: the device is free and can be removed from the chassis.
Parts of a withdrawable configuration
A withdrawable configuration requires two side plates installed on the base and two
sides plates mounted on the circuit breaker. Similar to the plug-in version, a safety
trip causes automatic tripping if the device is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it,
and enables device operation in the disconnected position.
Accessories
Accessories are the same as for the base, with in addition:
Withdrawable Compact NSX250. b auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part, indicating the "connected" and
"disconnected" positions
b locking by 1 to 3 padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm), to:
DB112209
v prevent insertion for connection

v lock the circuit breaker in connected or disconnected position
b toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel,
intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit
Installation positions. breaker (supplied with a toggle extension)
b telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles. The door can then be closed with the
device in the connected and disconnected positions.
DB111369
DB112219
DB112210
Connected. Disconnected. Removed.
Protection collar for toggle and toggle Telescopic shaft.

extension to provide IP4 in the connected and
disconnected positions.
Mounting
DB112220
DB112221
DB112312
Mounting on a backplate. Mounting through a front Mounting on rails.

panel.
A-69
and characteristics Connection of fixed devices
Fixed circuit breakers are designed for standard front Front connection
connection using bars or cables with lugs.
Cable connectors are available for bare cables. Rear Bars or cables with lugs
connection is also possible. Standard terminals
Compact NSX100 to 630 come with terminals comprising snap-in nuts with screws:
b Compact NSX100: M6 nuts and screws. Compact NSX160/250: M8 nuts and
screws
b Compact NSX400/630: M10 nuts and screws.
These terminals may be used for:
DB112168
DB112169
b direct connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs

b terminal extensions offering a wide range of connection possibilities.
Interphase barriers or terminal shields are recommended. They are mandatory for
certain connection accessories (in which case the interphase barriers are provided).
Insulated bar. Bars
When the switchboard configuration has not been tested, insulated bars are
mandatory.
DB112170
Maximum size of bars

Compact NSX circuit breaker 100/160/250 400/630
Without spreaders pitch (mm) 35 45
maximum bar size (mm) 20 x 2 32 x 6
With spreaders pitch (mm) 45 52.5
Small lug for copper cables. maximum bar size (mm) 32 x 2 40 x 6
Crimp lugs
DB112171
There are two models, for aluminium and copper cables.

It is necessary to use narrow lugs, compatible with device connections. They must
be used with interphase barriers or long terminal shields. The lugs are supplied with
interphase barriers and may be used for the types of cables listed below.
Cable sizes for connection using lugs
Small lug for Al cables. Compact NSX circuit breaker 100/160/250 400/630
Copper cables size (mm) 120, 150, 185 240, 300
crimping hexagonal barrels or punching
Aluminium cables size (mm) 120, 150, 185 240, 300
DB112172
DB112173
DB112174
crimping hexagonal barrels

Terminal extensions
Extensions with anti-rotation ribs can be attached to the standard terminals to
Straight terminal Right-angle terminal 45 terminal provide numerous connection possibilities in little space:
extensions. extensions. extensions. b straight terminal extensions
b right-angle terminal extensions
b edgewise terminal extensions
DB112175
DB112176
DB112177
b double-L extensions
b 45 extensions.
Spreaders
Edgewise terminal Double-L terminal Spreaders.
Spreaders may be used to increase the pitch:
extensions. extensions.
b NSX100 to 250: the 35 mm pitch can be increased to 45 mm
b NSX400/630: the 45 mm pitch can be increased to 52 or 70 mm.
Bars, cable lugs or cable connectors can be attached to the ends.
One-piece spreader for NSX100 to 250
Connection of large cables may require an increase in the distance between the
DB118544
device terminals.
The one-piece spreader is the means to:
b increase the 35 mm pitch of the NSX100 to 250 circuit-breaker terminals to the
45 mm pitch of a NSX400/630 device
b use all the connection and insulation accessories available for the next largest
frame size (lugs, connectors, spreaders, right-angle and edgewise terminal
extensions, terminal shields and interphase barriers).
DB112179
DB112180
It may also be used for Interpact INS switch-disconnectors.

Equipped with a single-piece spreader, Compact NSX devices can be mounted:
b at the back of a switchboard
b behind the front panel with a raiser.
The one-piece spreader is also the means to:
b align devices with different frame sizes in the switchboard
b use the same mounting plate, whatever the device.
Mounting at the Mounting
back of a behind the front Pitch (mm) depending on the type of spreader
switchboard. panel with a
Compact NSX circuit breaker NSX100 to 250 NSX100 to 630
raiser.
Without spreaders 35 45
With spreaders 45 52.5 or 70
With one-piece spreader 45 -
A-70
Bare cables
DB112313
DB112314
For bare cables (without lugs), the prefabricated bare-cable connectors may be used
for both copper and aluminium cables.
1-cable connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250
The connectors snap directly on to the device terminals or are secured by clips to
right-angle and straight terminal extensions as well as spreaders.
Bare cable.
1-cable connectors for Compact NSX400 to 630
The connectors are screwed directly to the device terminals.
2-cable connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 and 400/630
The connectors are screwed to device terminals or right-angle terminal extensions.
Distribution connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250
These connectors are screwed directly to device terminals. Interphase barriers are
supplied with distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long terminal shields.
Each connector can receive six cables with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to
35 mm each.
Polybloc distribution block for Compact NSX100 to 630
Polybloc connects directly to device terminals.
It is used to connect up to six or nine flexible or rigid cables with cross-sectional
DB112315
DB112316
DB112317
DB111326
areas not exceeding 10 mm or 16 mm, to each pole.

Connection is made to spring terminals without screws.
Maximum size of cables depending on the type of connector

1-cable 2-cable Compact NSX circuit 100/160 250 400 630
connector for connector for breaker
NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630. NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630. Steel connectors 1.5 to 95 mm b
Aluminium connectors 25 to 95 mm b b
DB111327
DB111500
DB115225
120 to 185 mm b b
2 cables 50 to 120 mm b b
2 cables 35 to 240 mm b b
35 to 300 mm b b
Distribution connector for Distribution connectors 6 cables 35 mm b b
Polybloc 100/160 A and 250 A
NSX100 to 250. distribution blocks. Polybloc distribution blocks 6 or 9 cables 10/16 mm b b
Four positions. Two lengths.

Rear connection
DB111329
DB111330
Device mounting on a backplate with suitable holes enables rear connection.
Bars or cables with lugs

Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are available in two lengths. Bars may
be positioned flat, on edge or at 45 angles depending on how the rear connections
are positioned.
The rear connections are simply fitted to the device connection terminals. All
combinations of rear connection lengths and positions are possible on a given
device.
Bare cables
For the connection of bare cables, the 1-cable connectors for Compact NSX100 to
250 may be secured to the rear connections using clips.
Rear connection.
DB111332
Connection of bare cables to NSX100 to 250.
A-71
and characteristics Connection of withdrawable and plug-in
devices
Connection is identical for both withdrawable and plug- Bars or cables with lugs
in versions. The same accessories as for fixed devices The plug-in base is equipped with terminals which, depending on their orientation,
may be used. serve for front and rear connection.
For rear connection of a base mounted on a backplate, the terminals must be
replaced by insulated, long right-angle terminal extensions.
For Compact NSX630 devices, connection most often requires the 52.5 or 70 mm
pitch spreaders.
DB111337
DB111338
DB111339
Four positions. Two lengths.
DB111345
DB111346
Front connection. Front connection with Rear connection of a base

spreaders. mounted on a backplate.
Connection accessories
All accessories for fixed devices (bars, lugs, terminal extensions and spreaders) may
be used with the plug-in base (see pages A-70, A-71).
Bare cables
All terminals may be equipped with bare-cable connectors. See the "Connection of
fixed devices" section.
DB111340
DB111341
With a 100 to 250 A base. With a 400/630 A base.
Adapter for plug-in base

DB111344
The adapter is a plastic component for the 100 to 250 base and the 400/630 base
that enables use of all the connection accessories of the fixed device.
It is required for interphase barriers and the long and short terminal shields.
DB111342
DB111343
Adapter for 100 to 250 A - 3P Adapter for 400/630 A - 4P base.

base. Connection with spreaders and interphase
Connection with bars or barriers.
cables with lugs.
A-72
Insulation of live parts
Terminal shields are identical for fixed and Terminal shields

plug-in/withdrawable versions and cover all Insulating accessories used for protection against direct contact with power circuits.
applications up to 1000 V. They provide IP40 degree of protection and IK07 mechanical impact protection.
They exist for the 100 to 250 A and 400/630 A ratings,
Terminal-shield types
in long and short versions.
Compact NSX100 to 250 and NSX400/630 3P or 4P can be equipped with:
b short terminal shields
b long terminal shields.
All terminal shields have holes or knock-outs in front for voltage-presence indicators.
Short terminal shields
DB111347
DB111348
They are used with:

b plug-in and withdrawable versions in all connection configurations
b fixed versions with rear connection.
Long terminal shields
They are used for front connection with cables or insulated bars.
Long terminal shields. Short terminal shields. They comprise two parts assembled with captive screws, forming an IP40 cover.
b The top part is equipped with sliding grids with break marks for precise adaptation
to cables or insulated bars.
DB111349
1
2 b The rear part completely blocks off the connection zone. Partially cut squares can
be removed to adapt to all types of connection for cables with lugs or copper bars.
Long terminal shields may be mounted upstream and downstream of:
b fixed devices
b the base of plug-in and withdrawable versions, thus completing the insulation
provided by the mandatory short terminal shields on the device
b the one-piece spreader for NSX100 to 250
b the 52.5 mm spreaders for NSX400/630.
1 Partially cut removable squares.
2 Grids with break marks. Terminal shields and pitch
Combination possibilities are shown below.
Circuit breaker NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630
DB111355
Short terminal shields

Pitch (mm) 35 45
Long terminal shields
Pitch (mm) 35 45 52.5
Assembled with captive screws.
Interphase barriers
DB111356
Safety accessories for maximum insulation at the power-connection points:

b they clip easily onto the circuit breaker
b single version for fixed devices and adapters on plug-in bases
b not compatible with terminal shields
b the adapter for the plug-in base is required for mounting on plug-in and
withdrawable versions.
Interphase barriers.
Rear insulating screens
Safety accessories providing insulation at the rear of the device.
DB111357
Their use is mandatory for devices with spreaders, installed on backplates, when
terminal shields are not used.
The available screen dimensions are shown below.
Circuit breaker NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630
3P W x H x thickness (mm) 140 x 105 x 1 203 x 175 x 1.5
4P W x H x thickness (mm) 175 x 105 x 1 275 x 175 x 1.5
Rear insulating screens.
A-73
and characteristics Selection of auxiliaries
for Compact NSX100/160/250
Standard
All Compact NSX100/160/250 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors have slots
for the electrical auxiliaries listed below.
5 indication contacts (see page A-80)
b 2 ON/OFF (OF1 and OF2)
b 1 trip indication (SD)
b 1 fault-trip indication (SDE)
b 1 earth-fault indication (SDV), when the device is equipped with a Vigi module.
1 remote-tripping release (see page A-83)
b either 1 MN undervoltage release
b or 1 MX shunt release.
Remote indications
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units may be equipped with a fault-trip
indication to identify the type of fault by installing:
1 indication module with two outputs (see page A-81)
b either an SDx module with Micrologic 2.2 / 5.2 A or E / 6.2 A or E
b or an SDTAM module with Micrologic 2.2 M or 6-2 E-M (motor protection).
This module occupies the slots of one OF contact and an MN/MX release.
All these auxiliaries may be installed with a motor mechanism or a rotary

handle.
The following table indicates auxiliary possibilities depending on the type of trip unit.
NA, TMD, TMG, MA

Standard
DB115583
DB111392
Motor mechanism /
rotary handle
SD SDE
OF1 OF2 OF2
SD SDE OF1
MN /
MX MN /
MX
SDV
SDV
Micrologic 2 / 5 / 6
Standard Remote indications via SDx or SDTAM
Motor mechanism /
DB115584
DB115585
rotary handle Motor mechanism /

rotary handle
OF1 OF2 24 V DC
or supply terminal block
SD SDE SDx /
MN / SDTAM
MX
The SDx or SDTAM uses the OF1 and MN/MX slots.

External connection is made via a terminal block in the OF1 slot.
The 24 V DC supply provides for the Micrologic 5 / 6 display when the device is OFF or under
low-load conditions.
A-74
Communication
Communication requires specific auxiliaries (see page A-26).
Communication of status indications
b 1 BSCM module.
b 1 NSX cord (internal terminal block) for both communication and 24 V DC supply
to the BSCM.
Communication of status conditions is compatible with a standard motor mechanism
and a rotary handle.
Communication of status indications and controls
This requires, in addition to the previous auxiliaries:
b 1 communicating motor mechanism connected to the BSCM.
Communication of measurements
to the Micrologic.
Communication of measurements is compatible with a standard or communicating
motor mechanism and a rotary handle.
Communication of status indications, controls and measurements
b 1 BSCM module
to the BSCM and the Micrologic
Installation of SDx or SDTAM is compatible with communication.

NA, TMD, TMG, MA, Micrologic 2

Communication of status indications Communication of status indications and controls
Motor mechanism /
DB115586
DB115587
Communicating
rotary handle motor mechanism
BSCM BSCM
NSX cord
or
NSX cord
Micrologic 5 / 6
Communication of measurements with or without FDM121 Communication of status indications, controls and
display measurements with or without FDM121 display
DB115588
DB115589
Motor mechanism / Communicating

NSX cord BSCM

or NSX cord
A-75
and characteristics Selection of auxiliaries
for Compact NSX400/630
Standard
All Compact NSX400/630 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors have slots for
the electrical auxiliaries listed below.
7 indication contacts (see page A-80)
b 4 ON/OFF (OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4)
b 1 trip indication (SD)
b 1 fault-trip indication (SDE)
b 1 earth-fault indication (SDV), when the device is equipped with a Vigi module.
1 remote-tripping release (see page A-83)
b either 1 MN undervoltage release
b or 1 MX shunt release.
Remote indications
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units may be equipped with a fault-trip
indication to identify the type of fault by installing:
1 indication module with two outputs (see page A-81)
b either an SDx module with Micrologic 2.2 / 5.2 A or E / 6.2 A or E
b or an SDTAM module with Micrologic 2.2 M or 6-2 E-M (motor protection).
This module occupies the slots of an MN/MX release.
All these auxiliaries may be installed with a motor mechanism or a rotary

handle.
NA, Micrologic 1.3 M

Standard
Motor mechanism /
DB115590
DB115591
rotary handle
OF1,
OF2, SD
OF1 SD OF3
SDE
OF2
OF4
OF3 SDE
Reserved OF4 Reserved
MN / MN /
MX MX
SDV
SDV
Micrologic 2 / 5 / 6
Standard
Motor mechanism /
DB115592
DB115593
Motor mechanism /
rotary handle rotary handle
OF1 SD
OF2
OF3 SDE or 24 V DC
supply terminal
Reserved OF4 SDx / block
MN / SDTAM
MX
The SDx or SDTAM uses the reserved slot and the MN/MX slots.
External connection is made via a terminal block in the reserved slot.
The 24 V DC supply provides for the Micrologic 5 / 6 display when the device is OFF or under
low-load conditions.
A-76
Communication
Communication requires specific auxiliaries (see page A-26).
Communication of status indications
b 1 BSCM module
to the BSCM.
Communication of status conditions is compatible with a standard motor mechanism
and a rotary handle.
Communication of status indications and controls
This requires, in addition to the previous auxiliaries:
Communication of measurements
to the Micrologic.
Communication of measurements is compatible with a standard or communicating
motor mechanism and a rotary handle.
Communication of status indications, controls and measurements
b 1 BSCM module
to the BSCM and the Micrologic
Installation of SDx or SDTAM is compatible with communication.

NA, Micrologic 1.3 M, Micrologic 2

Communication of status indications Communication of status indications and controls
Motor mechanism /
DB115594
DB115595
Communicating
NSX cord NSX cord

or
BSCM BSCM
Micrologic 5 / 6
Communication of status indications Communication of status indications, controls and
measurements with or without FDM121 display
DB115596
Motor mechanism /
DB115597
Communicating
NSX cord
or
NSX cord BSCM
A-77
and characteristics Connection of electrical auxiliaries
Fixed Compact NSX

DB112162
Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover.
Fixed Compact NSX.
Withdrawable or plug-in Compact NSX

DB112167
Automatic auxiliary connectors

Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary
connectors (nine wires each). These are made up of:
b a moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per

circuit breaker)
b a fixed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare

cables up to 2.5 mm.

Micrologic trip unit options are also wired via the automatic auxiliary connectors.
Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors

Depending on the functions installed, one to three automatic auxiliary connectors are
required.
Plug-in/withdrawable
Compact NSX.
DB115610
DB115601
Connector 1
Connector 1
Connector 2
Connector 2
Connector 3
DB111376
Compact NSX100/160/250. Compact NSX400/630.
Automatic auxiliary
connector:
Fixed part
Moving part
A-78
Withdrawable Compact NSX
DB111379
Manual auxiliary connectors

As an option to the automatic auxiliary connectors, withdrawable circuit breakers
may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine wires each. In "disconnected"
position, the auxiliaries remain connected.
They can then be tested by operating the device.
Nine-wire manual auxiliary
DB115602
connector. Connector 1
Connector 2
Compact NSX100/160/250.
Connector 1
DB115611
Connector 2
Connector 3
Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with

numbered terminals for connection of wires up to:
b 1.5 mm for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases
b 2.5 mm for the motor-mechanism module.
Circuit breaker Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3

OF1 SDx/ OF2/SDV / ZSI out (1) OF3
or
MN/MX SDTAM SDE OF4
NSX cord ZSI in
SD
MT ZSI out
MTc
24 V DC
NSX100/160/250 b b -
NSX400/630 b b b
(1) Only for NSX100 to 250.
MT: motor mechanism.
MTc: communicating motor mechanism. Compact NSX400/630.
A-79
and characteristics Indication contacts
One contact model provides circuit-breaker status These common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuit-breaker status
indications (OF - SD - SDE - SDV). information.
An early-make or early-break contact, in conjunction They can be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
with a rotary handle, can be used to anticipate device They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.
opening or closing.
A CE / CD contact indicates that the chassis is Functions
connected / disconnected. Breaker-status indications, during normal operation or after a fault
A single type of contact provides all the different indication functions:
b OF (ON/OFF) indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
b SD (trip indication) indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
v an overload
v a short-circuit
044314
v an earth fault (Vigi) or a ground fault (Micrologic 6)

v operation of a voltage release
v operation of the "push to trip" button
v disconnection when the device is ON.
The SD contact returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
b SDE (fault-trip indication) indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
v an overload
v a short-circuit
v an earth fault (Vigi) or a ground fault (Micrologic 6).
Indication contacts. The SD contact returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
b SDV indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an earth fault. It returns to
de-energised state when the Vigi module is reset.
All the above auxiliary contacts are also available in "low-level" versions capable of
xxxxxx
switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).
Rotary-handle position contact for early-make or early-break functions
b CAM (early-make or early-break function) contacts indicate the position of the
rotary handle.
They are used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break)
or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (early make).
CE/CD carriage switches.

Chassis-position contacts
b CE/CD (connected/disconnected) contacts are microswitch-type carriage
switches for withdrawable circuit breakers.
Installation
b OF, SD, SDE and SDV functions: a single type of contact provides all these
different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The
contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker (or the Vigi module
for the SDV function).
The SDE function on a Compact NSX100 - 250 A equipped with a magnetic, thermal-
magnetic or Micrologic 2 trip unit requires the SDE actuator.
b CAM function: the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended).
b CE/CD function: the contacts clip into the fixed part of the chassis.
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Contacts Standard Low level
Types of contacts All OF, SD, SDE, SDV
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V DC 1 mA at 4 V DC
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V AC/DC 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V AC/DC 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V AC/DC 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V AC 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V DC - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V AC 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V AC 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V AC 6 0.1 - - - - - -
A-80
SDx and SDTAM modules for Micrologic
SDx and SDTAM are relay modules with two static SDx module
outputs. They send different signals depending on the The SDx module remotes the trip or alarm conditions of Compact NSX circuit
type of fault. They may not be used together. breakers equipped with electronic protection.
The SD2 output, available on all Micrologic trip units, corresponds to the overload-
trip indication.
The SD4 output, available on Micrologic 5 / 6, is assigned to:
b overload pre-alarm (Micrologic 5)
PB103377-20
b ground-fault trip indication (Micrologic 6).

These two outputs automatically reset when the device is closed (turned ON).
For Micrologic 5 / 6, the SD2 and SD4 outputs can be reprogrammed to be assigned
to other types of tripping or alarm.
Output characteristics
It is possible to assign a function:
b latching with a time delay. Return to the initial state occurs at the end of the time
delay
b permanent latching. In this case, return to the initial state takes place via the
communication function.
Static outputs: 24 to 415 V AC / V DC; 80 mA max.
SDTAM module
The SDTAM module is specifically for the motor-protection Micrologic trip units
SDx relay module with its terminal block. 2.2 M, 2.3 M and 6.2 E-M, 6.3 E-M.
The SDTAM module, linked to the contactor controller, opens the contactor when an
overload or other motor fault occurs, thus avoiding opening of the circuit breaker.
PB103376-20
Micrologic 2 M
The SD4 output opens the contactor 400 ms before normal circuit-breaker opening
in the following cases:
b overload (long-time protection for the trip class)
b phase unbalance or phase loss.
The SD2 output serves to memorise contactor opening by SDTAM.
Micrologic 6 E-M
The SD4 output opens the contactor 400 ms before normal circuit-breaker opening
in the following cases:
b overload (long-time protection for the trip class)
b phase unbalance or phase loss
b locked rotor
b underload (undercurrent protection)
b long start.
The SD2 output serves to memorise contactor opening by SDTAM.
SDTAM relay module with its terminal block. Output characteristics
Output reset can be:
b manual by a pushbutton included in the wiring diagram
b automatic after an adjustable time delay (1 to 15 minutes) to take into account the
motor-cooling time.
Static outputs: 24 to 415 V AC / V DC; 80 mA max.
a (+) 24 to 415 V a (+) 24 to 415 V

DB115603
DB115604
PAL Ir
SDT Closing
or SDG Manual
SDT KAI
or output 1
or output 2 reset order KMI
SD3 SD2 SD4 SD3 SD2 SD4
SDx SDTAM
6 8 Opening
Q 4 10 order
Q 2 12
1 14
OFF 15 KAI
Auto reset (mn)
SD1 KMI
SD1
KMI
a (-) a (-)
SDx wiring diagram. SDTAM wiring diagram with contactor control.
A-81
and characteristics Motor mechanism
When equipped with a motor-mechanism module, Compact NSX circuit breakers

PB103372-30
feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation:
b all circuit-breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible,
including trip-unit settings and indications
b suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible
b double insulation of the front face.
A specific motor mechanism is required for operation via the communication
function. This communicating motor mechanism must be connected to the BSCM
module to receive the opening and closing orders. Operation is identical to that of a
standard motor mechanism.
Applications
Compact NSX250 with motor mechanism. b Local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution control.
b Normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to
ensure availability or optimise energy costs.
b Load shedding and reconnection.
b Synchrocoupling.
Operation
The type of operation is selected using the manual/auto mode selection switch (7).
A transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the switch.
Automatic
When the switch is in the "auto" position, the ON/OFF (I/O) buttons and the charging
lever on the mechanism are locked.
b Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained signals.
b Automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX), with
1 2 3
DB111335
standard wiring.
b Mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault.
Manual
When the switch is in the "manual" position, the ON/OFF (I/O) buttons may be used.
A microswitch linked to the manual position can remote the information.
0OFF discharged
b Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons I/O.
4 b Recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 8 times.
b Padlocking in OFF position.
Installation and connections

All installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities are
maintained.
OFF ON
Motor-mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to integrated
terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm.
Optional accessories
8 7 6 5 b Keylock for locking in OFF position.
b Operations counter for the Compact NSX400/630, indicating the number of ON/
1 Position indicator OFF cycles. Must be installed on the front of the motor-mechanism module.
(positive contact indication)
2 Spring status indicator (charged, discharged)
3 Manual spring-charging lever Characteristics
4 Keylock device (optional)
Locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks, Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied Response time (ms) opening < 600
5 I (ON) pushbutton closing < 80
6 O (OFF) pushbutton Operating frequency cycles/minute max. 4
7 Manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this Control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 110/130 - 250
switch can be indicated remotely. AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130 -
8 Operation counter (Compact NSX400/630) 220/240 - 380/440
Consumption (1) DC (W) opening y 500
closing y 500
AC (VA) opening y 500
closing y 500
(1) For NSX100 to NSX250, the inrush current is 2 In for 10 ms.
Electrical endurance
Circuit breaker + motor-
DB115690
50 mechanism module, in
40 thousands of operations
30 NSX100 (IEC 60947 2), at 440 V.
20 NSX160
15
10 NSX250
6 NSX400
4 NSX630
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 I/In
A-82
Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker. They serve primarily
044313
for remote, emergency-off commands.

It is advised to test the system every six months.
MN undervoltage release
The MN release opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value
below 35% of its rated voltage Un.
Undervoltage tripping, combined with an emergency-off button, provides fail-safe
tripping. The MN release is continuously supplied, i.e. if supply is interrupted:
b either voluntarily, by the emergency-off button,
MX or MN voltage release. b or accidentally, through loss of power or faulty wiring,
the release provokes opening of the circuit breaker.
Opening ensured Opening possible Opening conditions
DB115605
Circuit-breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard

0
0.35 0.7 1.1 Un IEC 60947-2.
b Automatic opening of the circuit breaker is ensured when the continuous voltage
Opening conditions of the MN release. supply to the release U y 0.35 x Un.
b If the supply voltage is between 0.35 and 0.7 Un, opening is possible, but not
guaranteed. Above 0.7 Un, opening does not take place.
DB115606
Closing ensured
Closing conditions
0 If there is no supply to the MN release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker,
0.85 1.1 Un
either manually or electrically. Closing is ensured when the voltage supply to the
Closing conditions of the MN release.
release U u 0.85 x Un. Below this threshold, closing is not guaranteed.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz: 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/240
PB103752-32
DB115607
Delayed 50 Hz: 380/415 60 Hz: 208/277

trip order V DC 12 - 24 - 30 - 48 - 60 - 125 -250
Operating threshold Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
10 12 Closing 0.85 Un
Time-delay Operating range 0.85 to 1.1 Un
unit
Consumption (VA or W) Pick-up: 30 - Hold: 5
3 6 Response time (ms) 50
Instantaneous
trip order
Time-delay unit for an MN release
D2 A time delay unit for the MN release eliminates the risk of nuisance tripping due to a
transient voltage dip lasting y 200 ms. For shorter micro-outages, a system of
capacitors provides temporary supply to the MN at U > 0.7 to ensure non tripping.
MN
The correspondence between MN releases and time-delay units is shown below.
Power supply Corresponding MN release
D1
Unit with fixed delay 200 ms
48 V AC 48 V DC
MN release with a time-delay Wiring diagram for 220 / 240 V AC 250 V DC
unit. emergency-off function with
MN + time-delay unit. Unit with adjustable delay y 200 ms
48 - 60 V AC/DC 48 V DC
100 - 130 V AC/DC 125 V DC
220 - 250 V AC/DC 250 V DC
MX shunt release
The MX release opens the circuit breaker via an impulse-type (u 20 ms) or
maintained order.
Opening possible Opening ensured
DB115608
Opening conditions
0 When the MX release is supplied, it automatically opens the circuit breaker. Opening
0.7 1.1 Un
is ensured for a voltage U u 0.7 x Un.
Opening conditions of the MX release. Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz: 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/240
50 Hz: 380/415 60 Hz: 208/277
V DC 12 - 24 - 30 - 48 - 60 - 125 -250
Operating range 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) Pick-up: 30
Response time (ms) 50
Circuit breaker control by MN or MX

When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset
before it can be reclosed.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary, is
not possible.
Note: circuit breaker opening using an MN or MX release must
be reserved for safety functions. This type of tripping increases Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm to integrated terminal blocks.
wear on the opening mechanism. Repeated use reduces the
mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker by 50 %.
A-83
and characteristics Rotary handles
There are two types of rotary handle: Direct rotary handle

b direct rotary handle
b extended rotary handle. Standard handle
There are two models: Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
b standard with a black handle The direct rotary handle maintains:
b red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control. b visibility of and access to trip-unit settings
b suitability for isolation
b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
b access to the "push to trip" button.
PB103585-40
Device locking
The rotary handle facilitates circuit-breaker locking.
b Padlocking:
v standard situation, in the OFF position, using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle diameter 5
to 8 mm, not supplied
v with a simple modification, in the ON and OFF positions. Locking in the ON
position does not prevent free circuit-breaker tripping if a fault occurs. In this case,
the handle remains the ON position after the circuit breaker tripping. Unlocking is
required to go to the tripped then the OFF position.
b Keylock (and padlock)
It is possible to install a Ronis or Profalux keylock (optional) on the base of the
handle to obtain the same functions as with a padlock.
Compact NSX with a rotary handle.
Early-make or early-break contacts (optional)
Early-make and/or early-break contacts may be used with the rotary handle. It is thus
PB103607-50
possible to:
b supply an MN undervoltage release before the circuit breaker closes
b open the contactor control circuit before the circuit breaker opens.
MCC switchboard control
Control of an MCC switchboard is achieved by adding a kit to the standard handle. In
addition to the standard functions, the kit offers the characteristics listed below.
Higher degree of protection IP
Degree of protection IP43, IK07.
The IP is increased by a built-in gasket.
Door locking depending on device position
b The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or in the tripped position.
For exceptional situations, door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool to
open the door when the circuit breaker is closed. This operation is not possible if the
Compact NSX with an MCC rotary handle. handle is locked by a padlock.
b Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open. This function can be
PB103608-50
deactivated.
Machine-tool control in compliance with CNOMO
Control of a machine-tool is achieved by adding a kit to the standard handle. In
addition to the standard functions, the kit offers the characteristics listed below.
Enhanced waterproofness and mechanical protection
b Degree of protection IP54, IK08.
b Compliance with CNOMO E03.81.501N.
Extended rotary handle

Degree of protection IP56, IK08.
The extended rotary handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at
the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front.
It maintains:
b visibility of and access to trip-unit settings
Compact NSX with a CNOMO machine-tool rotary handle. b suitability for isolation
b indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped.
PB103586-50
Mechanical door locking when device closed

A standard feature of the extended rotary handle is a locking function, built into the
shaft, that disables door opening when the circuit breaker is in the ON or tripped
positions.
Door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool to open the door without
opening the circuit breaker. This operation is not possible if the handle is locked by a
padlock.
Voluntary disabling of mechanical door locking
A modification to the handle, that can be carried out on site, completely disables door
locking, including when a padlock is installed on the handle. The modification is
reversible.
When a number of extended rotary handles are installed on a door, this disabling
function is the means to ensure door locking by a single device.
Compact NSX with an extended rotary handle installed at the
back of a switchboard, with the keylock option and key.
A-84
PB103618-56
Extended rotary handle (cont.)

Device and door padlocking
Padlocking locks the circuit-breaker handle and disables door opening:
b standard situation, in the OFF position, using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle diameter 5
to 8 mm, not supplied
b with a simple modification, in the ON and OFF positions. Locking in the ON
position does not prevent free circuit-breaker tripping if a fault occurs.
In this case, the handle remains in the ON position after the circuit breaker tripping.
Unlocking is required to go to the tripped then the OFF position.
If the door controls were modified to voluntarily disable door locking, padlocking
does not lock the door, but does disable handle operation of the device.
Device locking using a keylock inside the switchboard
It is possible to install a Ronis or Profalux keylock (optional) on the base of the rotary
handle to lock the device in the OFF position or in either the ON or OFF positions.
Accessory for device operation with the door open
When the device is equipped with an extended rotary handle, a control accessory
mounted on the shaft makes it possible to operate the device with the door open.
b The device can be padlocked in the OFF position.
b The accessory complies with UL508.
Early-make or early-break contacts (optional)
The extended rotary handle offers the same possibilities with early-make and/or
early-break contacts as the standard rotary handle.
Parts of the extended rotary handles
b A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws).
b An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally.
b An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance
between the back of circuit breaker and door is:
v 185600 mm for Compact NSX100 to 250
v 209600 mm for Compact NS400/630.
For withdrawable devices, the extended rotary handle is also available with a
telescopic shaft to compensate for device disconnection. In this case, the min/max
distances are:
v 248600 mm for Compact NSX100 to 250
v 272...600 mm for Compact NS400/630.
PB103588-68
Manual source-changeover systems

An additional accessory interlocks two devices with rotary handles to create a
source-changeover system. Closing of one device is possible only if the second is
open.
This function is compatible with direct or extended rotary handles.
Up to three padlocks can be used to lock in the OFF or ON position.
A-85
and characteristics Additional measurement and indication
modules
Voltage-presence indicator
PB103795-36
The indicator detects and indicates that circuit breaker terminals are supplied with
power.
Installation
b Mounted in the long or short terminal shields, via the knockouts.
Voltage-presence indicator. b May be positioned upstream or downstream of the circuit breaker.
b Not compatible with the motor-mechanism module.
Electrical characteristics
Operates on all networks with voltages ranging from 220 to 550 V AC.
This module enables direct connection of a measurement device such as an
ammeter or a power meter.
Installation
b The module is installed directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals.
PB103600-32
b Class II insulation between front and the power circuits.

b Connection to 6 integrated connectors for cables up to 2.5 mm.
b Current transformer with 5 A secondary winding.
b Class 3 for the following output-power consumptions:
Accuracy:
v 100 A rating: 1.6 VA
v 150 A rating: 3 VA
v 250 A rating: 5 VA
v 400/600 A rating: 8 VA.
Current-transformer module with voltage

measurement outputs
This module enables direct connection of a digital measurement device such as a
Power Meter PM700, PM800, etc. (not supplied).
Installation
Compact NSX with current-transformer module. b Class II insulation between front and the power circuits.
b Built-in connectors for cables from 1.5 to 2.5 mm.
b Rated operational voltage Ue: 530 V
b Frequencies of measured values: 50...60 Hz
b Three CTs with 5 A secondary windings for the rated primary current In :
v class 0.5 to 1 for rated power consumption values at the output:
- 125 A, 150 A and 250 A ratings: class 1 for 1.1 VA
- 400/600 A rating: class 0.5 for 2 VA
v Connection using a 2.5 mm2 cable up to 2.5 m long.
b Four voltage measurement outputs including protection with automatic reset.
v voltage measurement output impedance 3500 W 25 %, maximum current 1 mA
v The voltage measurement outputs are intended only for measurements (1 mA
max.) and may not be used to supply the display.
PB103601-32
Ammeter and Imax ammeter modules

Ammeter module
Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the current of each phase (selection of
phases by 3-position switch in front).
Imax ammeter module
Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the maximum current flowing in the
middle phase. The Imax value can be reset on the front.
Installation
b Identical for both types of ammeter module.
b The ammeter clips into the module in any of four 90 positions, i.e. it can be
installed of devices mounted both vertically and horizontally.
b Class II insulation between front and the power circuits.
b Ammeter module: accuracy class 4.5
b Imax ammeter module: accuracy 6 %
b Maximum currents are displayed only if they last u 15 minutes.
Compact NSX with ammeter module.
A-86
PB103602-32
This module detects and indicates an insulation drop on a load circuit (TN-S or TT
systems).
Operation is identical to that of a Vigi module, but without circuit-breaker tripping.
Indication by a red LED in front.
An auxiliary contact may be installed for remote insulation-drop indications.
When insulation drops below a minimum, user-set threshold, the LED goes on and
the auxiliary contact switches. The fault indication cannot be cancelled except by
pressing the manual reset button.
Installation
b Double insulation of the front face.
b Settings: 100 - 200 - 500 - 1000 mA
b Accuracy: -50 +0 %
b Time delay following insulation drop: 5 to 10 seconds
b AC-system voltage: 200 to 440 V AC.
Insulation monitoring module.
A-87
and characteristics Locks
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2. Padlocking
DB111364
DB111365
systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to
8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Certain locking systems require an additional
accessory.
Control device Function Means Required accessories

Toggle Lock in OFF position Padlock Removable device
Lock in OFF or ON Padlock Fixed device
position
Direct rotary Standard Lock in Padlock -
Toggle locking using padlocks and an accessory: handle b OFF position Keylock Locking device + keylock
Removable device Fixed device attached to the b OFF or ON position (1)
case.
MCC Lock in Padlock -
b OFF position
DB111363
b OFF or ON position (1)
CNOMO Lock in Padlock -

b OFF position
Extended rotary handle Lock in Padlock -

b OFF position
with door opening
prevented (2)
Lock in OFF position Padlock UL508 control accessory
Rotary-handle locking using b OFF or ON position (1) Keylock Locking device + keylock
a keylock. inside the switchboard
Motor Lock in OFF position Padlock -
mechanism remote operation Keylock Locking device + keylock
disabled
Withdrawable circuit Lock in Padlock -

breaker b disconnected position
Keylock Locking device + keylock
b connected position Keylock Locking device + keylock
(1) Following a simple modification of the mechanism.
(2) Unless door locking has been voluntarily disabled.
DB111358
DB111359
Rotary-handle locking using a padlock or a keylock.

DB111360
5...8
u auto
man
Motor-mechanism locking using a padlock or a keylock.

DB111362
DB111361
Chassis locking in the connected position.
A-88
Sealing accessories
Outgoing-circuit identification
DB115224
Compact NSX100 to 630 can be equipped with label holders supplied in sets of ten
(cat. no. LV429226).
They are compatible with escutcheons.
Identification accessories. Sealing accessories

Sealing accessories are available. Each bag of accessories contains all the parts
DB115033
required for the types of sealing indicated below.

A bag contains:
b 6 sealing accessories
b 6 lead seals
b 0.5 m of wire
b 2 screws.
Sealing accessories.
Types of seals and corresponding functions

DB112300
DB112301
DB112303
Toggle control
DB112302
DB112306
DB112308
Rotary handle
DB112304
DB112305
DB112309
DB112307
Motor mechanism
5...8
5...8
u auto
man
u auto
man
5...8
uto
Types of seals Front-cover fixing screw Trip-unit transparent cover Motor-mechanism Terminal-shield fixing
transparent cover screw
Protected operations b front removal b modification of settings b access to manual/auto b access to power
b access to auxiliaries b access to test connector. mode selection switch: connections (protection
b trip-unit removal. depending on its position, against direct contact).
manual (1) or automatic
operation is not possible.
(1) In this case, local
operation is not possible.
DB112310
DB112311
Access to Vigi-module
settings
Types of seals Vigi-module fixing device Protection cover for

settings
Protected operations b removal of the Vigi
module. b modification of settings.
A-89
and characteristics Individual enclosures
Individual enclosures are available for Compact/Vigicompact NSX devices with two,
PB103593-40
three or four poles.

All fixed, front connections are possible, except right-angle, 45, double-L and
edgewise terminal extensions.
All spreaders may be installed in the enclosures intended for Compact/Vigicompact
NSX250 to 630 devices, except the 70 mm spreaders for NSX400/630.
Two models of enclosures

b IP55 heavy-duty metal individual enclosure, with:
v metal enclosure
v door with keylock and cut-out for rotary handle
v extended rotary handle, IP56, IK08, black or red/yellow
v device mounting plate
v removable plate (without holes) for cable entry through bottom.
b IP55 heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure, with:
v polyester insulating enclosure
v transparent cover, screwed, lead sealable, with cut-out for extended rotary handle
v extended rotary handle, IP56, IK08, black or red/yellow
v device mounting plate
v 2 removable plates (without holes) for cable entry through bottom and/or top.
IP55 heavy-duty metal enclosure.

Dimensions (H x W x D in mm)
b Metal enclosures:
PB103592-40
v Compact NSX100/160 450 x 350 x 250

v Compact NSX250 and Vigicompact NSX100 to 250 650 x 350 x 250
v Compact NSX400 650 x 350 x 250
v Compact NSX630 and Vigicompact NSX400/630 850 x 350 x 250
b Insulating enclosures:
v Compact NSX100/160 360 x 270 x 235
v Compact NSX250 and Vigicompact NSX100/160 540 x 270 x 235
v Compact NSX400/630 720 x 360 x 235
v Vigicompact NSX250/630 720 x 360 x 235
DB115609
IP55 heavy-duty insulating enclosure.
D W
A-90
Escutcheons and protection collars
Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the IP30 or IP40 escutcheons for fixed devices
switchboard door. They increase the degree of
protection to IP40, IK07. Protection collars maintain the IP30
degree of protection, whatever the position of the The three types are glued to the cut-out in the front door of the switchboard:
device (connected, disconnected). b escutcheon for all control types (toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism)
v without access to the trip unit
v with access to the trip unit
b for Vigi modules, can be combined with the above.
PB103590-43
IP40
The four types, with a gasket, are screwed to the door cut-out:
b three escutcheons identical to the previous, but IP40
b a wide model for Vigi and ammeter modules that can be combined with the above.
DB112291
DB112290
Escutcheon for toggle without and with access to the trip unit.
IP30 escutcheon.
PB103606-50
DB112292
DB112293
160
A 120
80
40
0
160/5A
Escutcheon for Vigi module. Wide escutcheon for ammeter.
IP30 escutcheon with access to the trip unit.
A-91
and characteristics Escutcheons and protection collars
IP40 escutcheons for withdrawable devices

IP40 for withdrawable devices
The two types, with a gasket, are screwed to the door cut-out:
b for rotary handle or motor mechanism: standard IP40 escutcheon
b for toggle with extension: standard escutcheon + collar for withdrawal.
PB101777-36
DB112294
DB112295
DB112296
5...8
5
5...8
...8
Escutcheon with collar for toggle.

PB103780-36
Standard escutcheon with Standard escutcheon for Standard escutcheon with

rotary handle. motor mechanism. collar for withdrawal, for
toggle.
IP40 for Vigi module on withdrawable devices

The two types, with a gasket, are screwed to the door cut-out:
b for rotary handle or motor mechanism: standard IP40 escutcheon
b for toggle: standard escutcheon + collar for withdrawal.
Escutcheon for Vigi module.

DB112297
DB112298
DB112299
5...8
Escutcheon for Vigi module, with escutcheons for the three types of control.
PB103775-40
IP43 toggle cover

Available only for devices with toggles. Fits over toggle and front cover of the device.
b Mounted on the front of the circuit breaker.
DB112218
Toggle cover.
PB103820-35
Toggle cover.
Retrofit front covers

These replacement front covers make it possible to install NSX devices in existing
switchboards containing NS devices by installing the NS-type retrofit covers on the
NSX devices.
b NS100 to 250 cover.
b NS400/630 cover.
NS retrofit front cover.
A-92
A-93
Operating safety
Compact NSX Installation recommendations
Contents
Functions and characteristics A-1
Operating conditions
Operating conditions B-2
Installation in switchboards
Power supply and weights B-3
Safety clearances and minimum distances B-4
Installation example B-5
Control wiring
Control wiring B-6
Temperature derating
Compact NSX100 to 250 equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units B-8
Compact NSX equipped with electronic trip units B-9
Power loss/ Resistance

Compact NSX equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units B-10
Compact NSX equipped with electronic trip units B-11
Dimensions and connection C-1

Wiring diagrams D-1
Glossary G-1
B-1
Installation Operating conditions
recommendations
(m) Altitude derating

DB111389
2000
Altitude does not significantly affect the characteristics of Compact NSX circuit
breakers up to 2000 m. Above this altitude, it is necessary to take into account the
decrease in the dielectric strength and cooling capacity of air.
The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 2000
metres.
The breaking capacities remain unchanged.
Compact NSX100 to 630
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Dielectric withstand voltage (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800
Insulation voltage (V) Ui 800 700 600 500
Maximum operational voltage (V) Ue 690 590 520 460
Average thermal current (A) at 40 C In x 1 0.96 0.93 0.9
Vibrations
DB111390
Compact NSX devices resist electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations.

Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 60068-2-6 for the levels
required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd's, etc.):
b 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude 1 mm
b 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to
mechanical parts.
Degree of protection
DB111391
Compact NSX circuit breakers have been tested for degree of protection (IP)
mechanical impact protection (IK). See page A-5.
Electromagnetic disturbances
Compact NSX devices are protected against:
b overvoltages caused by circuit switching
b overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system)
b devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
b electrostatic discharges produced directly by users.
Compact NSX devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility
tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards. See page A-5.
These tests ensure that:
b no nuisance tripping occurs
b tripping times are respected.
B-2
Installation in switchboards
Power supply and weights
Power supply from the top or bottom

DB111383
Compact NSX circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or the bottom,
even when equipped with a Vigi earth-leakage protection module, without any
reduction in performance. This capability facilitates connection when installed in a
switchboard.
All connection and insulation accessories can be used on circuit breakers supplied
either from the top or bottom.
Weight
The table below presents the weights (in kg) of the circuit breakers and the main
accessories, which must be summed to obtain the total weight of complete
configurations. The values are valid for all performance categories.
Type of device Circuit breakers Base Chassis Vigi module Visu module Motor mech.
NSX100 3P/2D 1.79 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
3P/3D 2.05 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.4 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NSX160 3P/2D 1.85 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
3P/3D 2.2 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NSX250 3P/2D 1.94 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
3P/3D 2.4 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NSX400/630 3P/3D 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8 4.6 2.8
4P/4D 8.13 2.8 2.2 3 4.9 2.8
B-3
Installation Installation in switchboards
recommendations Safety clearances and minimum
distances
General rules
When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be
maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection devices
installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity,
are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2.
If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:
b use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connections
b segregate the busbars using insulating screens.
For Compact NSX100 to 630 devices, terminal shields and interphase barriers are
recommended and may be mandatory depending on the operating voltage of the
device and type of installation (fixed, withdrawable, etc.).
Power connections
The table below indicates the rules to be respected for Compact NSX100 to 630
devices to ensure insulation of live parts for the various types of connection.
b fixed devices with front connection (FC) or rear connection (RC)
b plug-in or withdrawable devices.
Connection accessories such as crimp lugs, bare-cable connectors, terminal
extensions (straight, right-angle, double-L and 45) and spreaders are supplied with
interphase barriers.
Long terminal shields provide a degree of protection of IP40 (ingress) and IK07
(mechanical impact).
Compact NSX100 to 630: rules to be respected to ensure insulation of live parts

Type of connection Fixed, front connection Fixed, rear Plug-in or withdrawable
connection
On backplate Through panel
DB115055
DB115056
DB115057
DB115058
Possible, recommended or mandatory accessories: No insulating Interphase Long terminal Short terminal Short terminal Short terminal
accessory barriers shields shields shields shields
DB115059
DB115060
DB115061
DB115061
DB115061
With:
operating voltage type of conductor

y 500 V Insulated bars
Possible Possible Possible Recommended Recommended Mandatory
Extension terminals
Possible
Cables + crimp lugs Mandatory
No (instead of ph. Recommended Recommended Mandatory
(supplied)
barriers)
Bare cables + Possible for Possible for Possible for
connectors NSX100 to 250 NSX100 to 250 NSX100 to 250
Possible Recommended Recommended Mandatory
Mandatory
No (instead of ph.
(supplied)
barriers)
> 500 V Insulated bars
No No Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory
Extension terminals
Cables + crimp lugs
Bare cables +
connectors
B-4
Installation example
Safety clearance
Minimum distance between two Minimum distance between circuit
adjacent circuit breakers breaker and front or rear panels
Front F
DB115046
DB115697
panel
A1
B=0 F
Bare or painted sheetmetal Note: if F < 8 mm: an insulating screen or long
terminal shield is mandatory (see page A-73).
Minimum distance between circuit breaker and top, bottom or side panels
DB115048
DB115049
DB115050
D1 D1 D1
D2 C1
Devices without accessories. Devices with interphase barriers or long terminal shields.
Minimum safety clearances for Compact NSX100 to 630

Operating voltage Clearance (mm)
Between Between device and sheetmetal
devices Painted sheet metal Bare sheet metal
A1 C1 D1 D2 C1 D1 D2
U y 440 V
for devices equipped with:
b no accessories 0 0 30 30 5 40 40
b interphase barriers 0 0 0 0 5 0 0
b long terminal shields 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
440 V < U y 600 V
b interphase barriers (1) 0 0 0 0 20 10 10
b long terminal shields (2) 0 0 0 0 10 10 10
U > 600 V
Spacing y 60 mm Spacing > 60 mm
DB115698
b long terminal shields 0 10 50 50 20 100 100

Bars (1) Only for NSX100 to 250.
(2) For all cases.
F1 F1
Clearances with respect to live bare busbars
Minimum clearances for Compact NSX100 to 630
Operating voltage Clearances with respect to live bare busbars
spacing y 60 mm spacing > 60 mm
F1 F2 F1 F2
U < 440 V 350 350 80 80
F2 F2 440 V y U y 600 V 350 350 120 120
U > 600 V prohibited: insulating screen required between device and busbars
Bars These clearances can be reduced for special installations as long as the configuration is checked
Live busbars. by tests.
B-5
Installation Control wiring
recommendations
N L1 L2 L3 3P+N Remote tripping by MN or MX release

DB115699
Power consumption is approximately:

b 30 VA for pick-up of the MN and MX releases
Wire b 300 VA to 500 VA for the motor mechanism.
ready for The table below indicates the maximum permissible cable length for different supply
connection
I
voltages and cable cross-sectional areas.
Recommended maximum cable lengths (in metres)
U
Power supply voltage (V DC) 12 V 24 V 48 V
ENVT Cable cross-section (mm) 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5
External wire
MN U source 100 % 15 160 640
U source 85 % 7 40 160
External neutral voltage tap (ENVT).
MX U source 100 % 60 240 960
U source 85 % 30 120 480
Motor mechanism U source 100 % 10 16 65 110
U source 85 % 2 4 17 28
Note: the indicated length is that of each of the two wires.
N L1 L2 L3 3P+N: supply from the top

DB118542
T2 External neutral voltage tap (ENVT)

This connection is required for accurate power measurements on 3-pole circuit
T1 breakers equipped with Micrologic 5 / 6 E trip units in installations with a distributed
neutral. It can be used to measure phase-neutral voltages and calculate power using
the 3 wattmeter method.
I Compact NSX 3-pole circuit breakers come with a wire installed on the device for the
connection to the ENVT.
U
This wire is equipped with a connector for connection to an external wire with the
H2 T1 following characteristics:
ENCT
H1 T2 b cross-sectional area of 1 mm to 2.5 mm
b maximum length of 10 metres.
N L1 L2 L3 3P+N: supply from the bottom External neutral current transformer (ENCT)
DB118543
T2
This connection is required to protect the neutral on 3-pole circuit breakers equipped
T1 with Micrologic 5 / 6 A or E trip units in installations with a distributed neutral. For
Micrologic 6 A or E, it is required for type G ground-fault protection.
The ENCT is connected in the same way for fixed, plug-in or withdrawable devices:
b fixed devices are connected via terminals T1 and T2 of the internal terminal block.
I b plug-in and withdrawable devices are not connected via the auxiliary terminals.
U The wires must be connected/disconnected inside the device via terminals T1 and
H2 T1
T2.
ENCT The ENCT must be connected to the Micrologic trip unit by a shielded twisted pair.
H1 T2 The shielding should be connected to the switchboard earth only at the CT end, no
more than 30 cm from the CT.
External neutral current transformer (ENCT). b the power connections of the CT to the neutral (H2 and H1) must be made in the
same way for power supply from the top or the bottom (see figure). Make sure they
are not reversed for devices with power supply from the bottom.
b cross-sectional area of 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm
b maximum length of 10 metres.
Modbus
DB115702
24 V DC ULP connection system between Micrologic,

FDM 121 switchboard display and Modbus interface
The ULP (Universal Logic Plug) wiring system used by Compact NSX for
1 connections through to the Modbus network requires neither tools nor settings.
2 The prefabricated cords are sued for both data transfer and distribution of 24 V DC
power. Connectors on each component are identified by ULP (Universal Logic Plug)
symbols, ensuring total compatibility between each component.
1 RJ45
2 Line terminator Available cords
3 ULP symbol All connections are made with prefabricated cords:
b NSX cord for connection of the internal terminal block to the Modbus interface or
the FDM 121 display via an RJ45 connector. The cord is available in three lengths,
0.35 m, 1.3 m and 3 m
3 b ULP cords with RJ45 connectors at each end for the other connections between
ULP wiring components. The cord is available in six lengths, 0.3 m, 0.6 m, 1 m, 2 m, 3 m and
5 m. For greater distances, two cords can be interconnected using the RJ45 female/
ULP connection system.
female accessory.
Maximum length of 10 m between 2 modules and 30 m in all.
A line terminator must be fitted to all components with an unused RJ45 connector.
B-6
24 V DC power-supply module
DB115703
24 V DC 24 V DC
Use
An external 24 V DC power supply is required for installations with communication,
Battery
whatever the type of trip unit.
On installations without communication, it is available as an option for Micrologic 5/6
to:
b modify settings when the circuit breaker is open (OFF position)
b display measurements when the current flowing through the circuit breaker is low
b maintain the display of the cause of tripping.
Characteristics
Power supply, without the Communication function, via the The external 24 V DC supply may be used for the entire switchboard.
terminal block with a backup battery. The required characteristics are indicated in the table below.
Characteristics
Output voltage 24 V DC -20 % to +10 %
24 V DC
DB115704
Ripple 1 %
Modbus Overvoltage category (OVC) OVC IV - as per IEC 60947-1
Sizing
Sizing must take into account all supplied modules.
Module Consumption (mA)
Micrologic 5 / 6 40
BSCM module 10
FDM 121 40
Modbus communication interface 60
NSX cord U > 480 V AC 30
SDx / SDTAM module 20
Downstream ULP wiring
for 24 V DC supply
Wiring
Supply, with the Communication function, via the Modbus
interface. Micrologic 5 or 6 not using the Communication function
The external 24 V DC supply is connected via the circuit breaker terminal block.
Use of a 24 V DC battery provides backup power for approximate 3 hours (100 mA)
Modbus Network
DB115705
in the event of an interruption in the external supply.

24 V DC 24 V DC Micrologic 5 or 6 using the Communication function
The external 24 V DC supply is connected via the Modbus interface using a five-pin
Battery connector, including two for the power supply. Stacking accessories (see page A-27)
Masterpact NW can be used to supply a number of interfaces by fast clip-on connection.
The 24 V DC power is distributed downstream by the ULP (Universal Logic Plug)
Masterpact NT communication cords with RJ45 connectors. This system ensures both data transfer
and power distribution to the connected modules.
Recommendations for 24 V DC wiring
b Do not connect the positive terminal to earth.
b Do not connect the negative terminal to earth.
b The maximum length for each conductor (+/-) is ten metres.
b For connection distances greater than ten metres, the plus and minus conductors
of the 24 V DC supply must be twisted to improve EMC.
b The 24 V DC conductors must cross the power cables perpendicularly. If this is
Modbus difficult or impossible, the plus and minus conductors must be twisted.
Wires
4
ON
junction block
Termination
Modbus
OFF
Wires
2
5/OUT 0/IN
4
Each Compact NSX circuit breaker equipped with Micrologic 5/6 and an FDM 121
Modbus interface
display is connected to the Modbus network via the Modbus interface module.
module Connection of all the circuit breakers and other Modbus devices in the switchboard
to a Modbus bus is made much easier by using a Modbus RJ45 junction block
installed in the switchboard.
FDM121
Recommendations for Modbus wiring
b The shielding may be earthed.
b The conductors must be twisted to improve immunity (EMC).
b The Modbus conductors must cross the power cables perpendicularly.
PM800 Compact NSX
B-7
Installation Temperature derating
recommendations Compact NSX100 to 250 equipped with
thermal-magnetic trip units
When thermal-magnetic trip units are used at ambient The overload protection is calibrated at 40 C in the lab. This means that when the
temperatures other than 40 C, the Ir pick-up is ambient temperature is less or greater than 40 C, the Ir protection pick-up is slightly
modified. modified.
To obtain the tripping time for a given temperature:
b see the tripping curves for 40 C (see pages E-2 and E-3)
b determine tripping times corresponding to the Ir value (thermal setting on the
device), corrected for the ambient temperature as indicated in the tables below.
(A)
DB115053
Settings of Compact NSX100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and

110
TM-G trip units, as a function of the temperature
The table indicates the real Ir (A) value for a given rating and temperature.
100
Rat. Temperature (C)
(A) 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
16 18.4 18.7 18 18 17 16.6 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
90
25 28.8 28 27.5 27 26.3 25.6 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
32 36.8 36 35.2 34.4 33.6 32.8 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
80
40 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
50 57.5 56 55 54 52.5 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 (C) 63 72 71 69 68 66 65 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
Temperature derating curve for Compact NSX100. 80 92 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76 74 72 70 68

100 115 113 110 108 105 103 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
125 144 141 138 134 131 128 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
160 184 180 176 172 168 164 160 156 152 148 144 140 136
200 230 225 220 215 210 205 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
250 288 281 277 269 263 256 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
Example 1. What is the tripping time of a Compact NSX100 equipped with a

10 000
TM100D trip unit set to 100 A, for an overload I = 500 A?
DB118568
5 000
The overload I/Ir is calculated as a function of the temperature. Use the above values
2 000
1 000
and the curve on page E-3 (shown on the left) to determine the corresponding time.
500
b At 40 C, Ir = 100 A, I/Ir = 5 and the tripping time is between 6 and 60 seconds.
b At 20 C, Ir = 110 A, I/Ir = 4.54 and the tripping time is between 8 and 80 seconds.
200
100
b At 60 C, Ir = 90 A, I/Ir = 5.55 and the tripping time is between 5 and 50 seconds.
50
Example 2. What is the setting to obtain a real Ir of 210 A, taking into account the
20
temperature, for a Compact NSX250 equipped with a TM250D trip unit?
10
5
The necessary dial setting, in amperes, is shown below.
t(s) b At 40 C, Ir = (210/250) x 250 A = 210 A
2
b At 20 C, Ir = (210/277) x 250 A = 189.5 A
1
.5
b At 60 C, Ir = (210/225) x 250 A = 233 A
TMD80/100
.2 Additional derating coefficient for an add-on module
.1
The values indicated in the previous tables are valid for fixed circuit breakers
.05
equipped with one of the following modules:
.02 b Vigi module
.01
Reflex tripping: b insulation monitoring module
.005
t < 10 ms b ammeter module
.002 b current-transformer module.
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 They also apply for plug-in or withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with:
I / Ir b ammeter module
b current-transformer module.
However, for plug-in or withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with a Vigi module
or an insulation monitoring module, the coefficient 0.84 must be applied.
Example 1. Fault I = 500 A The table below sums up the situation for add-on modules.
I/Ir 4.5 5 5.5
Type of Circuit breaker TM-D trip- Vigi or Ammeter or
TC 20 C 40 C 60 C device unit rating insulation current
t min. 8s 6s 5s monitoring transformer
t max. 80 s 60 s 50 s module module
Fixed NSX100 to 250 16 to 100
Thermal-protection curve with minimum and maximum
NSX160 to 250 125
values.
NSX160 to 250 160
1
NSX250 200 to 250
1
Plug-in or NSX100 to 250 16 to 100
withdrawable NSX160 to 250 125
NSX160 to 250 160
0.84
NSX250 250
B-8
Compact NSX equipped with electronic
trip units
Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in Changes in temperature do not affect measurements by electronic trip units.
temperature. If the trip units are used in high- b The built-in CT sensors with Rogowski toroids measure the current.
temperature environments, the Micrologic setting must b The control electronics compare the value of the current to the settings defined
nevertheless take into account the temperature limits for 40 C.
of the circuit breaker. Because temperature has no effect on the toroid measurements, the tripping
thresholds do not need to be modified.
However, the temperature rise caused by the flow of current and the ambient
temperature increase the temperature of the device. To avoid reaching the thermal
withstand level of the equipment, it is necessary to limit the current flowing through
the device, i.e. the maximum Ir setting as a function of the temperature.
Compact NSX100/160/250
The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting Ir (A)
depending on the ambient temperature.
Type of Rating (A) Temperature (C)
device 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NSX100/160
Fixed, plug-in or 40 no derating
withdr. 100 no derating
NSX250
Fixed, plug-in or 100 no derating
withdrawable 160 no derating
Fixed 250 250 250 250 245 237 230 225
Plug-in or withdr. 250 250 245 237 230 225 220 215
Compact NSX400 and 630

The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting Ir (A)
depending on the ambient temperature.
Type of Rating (A) Temperature (C)
device 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NSX400
Fixed 400 400 400 400 390 380 370 360
Plug-in/withdr. 400 400 390 380 370 360 350 340
NSX630
Fixed 630 630 615 600 585 570 550 535
Plug-in/withdr. 630 570 550 535 520 505 490 475
Example. A fixed Compact NSX400 equipped with a Micrologic can have a maximum Ir setting
of:
b 400 A up to 50 C
b 380 A up to 60 C.
Additional derating coefficient for an add-on module

For fixed or plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers, the addition of a:
b Vigi module
b insulation-monitoring module
b ammeter module
b current-transformer module
can modify the derating values. Apply the coefficients shown below.
Derating of a Compact NSX equipped with a Micrologic trip unit
Type of Circuit TM-D trip-unit Vigi / Ammeter module

device breaker rating Insulation /
monitoring External sensor
module (CT)
Fixed NSX100 to 250 40 to 100
NSX160 to 250 125
NSX250 250 1
Plug-in or NSX100 to 250 40 to 100
withdrawable NSX160 to 250 160
1
NSX250 250 0.86
Fixed NSX400 250 to 400 0.97
NSX630 250 to 630 0.90
Plug-in or NSX400 250 to 400 0.97
withdrawable NSX630 250 to 630 0.90
Note: to provide the Visu function, Compact NSX circuit breakers, with or without a Vigi module,
are combined with INV switch-disconnectors. Tripping values for the selected combination are
indicated in the Interpact catalogue.
B-9
Installation Power loss/ Resistance
recommendations Compact NSX equipped with thermal-
magnetic trip units
Compact NSX thermal power loss values are used to The values indicated in the tables below are typical values for a device at full rated
calculate total temperature rise in the switchboard in load and 50/60 Hz.
which the circuit breakers are installed. Power loss per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W)
The value indicated is the power loss at IN, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-pole
circuit breaker. Measurement and calculation of power loss are carried out in
compliance with the recommendations of Annex G of standard IEC 60947-2.
Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mW)
N L1 L2 L3
DB115052
The value of the resistance per pole is provided as a general indication for a new
device.
The value of the contact resistance must be determined on the basis of the
measured voltage drop, in accordance with the manufacturer's test procedure (ABT
instruction document no. 1 - BEE - 02.2 -A).
Note: this measurement is not sufficient to determine the quality of the contacts, i.e. the capacity
of the circuit breaker to carry its rated current.
Additional power loss
With a Vigi module, the deviation of the N and L3 bars required Additional power loss is equal to the sum of the power dissipated by the following:
to pass through the toroid results in higher power losses b Vigi module: note that the deviation of the N and L3 bars required to pass through
compared to those of the L1 and L2 bars. the toroid results in higher power losses compared to those of the L1 and L2 bars
(diagram opposite). When calculating total power loss, use L1, L2, L3 for a 3P device
and N, L1, L2, L3 for a 4P device
b disconnecting contacts (plug-in and withdrawable devices)
b ammeter module
b transformer module.
Calculation of total power loss
Total power loss at full rated load and 50/60 Hz is equal to the sum of the device and
additional power losses per pole multiplied by the number of poles (2, 3 or 4).
If a Vigi module is installed, it is necessary to differentiate between N and L3 on one
hand and L1 and L2 on the other.
Compact NSX100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip

units
Type of device Fixed device Additional power / pole
3/4 poles Rat. R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi Plug-in / Ammeter Transfo.
(A) (N, L3) (L1, L2) withdr. module module
NSX100 16 11.42 2.92 0 0 0 0 0
25 6.42 4.01 0 0 0.1 0 0
32 3.94 4.03 0.06 0.03 0.15 0.1 0.1
40 3.42 5.47 0.10 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
50 1.64 4.11 0.15 0.08 0.3 0.1 0.1
63 2.17 8.61 0.3 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.1
80 1.37 8.77 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.88 8.8 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NSX160 80 1.26 8.06 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.77 7.7 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
125 0.69 10.78 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3
160 0.55 13.95 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NSX250 125 0.61 9.45 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3
160 0.46 11.78 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
200 0.39 15.4 2.8 1.4 4 0.8 0.8
250 0.3 18.75 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
Compact NSX100 to 630 equipped with MA/1.3-M trip units

3 poles Rat. R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi Plug-in / Ammeter Transfo.
NSX100 2.5 148.42 0.93 0 0 0 0 0
6.3 99.02 3.93 0 0 0 0 0
12.5 4.05 0.63 0 0 0 0 0
25 1.66 1.04 0 0 0.1 0 0
50 0.67 1.66 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.1
100 0.52 5.2 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NSX160 150 0.38 8.55 1.35 0.68 2.6 0.45 0.45
NSX250 220 0.3 14.52 2.9 1.45 4.89 0.97 0.97
NSX400 320 0.12 12.29 3.2 1.6 6.14 1.54 1.54
NSX630 500 0.1 25 13.99 7 15 3.75 3.75
B-10
Compact NSX equipped with electronic
trip units
The values indicated in the table below are typical values for a device at full rated
load and 50/60 Hz. The definitions and information are the same as that for circuit
breakers equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units.
Compact NSX100 to 630 equipped with Micrologic trip units

3/4 poles Rat. R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi Plug-in / Ammeter Transfo.
NSX100 40 0.84 1.34 0.1 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
100 0.468 4.68 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NSX160 40 0.73 1.17 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.36 3.58 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
160 0.36 9.16 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NSX250 100 0.27 2.73 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.2 0.2
250 0.28 17.56 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
NSX400 400 0.12 19.2 3.2 1.6 9.6 2.4 2.4
NSX630 630 (1) 0.1 39.69 6.5 3.25 19.49 5.95 5.95
(1) The power loss values for the Vigi modules and withdrawable circuit breakers are given for
570 A.
B-11
Easy installation
Compact NSX Dimensions and connection
Contents

Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and mounting

Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C-2
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C-3
Compact NSX100 to 630 plug-in version C-4
Compact NSX100 to 630 withdrawable version C-6
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug-in and withdrawable versions C-8
Visu function for Compact NSX100 to 250 fixed version C-9
Visu function for Compact NSX400/630 fixed version C-10
Motor mechanism module for Compact NSX100 to 630 C-11
Direct rotary handle for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C-12
MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary handles
for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C-13
Extended rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to 630 C-14
Indication and measurement modules
One-piece spreader for Compact NSX100 to 250 fixed version C-16
FDM121 switchboard display C-17
Front-panel accessories
Compact NSX100 to 630 C-18
Front-panel cutouts
Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C-20
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C-22
Compact NSX100 to 630 plug-in and withdrawable versions C-24
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug-in and withdrawable versions C-25
Visu function for Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C-26
Motor mechanism module for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C-27
Direct rotary handle for Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C-28
MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary handles
Extended rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to 630 C-14
Indication and measurement modules for Compact NSX100 to 630 C-30
FDM121 switchboard display C-17
Power connections
Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed version C-32
Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug-in and withdrawable versions C-36
Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs to Compact
and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C-40
Connection of bare cables to Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 C-41
Wiring diagrams D-1

Glossary G-1
C-1
Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version
Dimensions 2/3P 4P
DB112061
DB112062
DB112063
DB112064
A4
A3
A A2
A1
X X X
A A2
A3
A4
C1 B B
C2 B1 B2
C3
Z Y Y
Interphase barriers. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 spreaders with 52.5 mm pitch:
Short terminal shields. B1 = 157.5 mm, B2 = 210 mm).
Mounting NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630 NSX100 to 630

On backplate 2/3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112065
DB111411
DB112066
DB112067
F2 F2 F2
F1 F1 F3
E4
X X X
E2
E1 E3
2 6 Y T(1) Y 4 6 Y 4 6
(1) The T holes are required for rear connection only.

For two-pole circuit breakers, the middle holes are not required.
On rails 2/3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F3
DB112068
DB111412
DB112069
DB112070
F2 F2 F2
X X X
E2
E1
2 6 Y Y 4 6 Y 4 6
On DIN rail with adapter plate (NSX100 to 250)
G4
DB112071
DB112072
G5
G3 X
G2
G1
C-2
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed
version
Dimensions 3/4P 3/4P

DB112073
NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
DB112074
DB112075
DB112076
A4
A3
A A2
X X X
A6 A8
A5 A7 A9
C1 B
C2 B1 B
C3 B2 B1
Y B2
Z
Y

On backplate 3P 3P 4P
F1 F1
DB111420
DB112077
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112079
DB112078
F2 F2 F2
F1 F1 F3
X X X
E6 E1
E8
E5
E7
6 6 6 6
T(1) 3 6 Y Y
Y
On rails 3P 3P 4P
F1
DB111421
DB112080
DB112081
DB112082
F1 F3
F2 F2 F2
X X X
E6 E1
E5
Y 6 6 Y 6 6
Y 3 6
Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B B1 B2 C1 C2 C3 E1
NSX100/160/250 80.5 161 94 145 178.5 155.5 236 169 220 253.5 52.5 105 140 81 86 126 62.5
NSX400/630 127.5 255 142.5 200 237 227.5 355 242.5 300 337 70 140 185 95.5 110 168 100
Type E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 F1 F2 F3 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 T U
NSX100/160/250 125 70 140 137.5 200 145 215 35 17.5 70 95 75 13.5 23 17.5 24 y 32
NSX400/630 200 113.5 227 200 300 213.5 327 45 22.5 90 - - - - - 32 y 35
C-3
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 plug-in version
Dimensions 2/3P 4P
M
DB112641
DB112640
DB112642
DB112643
N
A11
A10
M A A2
A1
N X X X
A A2
A10
A11
B B
27 B1 B2
45
D1 C3
Z Y Y
Interphase barriers for base. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 spreaders with 52.5 mm pitch:
Short terminal shields on circuit breaker. B1 = 157.5 mm, B2 = 210 mm).
Adapter for base, required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers.
Mounting
Through front panel (N) 2/3P 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630 NSX100 to 630
F1 F1 F3
DB112649
DB115637
DB112650
DB112648
N F2 F2 F2
E10 E12 X X Y
X
E9 E11
F4 F4 F4 4 6
2 6 4 6
F5 F5 F6
Y Y Y
C-4
On backplate (M) 2/3P 4P
Front connection (an insulating screen is supplied with the base and must be fitted between the base and the backplate)
F1 F3
DB112655
DB112656
DB112654
F2 F2
E14 X X
E13
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Connection by exterior-mounted rear connectors

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112658
DB112659
DB112657
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14 E16 X
X
E13 E15
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
(1) The T1 holes are required for rear connection only (for
two-pole circuit breakers, the middle holes are not required).
Connection by interior-mounted rear connectors

F1 F1
DB112661
DB112662
F1 F1 F1
DB112660
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14
E18 X
X
E13 E17
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
On rails 2/3P 4P
F7 F8
DB112664
DB112665
DB112663
F9 F9
U
X X
E20
E19
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Type A A1 A2 A10 A11 B B1 B2 C3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15

NSX100/160/250 80.5 161 94 175 210 52.5 105 140 126 75 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 79
NSX400/630 127.5 255 142.5 244 281 70 140 185 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250 126
Type E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 T1 U
NSX100/160/250 158 61 122 37.5 75 35 17.5 70 54.5 109 144 70 105 35 24 y 32
NSX400/630 252 101 202 75 150 45 22.5 90 71.5 143 188 100 145 50 33 y 35
C-5
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 withdrawable
version
Dimensions 2/3P 4P
DB112644
M
DB112645
DB112646
DB112647
A10
M A12 A11
N
X X X
A13 A11
A10
B3 B3
27 B4 B6
45 B5 B7
Y Y
D1 C3
Z
DB112681
M
N
C3 32
Z
Interphase barriers for base. Long terminal shields.

Short terminal shields on circuit breaker. Adapter for base, required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers.
Mounting
Through front panel (N) 2/3P 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630 NSX100 to 630
F1 F1 F3
DB112652
DB115638
DB112653
DB112651
N
F2 F2 F2
E10 E12 X X X
3
E9 E11
F10 F10 4 6 F10 4 6

2 6
F11 F11 F12
Y Y Y
C-6
On backplate (M) 2/3P 4P
Front connection (an insulating screen is supplied with the base and must be fitted between the base and the backplate)
F1 F3
DB112655
DB112656
DB112682
F2 F2
E14 X X
E13
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Connection by exterior-mounted rear connectors

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112658
DB112659
DB112683
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14 E16 X
X
E13 E15
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
Connection by interior-mounted rear connectors

F1 F1
DB112661
DB112662
F1 F1 F1
DB112684
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14
E18 X
X
E13 E17
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
On rails 2/3P 4P
F7 F8
DB112664
DB112665
DB112685
F9 F9
U
X X
E20
E19
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Type A10 A11 A12 A13 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14
NSX100/160/250 175 210 106.5 103.5 92.5 185 216 220 251 126 75 95 190 87 174 77.5 155
NSX400/630 244 281 140 140 110 220 250 265 295 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250
Type E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 T1 U
NSX100/160/250 79 158 61 122 37.5 75 35 17.5 70 70 105 35 74 148 183 24 y 32
NSX400/630 126 252 101 202 75 150 45 22.5 90 100 145 50 91.5 183 228 33 y 35
C-7
connection Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug-in and
withdrawable versions
Dimensions - plug-in version NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

3/4P 3/4P
M
DB112667
DB112666
DB112668
DB112669
N
A11
A10
M
A2
A
N
X X X
A6
A10 A5 A7
A11
27 B
45 B1 B
D1 C3 B2 B1
Z Y B2
Y
Interphase barriers for base. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 spreaders with 52.5 mm pitch:
Short terminal shields on circuit breaker. B1 = 157.5 mm, B2 = 210 mm).
Adapter for base, required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers.
Dimensions - withdrawable version NSX100 to 630

3P 4P
M
DB112670
DB112672
DB112673
DB112671
M
N N
X X X
27 B3 B3
45 B4 B6
D1 C3 32 B5 B7
Z Y Y
Mounting
Through front panel (N)
See Compact NSX100 to 630 plug-in version, page C-4, or withdrawable version, page C-6
On backplate (M)
On rails
Type A A2 A5 A6 A7 A10 A11 B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C3 D1

NSX100/160/250 80.5 94 155.5 236 169 175 210 52.5 105 140 92.5 185 216 220 251 126 75
NSX400/630 127.5 142.5 227.5 355 242.5 244 281 70 140 185 110 220 250 265 295 168 100
C-8
Visu function for Compact NSX100 to
250 fixed version
Dimensions - combination with Interpact INV100 to 250 3P 4P
138
DB112675
DB112674
DB112676
DB112677
131
96
86 140 140
35 35 35 35 35 35
284.5 X X X
233.5 331.5 215

215
314
X X X
80.5 94
145
178.5
52.5 52.5
Z 105 140
Y Y
Interphase barriers.
Short terminal shields.
Long terminal shields.
Mounting 3P 4P
On rails or backplate
70 70
DB112679
DB112680
DB112678
7 6 35 9 6 35
17.5 17.5
U U
100 X 100 X
50 50
22.3 22.3
157.5 157.5
125 X 125 X
62.5 62.5
Y Y
U y 32
C-9
connection Visu function for Compact NSX400/630
fixed version
Dimensions - combination with Interpact INV400 to 630 3P 4P
162
DB112686
DB112687
DB112688
DB112689
160.4
130 185 185
120 45 45 45 45 45 45
477.5
X X X
492.5
422.5 241 241
365
X X X
127.5 142.5
200
237
70 70
140 185
Y Y
Y
Interphase barriers for base.

Mounting 3P 4P
On rails or backplate
90 90
DB112690
DB112691
DB112692
9 6 45 9 6 45
22.5 22.5
U U
X X
150 150
75 75
33 33
241 241
200 200
X X
100 100
Y Y
U y 35
C-10
Motor mechanism module for Compact
NSX100 to 630
Dimensions 3P 4P
Fixed circuit breaker
DB112693
DB112694
DB112695
DB112696
A17
A15 X X X
A14 A16
5...8
C4 B8 B8
C5/C6 B9 B9
B B
B1 B2
Z Y Y
C5: without keylock

C6: with keylock
Plug-in circuit breaker
M M
DB112697
DB112698
N N
5...8
27
45
D1 C5
Withdrawable circuit breaker
M M
DB112699
DB112700
N N
X
5...8
27
45
D1 C5 32
Z
Type A14 A15 A16 A17 B B1 B2 B8 B9 C4 C5 C6 D1

NSX100/160/250 27.5 73 34.5 62.5 52.5 105 140 45.5 91 143 182 209.5 75
NSX400/630 40 123 52 100 70 140 185 61.5 123 215 256 258 100
C-11
connection Direct rotary handle for Compact and
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630
Dimensions 3P 4P
Fixed circuit breaker
B10
DB112701
DB112702
DB112703
DB112704
I
60
A15 X X X
A14 60
O
A18
B8 B8
B9 B9
C7
B B
C8/C9 B1 B2
Z Y Y
C8: without keylock
C9: with keylock
Plug-in circuit breaker
M M
DB112705
DB112706
N N
27
45
D1 C8
Z
M M
DB112707
DB112708
N N
27
45
D1 C8 32
Type A14 A15 A18 B B1 B2 B8 B9 B10 C7 C8 C9 D1

NSX100/160/250 27.5 73 9 52.5 105 140 45.5 91 9.25 121 155 164 75
NSX400/630 40 123 24.6 70 140 185 61.5 123 5 145 179 188 100
C-12
MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary
handles for Compact NSX100 to 630
fixed version
Dimensions
MCC type direct rotary handle
DB112712
DB112713
DB112714
A18
A20
5...
8 X X
A19
1...3 max.
P1 B10
B11
B12
Z
Y
CNOMO type direct rotary handle
DB112 715
DB112716
DB112717
N
LIN GERI
MER t NS
A18
compac
A22
5...
8
X X
A21
push
to
trip
1...3 max.
P2 B10
B13
B14
Z Y
Front-panel cutout NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

MCC type direct rotary handle
DB111413
DB111414
DB112712
100 145
5...
8
X X
41 51
50
75
100
145
Y
Y
CNOMO type direct rotary handle
DB112 715
DB111415
DB111416
N
LIN GERI
MER t NS
compac
150
119
8
5...
push
to
trip X X
50.5 50.4
Type A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 B10

NSX100/160/250 9 60 120 65 130 9.25
NSX400/630 24.6 83 160 82 164 5 68.75
80
119
Type B11 B12 B13 B14 P1 P2 150
Y
NSX100/160/250 69 120 65 130 125 135 Y
NSX400/630 85 160 82 164 149 158
C-13
connection Extended rotary handle for Compact
NSX100 to 630
Dimensions
Fixed and plug-in circuit breakers
M M
DB112709
DB112710
N N
10
X
Cutout for shaft (mm)

27 Type R1
45
D1 R1 47 NSX100/160/250 min. 171
max. 600
Z
NSX400/630 min. 195
max. 600
M
DB112711
M
DB111417
N N
27 Cutout for shaft (mm)

45
D1 R2 47 Type R2
NSX100/160/250 min. 248
Z max. 600
NSX400/630 min. 272
max. 600
Dimensions and front-panel cutout

DB111418
DB111419
60 45 50
A18 A18
75 X X
37.5
60 2 4.2
36
72
B10
B10
37.5
Y
75
Y
Type A18 B10 D1

NSX100/160/250 9 9.25 75
NSX400/630 24.6 5 100
C-14
Dimensions and mounting
Indication and measurement modules for
Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version
Dimensions
Circuit breaker with ammeter module Circuit breaker with current-transformer module
DB112718
DB112719
DB112720
DB112721
A4 A4
A3 A3
A A2 A A2
X X
A6 A8 A6 A8
A5 A7 A9 A5 A7 A9
160
A 120
80
40
0
A
160/5
C1 C1
C2 C2
Interphase barriers. C11
Short terminal shields. Z Z

On backplate 2/3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112078
DB112079
DB112722
DB111420
F2 F2 F2
F1 F1 F3
X X X
E6 E1
E8
E5
E7
T(1) 3 6 6 6 6 6
Y Y Y
On rails 2/3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F3
DB111421
DB112081
DB112082
DB112723
F2 F2 F2
X X X
E6 E1
E5
Y 3 6 Y 6 6 Y 6 6
Type A A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 C1 C2 C11 E1 E5 E6 E7 E8
NSX100/160/250 80.5 94 145 178.5 155.5 236 169 220 253.5 81 86 137 62.5 137.5 200 145 215
NSX400/630 127.5 142.5 200 237 227.5 355 242.5 300 337 95.5 110 162 100 200 300 213.5 327
Type F1 F2 F3 T U
NSX100/160/250 35 17.5 70 24 y 32
NSX400/630 45 22.5 90 32 y 35
C-15
connection One-piece spreader for Compact
NSX100 to 250 fixed version
Dimensions
Rear alignment Front alignment
185
DB111422
DB111423
DB111424
DB111425
99 140
98 110 70.5
201
255.5
130
80.5
X X X
Y
Z
Interphase barriers. 24
Long terminal shields. Z
Mounting
Rear alignment 2/3P 4P
45 90
DB114986
DB114987
DB114985
22.5 62.5
4 6 6 6
163 163
X X
125 125
62.5 62.5
17.5 17.5
35 70
Y Y
Front alignment 2/3P 4P
45 90
DB114989
DB114990
DB114988
22.5 62.5
7 6 8 6
25 163 25 163
X X
50 50
62.5 62.5
17.5 17.5
35 70
70 70
Y 105
Y
C-16
FDM121 switchboard display
Dimensions
DB114991
DB114992
96
X
96
Y
Mounting
Through panel
DB114993
DB114994
DB118545 + 0.8
92 0
X X
+ 0.8
10.6 92 0
30 23 Y
Z
On panel
DB114996
DB115270
DB115121
DB115122
2 22.5
16.5
99.3
X + X
- 0.5
32
19
+0.3
-
15 37 20 13 2 22.5
+
- 1.5
33
Z 17
99.3
Y
Connector (optional).
C-17
Dimensions and Front-panel accessories
connection Compact NSX100 to 630
IP30 front-panel escutcheons

For toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism module
DB114997
DB114998
DB114999
DB115000
X X
A
B 4
Y
For toggle or rotary handle with access to trip unit

DB115001
DB115002
DB115003
DB115004
X X
A1
B 4
Y
For Vigicompact
DB115005
DB115006
DB115007
DB115008
X X
64
65 4
Y
IP40 front-panel escutcheons

For toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism module and protection collar
DB115064
DB115010
DB115011
DB115012
X A3 X
A2
B1 3.5 6.5
Y
For Vigicompact with protection collar or ammeter module

DB115013
DB115014
DB115015
DB115016
93.5 X 80.5 X
157 3.5 6.5

Y
C-18
IP40 front-panel escutcheons (cont.)
For Vigicompact
DB115017
DB115018
DB115019
DB115020
79 X 64 X
69 3.5 6.5
Y
Protection collars for IP40 front-panel escutcheons

For toggle
DB115021
DB115022
DB115023
DB115024
X X
A4
B2 35
Y
For Vigicompact
DB115025
DB115026
DB115027
DB115028
X
52.5
91 35
Y Circuit breaker with toggle or
rotary handle.
DB115029
63
Circuit breaker with motor-
mechanism module.
IP43 toggle cover
DB115030
DB115031
DB115032
DB115120
X
A5
B3 C
Y
Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B3 C
NSX100/160/250 113 138 114 101 73 85 113 157 91 103 40
NSX400/630 163 215 164 151 122.5 138 163 189 122.5 138 60
C-19
Dimensions and Front-panel cutouts
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version
Bare sheet metal NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

For toggle
DB115035
DB115037
DB115038
DB115039
127
X 77 X X
29.5
42
P3 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
For toggle with access to trip unit

DB115040
DB115041
DB115042
DB115043
X X X
102 179
54.5
94
P3 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
With IP30 front-panel escutcheon NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

For toggle
DB115044
DB115045
DB115038
DB115039
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
P3 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y

DB115062
DB115063
DB115042
DB115043
X X X
102 179
54.5
94
P3 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
C-20
For toggle
DB115064
DB115065
DB115066
DB115067
155
X 103 X X
42.5 56.5
P4 74 90
148 180
Z Y Y
With IP43 toggle cover NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

For toggle
DB115068
DB115123
DB115038
DB115039
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
P4 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
Y
DB115439
Type P3 P4
NSX100/160/250 88 89 Note: door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in
the enclosure where D u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door h
NSX400/630 112 113
hinge.
C-21
connection Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 fixed
version

For toggle
DB115072
DB115073
DB115074
DB115075
X X X
85.5
148
38
38
P3 14.5
29
Z Y 29
32
Y

DB115076
DB115077
DB115078
DB115079
X X X
85.5
148
38
38
P3 14.5
29
Z Y 29
32
Y

For toggle
DB115074
DB115075
DB115080
DB115081
X X X
85.5
148
38
38
P3 14.5
29
Z Y 29
32
Y
C-22
With IP30 front-panel escutcheon (cont.) NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
DB115082
DB115083
DB115078
DB115079
X X X
85.5
148
38
38
P3 14.5
29
Z Y 29
32
Y

For toggle
DB115086
DB115087
DB115084
DB115085
X X X
71
132
68
68
29
58
P4 47
Z Y 58
Y
DB115439
Type P3 P4
NSX100/160/250 88 89 Note: door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in
NSX400/630 112 113 hinge.
C-23
connection Compact NSX100 to 630 plug-in and
Plug-in version
M M
DB115088
DB115089
N
N
27
45
D1 P3
Z
Bare sheet metal

See Compact NSX100 to 630 fixed version, page C-20
With IP30 front-panel escutcheon
With toggle cover
Withdrawable version NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

With protection collar and IP40 front-panel escutcheon
M M
DB115090
DB115091
DB115066
DB115067
N
N
155
X 103 X X
42.5
56.5
74 90
148 180
27 Y Y
45
D1 P5
C-24
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630 plug-in and
Plug-in version
M M
DB115092
DB115094
N
N
27
45
D1 P3
Z
Bare sheet metal

Withdrawable version NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

With protection collar and IP40 front-panel escutcheon
M
DB115095
DB115096
M
DB115097
DB115098
N
N
X X X
55
122.5
82.5
82.5
74
148
Y 90
27
148
45
Y
D1 P5
Z
Y
DB115439
Type D1 P3 P5
NSX100/160/250 75 88 123 Note: door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in
NSX400/630 100 112 147 hinge.
C-25
connection Visu function for Compact NSX100 to
630 fixed version
Compact NSX100 to 250 with Interpact INV100 to 250 Visu function

Bare sheet metal
132
DB115099
DB115100
DB115101
66
82
17.5
X 115.5
88
Z Y

162
DB115102
DB115103
DB115440
81
103
X 17.5
105
89
Z Y
Compact NSX400/630 with Interpact INV400 to 630 Visu function

Bare sheet metal
172
DB115104
DB115105
DB115106
86
127
22.5
X 177.5
112
Y
Y

202
DB115107
DB115108
DB115441
101
153
22.5
X 164.5
113
Y
Y
C-26
Motor mechanism module for Compact
and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630

Fixed, plug-in or withdrawable circuit breaker
M M
DB115109
DB115110
DB115038
DB115069
N
N
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
5...8
47.5 63.5
27 95 127
45 P6 Y Y
D1 P7
Z

Fixed, plug-in or withdrawable circuit breaker
M M
DB115038
DB115069
DB115111
DB115112
N
N
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
5...8
47.5 63.5
27 95 127
45 P6 Y Y
D1 P7
Z

Fixed, plug-in or withdrawable circuit breaker without access to Vigi module
M M
DB115113
DB115114
DB115066
DB115067
N
N
155
X 103 X X
42.5 56.5
5...8
74 90
27 148 180
45 P8 Y Y
D1 P9
Z
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker with access to Vigi module

M 180
DB115115
DB115116
DB115117
DB115118
148
M 90
N 74
N
X 103 X 155
X
42.5
5...8
55 56.5
122.5
27 Y
45
Y
D1 P8 Type D1 P6 (1) P7 (2) P8 (1) P9 (2)
Z
NSX100/160/250 75 145 177 146 178 (1) Plug-in version.
NSX400/630 100 217 249 218 250 (2) Withdrawable version.
C-27
connection Direct rotary handle for Compact and
Vigicompact NSX100 to 630
Fixed or plug-in circuit breakers NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

Bare sheet metal
M
DB115144
DB115145
DB115119
DB115146
N N
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
85.5
148
47.5
27
45 95
63.5
D1 P10
Z Y 127
Y
Bare sheet metal with access to the trip unit

DB115125
DB115126
M M
DB115147
DB115124
N N
X 102 X 179 X
54.5
85.5 94
148
47.5
27
45 95
D1 P10 63.5
Z Y 127
Y
M M
DB115145
DB115127
DB115128
DB115146
N N
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
85.5
148
47.5
27
45 95
63.5
D1 P10
Z Y 127
Y
C-28
Fixed or plug-in circuit breakers (cont.) NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
With IP30 front-panel escutcheon with access to the trip unit
DB115125
DB115126
M M
DB115129
DB115130
N N
X 102 X 179 X
54.5
85.5 94
148
47.5
27
45 95
D1 P10 63.5
Z Y 127
Y
M M
DB115131
DB115271
DB115132
DB115133
N N
103 155
X X X
42.5
56.5
85.5
148
74
27
45 148
90
D1 P11
Z Y 180
Y
Fixed or withdrawable circuit breakers NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

M 180
DB115134
DB115135
DB115117
DB115118
M 148
90
N N 74
X 103 X 155
X
42.5
55 56.5
122.5
Y
27 Y
45
D1 P12
Z
Type D1 P10 P11 P12

NSX100/160/250 75 89 90 123
NSX400/630 100 112 113 147
C-29
connection Indication and measurement modules for
Fixed or plug-in circuit breakers with ammeter module and voltage-presence indicator
Bare sheet metal
With toggle Rotary handle
M M M
DB115136
DB115272
DB115273
DB115139
31
N N N
J1
X X X
J2
56.5
K1
27 27 93
45 45
Y
D1 P3 D1 P10
Z Z

With toggle Rotary handle
M M M
DB115140
DB115141
DB115142
DB115143 31
N N N
J1
X X X
J3
82.5
K2
27 27
148
45 45
D1 P4 D1 P11 Y
Z Z
Type D1 J1 J2 J3 K1 K2 P3 P4 P10 P11

NSX100/160/250 75 78.5 67.5 55 46.5 74 88 89 89 90
NSX400/630 100 122 129 122.5 64.5 90 112 113 112 113
C-30
C-31
Dimensions and Power connections
connection Compact and Vigicompact NSX100 to
630 fixed version
Connection locations
C1 B1 B1 B1
DB115442
DB115443
A1
X X
A2
A3
Y
C2
Type A1 A2 B1 C1 C2 Type A1 A3 B1 C1 C2
NSX100/160 70 140 35 19.5 19.5 NSX100/160 + Vigi 70 215 35 19.5 21.5
NSX250 70 140 35 21.5 19.5 NSX250 + Vigi 70 215 35 21.5 21.5
NSX400/630 113.5 227 45 26 26 NSX400/630 + Vigi 113.5 327 45 26 26
Front connection without accessories

NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
Z
DB115444
DB115445
DB115446
10.5 14
70 113.5
X X
Cables with lugs/bars Bars/cables with lugs
Connection with accessories
Long and short rear connectors
NSX100 to 250
Z
DB115447
DB116107
43 for short RC
88 for long RC
10 8.6
13
18
70
6 20
X
NSX400/630
Z
DB116108
50 for short RC
115 for long RC
15 13 23.2
14
30
113.5
8
X
C-32
Connection with accessories (cont.)
Bare-cable connectors
NSX100 to 250
DB115452
DB115450
DB115451
Z Z 63
22
70 70
X X
DB115453
NSX400/630
DB115455
DB115454
Z Z
46.5
14
113.5 113.5
X X
Distribution connectors (for NSX100 to 250 only)
X
DB115457
DB115456
70
41
(a) Vigi module 64.5

or NSX250. 66.5 (a)
Z
Right-angle terminal extensions (upstream only)
NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
Z
DB115458
DB115459
DB115460
Z 8
37.5 61
39.5 (b) 4
34
20.5
70 113.5
(b) NSX250. X X
Straight terminal extensions (for NSX100 to 250 only)
4
DB115462
DB115461
41
30
70
X
C-33
630 fixed version

Edgewise terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
Z
DB115463
DB115464
DB115465
30
Z
23.5
58
53
42 8 42
70 113.5
4
X X
45 terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
Z
DB115466
DB115467
DB115468
Z 10
13.5
61.5
40 48
31 8
4
70 113.5
X X
Double-L terminal extensions NSX100 to 250
Z
DB115469
DB115470
45
4
46
35
70
C-34
Spreaders 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250
E1 E3
DB115471
DB115472
DB115473
DB115474
E2 E2 F2 E2 E2 E2 C3
F1
X X X
NSX400/630
Y Y
C4
Type C3 C4 E1 E2 E3 F1 F2
NSX100/160 23.5 - 114 45 159 100 11
X
NSX250 25.5 - 114 45 159 100 11
NSX400/630 - 44 135 52.5 187.5 152.5 15
Z
170 70 240 166 15
One-piece spreader (for NSX100 to 250 only)

DB115475
DB115476
DB115477
180.5 98
140 26
45 45 45
130
113.5
X X
Y
Z
C-35
630 plug-in and withdrawable versions
Connection locations
M
DB115478
DB115479
B1 B1 B1
N
A4
V
X X
A5
Y
27
45
D1
Z
Type A4 A5 B1 D1 Note:
b for mounting on a backplate, the insulating screen supplied with the plug-in base must be
NSX100 to 250 100 200 35 75 installed.
NSX400/630 156.5 313 45 100 b for withdrawable versions, terminal shields are recommended.
Connection without accessories

Front connection: mounting on backplate (M) or rails (V)
NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
26 6
DB115481
DB115482
DB115480
19 4
Z Z
108.5 171
156.5
100
X X
Rear connection: mounting through front panel (N) or on rails (V)

NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
DB115483
DB115484
DB115485
114.5
75.5 100.5
67
4 6
Z Z
80.5 129
49
63.5 57.5 104 82.5
96.5
X X
DB115488
DB115489
114.5
75.5 100.5
67
Z Z
8.5 11
70 49 113.5
57.5 82.5
96.5
X X
C-36
Connection with accessories
Bare-cable connectors: mounting on backplate (M) or rails (V)
NSX100 to 250 70
DB115491
DB115492
DB115490
48.5
163
Z
Z
110
100
100
X
X
30
30
NSX400/630
68 94
DB115494
DB115495
DB115493
171 Z
203
156.5
156.5
X
55
X
55
Bare-cable connectors: mounting through front panel (N) or on rails (V)
NSX100 to 250 74
DB115497
DB115498
DB115496
54
Z 163
Z
110
100
100
X
X
18
18
NSX400/630
DB115500
DB115499
111
DB115501
84
Z Z
203
171
156.5 156.5
X X
18 18
C-37
630 plug-in and withdrawable versions

45 extensions: mounting through front panel (N) or on rails (V)
NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
57
DB115506
DB115507
DB115508
33
8
4
218
140 204.5
Z Z
131
156.5
100
X X
18 18
Double-L extensions: mounting on backplate (M) or rails (V)

NSX100 to 250
DB115509
DB115510
47
146
135 Z
100
X
30
Double-L extensions: mounting through front panel (N) or on rails (V)

NSX100 to 250
DB115505
51
146
135 Z
100
X
18
C-38
Spreaders: mounting on backplate (M) or rails (V)
3P 4P NSX100 to 250
DB115511
DB115512
DB115513
DB115514
E1 E3
E2 E2 F2 E2 E2 E2 27
F1
X X X
NSX400/630
Y Y 50
Type E1 E2 E3 F1 F2
NSX100 to 250 114 45 159 130 11
X
NSX400/630 135 52.5 187.5 195.5 15
170 70 240 209 15 Z
Long insulated rear connectors: mounting on backplate (M) or rails (V)

Exterior-mounted rear connectors NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630
DB115515
DB115516
DB115517
108.5
75.5 94.5
67
Z
Z
80.5 129
30 55
X X
Interior-mounted rear connectors NSX100 to 250 NSX400/630

DB115518
DB115519
DB115520
108.5
75.5 94.5
67
Z
Z
63.5 104
30 55
X X
Long, insulated connectors are mandatory.
C-39
connection Connection of insulated bars or cables
with lugs to Compact and Vigicompact
NSX100 to 630
DB112168
DB115653
Direct connection to NSX100 to 630
Dimensions NSX100 NSX160/250 NSX400/630

400 Bars L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
d I (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15
I
d (mm) y 10 y 10 y 15
L
e (mm) y6 y6 3 y e y 10
e
(mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
Bar.
Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
DB115654
(mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5

Torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50
Torque (Nm) (2) 5/5 5/5 20/11
Torque (Nm) (3) 8 8 20
(1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for lugs or bars.
L
(2) Tightening torque on fixed devices for rear connectors//tightening torque on plug-in or
Lug. withdrawable devices for power connectors.
(3) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for terminal extensions.
Accessories for NSX100 to 250 Connection with accessories to NSX100 to 250 (IEC 228)
Straight terminal Double-L terminal Pole pitch
extensions extensions Without spreaders 35 mm
DB112172
DB112176
With spreaders 45 mm
Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensions
NSX100 NSX160/250
Tinned copper Tinned copper y 25 y 25
DB115655
Bars L (mm)
l (mm) 20 y I y 25 20 y I y 25
Spreaders: d (mm) y 10 y 10
separate parts one-piece spreader 400
e (mm) y6 y6
DB112177
DB115655
d (mm) 6.5 8.5

I
L Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 25
L
(mm) 6.5 8.5
e Torque (Nm) (1) 10 15
Tinned copper Torque (Nm) (2) 5 5
For U > 600 V, the mandatory insulation kit is not (1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for spreaders or terminal extensions.
compatible with spreaders made up of separate parts. (2) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for spreaders or terminal extensions.
The one-piece spreader must be used. Spreaders and straight, right-angle, 45, double-L and edgewise terminal extensions
are supplied with flexible interphase barriers.
Accessories for NSX400 and 630
Spreaders made up of separate parts for 52.5 and Connection with accessories to NSX400 and 630 (IEC 228)
70 mm pitch Pole pitch
Without spreaders 45 mm
DB115657
With spreaders 52.5 or 70 mm

Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensions
y 40 y 32
DB115655
Bars L (mm)
Tinned copper l (mm) d + 15 30 y I y 34
For U > 600 V, use of the 52.5 mm pitch spreaders d (mm) y 20 y 15
requires a specific insulation kit. 400
e (mm) 3 y e y 10 3 y e y 10
The 70 mm pitch spreaders may not be used. d (mm) 12.5 10.5
I
L Lugs L (mm) y 40 y 32
L
Accessories for NSX100 to 630 (mm) 12.5 10.5
Right-angle terminal Edgewise terminal e Torque (Nm) (1) 50 50
extensions extensions Torque (Nm) (2) 20 20
(1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for spreaders or terminal extensions.
DB112173
DB112175
(2) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for spreaders or terminal extensions.
Spreaders and right-angle, 45 and edgewise terminal extensions are supplied with
flexible interphase barriers.
Tinned copper Tinned copper
DB115658
To be mounted on upstream
side.
45 terminal extensions
DB112174
Tinned copper
Mounting detail: 2 cables
with lugs.
C-40
Connection of bare cables to Compact
and Vigicompact NSX100 to 630
DB1125659
DB115660
Connection for NSX100 to 250
DB112317
DB112315
DB111327
DB115661
DB115662
1-cable 2-cable Distribution connector Polybloc distribution block
connector connector
1-cable connector Steel Aluminium

y 160 A y 250 A
DB115663
L (mm) 25 25
S (mm) Cu / Al 1.5 to 95 (1) 25 to 50 70 to 95 120 to 185
150 max. flex.
L Torque (Nm) 12 20 26 26
2-cable connector
S
L (mm) 25 or 50
S (mm) Cu / Al 2 x 50 to 2 x 120
Torque (Nm) 22
6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)
L (mm) 15 or 30
S (mm) Cu / Al 1.5 to 6 (1) 8 to 35
Torque (Nm) 4 6
Polybloc distribution block (6 or 9 cables)
L (mm) 12 16
S (mm) Cu / Al 6 x 4 to 10 3 x 6 to 16
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrules.
Connection to NSX400 and 630

DB112316
DB111326
1-cable connector 2-cable connector
1-cable connector 2-cable connector

DB115663
L (mm) 30 30 or 60
S (mm) Cu / Al 35 to 300 rigid 2 x 35 to 2 x 240 rigid
240 max. flex. 240 max. flex.
L Torque (Nm) 31 31
Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses

Compact NSX circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper,
tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors (flexible or rigid bars, cables).
In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted on
the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and held in place by
supports.
Electrical connection points on switchgear devices (switch-disconnectors,
contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support.
Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must be
made of non-magnetic material.
C-41
Accumulated experience
Compact NSX Wiring diagrams
Contents


Fixed circuit breakers D-2
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers D-4
Motor mechanism D-6
SDx module with Micrologic D-8
SDTAM module with Micrologic M D-9

Glossary G-1
D-1
Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630
Fixed circuit breakers
Power Micrologic Remote operation
Upstream CB a (+) a (+)

3P or 4P NSX cord
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
N L1 L2 L3 SDE 81
DB115707
+ - BPO BPF
HL
82 84
D2
C2
A4
A2
B4
B2
Z1
Z2
MN MX
T1
Q T2 auto
I 0 I
ou manu
Z3
Z4
U Z5
A1
L1
D1
C1
a (-)
manu SDE
a (-)
Motor mechanism (MT)

NSX cord
3P + N
N L1 L2 L3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
a (220/240 V)
+ -
Downstream CB
HL
BSCM
B4
Z1
Z2
Q I U T1
T2
Z3
Z4
Z5
ENVT auto 0 I
manu
A1
ENCT
H2 T1 a
Communicating motor
H1 T2 mechanism (MTc)
Micrologic A or E Remote operation

A/E Communication MN: undervoltage release
H(WH), L(BL): data or
- (BK), + (RD): 24 V DC power supply
MX: shunt release
A/E ZSI (Zone Selective Interlocking)
Z1: ZSI OUT SOURCE Motor mechanism (MT)
Z2: ZSI OUT A4: opening order
Z3: ZSI IN SOURCE A2: closing order
Z4: ZSI IN ST (short time)
Z5: ZSI IN GF (ground fault) B4, A1: power supply to motor mechanism
Note: Z3, Z4, Z5 for NSX400/630 only. L1: manual position (manu)
A/E ENCT: external neutral current transformer: B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for correct operation)
- shielded cable with 1 twisted pair (T1, T2)
- shielding earthed at one end only (CT end). BPO: opening pushbutton
Connection L = 30 cm max. BPF: closing pushbutton
- maximum length of 10 metres
- cable size 0.4 to 1.5 mm2 Communicating motor mechanism (MTc)
- recommended cable: Belden 8441 or equivalent. B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
E ENVT: external neutral voltage tap for connection to the BSCM: breaker status and control module
neutral via a 3P circuit breaker.
D-2
Indication contacts
DB115708
Open Closed Fault Fault Closed Open Fault
102
104
134
124
42
32
22
12
72
82
84
92
94
44
34
24
14
74
WH
RD
YE
VT
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO1 SDV
WH
RD
GY
131
41
31
21
71
121
101
81
91
11
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Indication contacts

energised, all devices open, connected and OF2 / OF1: device ON/OFF indication contacts
charged and relays in normal position. OF4 / OF3: device ON/OFF indication contacts (NSX400/630)
SDE: fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit, overload, ground fault, earth
Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer. leakage)
SD: trip-indication contact
CAF2/CAF1: early-make contact (rotary handle only)
CAO1: early-break contact (rotary handle only)
SDV: earth leakage fault trip indication contact (add-on Vigi module)
Colour code for auxiliary wiring

RD: red VT: violet
WH: white GY: grey
YE: yellow OR: orange
BK: black BL: blue
GN: green
D-3
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers
Power Micrologic Remote operation
Upstream CB a (+)
a (+)
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
SDE
DB115709
81
NSX cord
3P or 4P BPO BPF
N L1 L2 L3
82 84
C2
D2
B4
A4
A2
RD
84
+
84 BK -
RD
A1 BL L
24/34
22/32
B4 WH
H
A2 WH
BL
C2 OR
A4 OR
BL
A2
D2
B4
B2
Z2 YE
Z1 VT
MN MX
T1
Q T2 auto
0 I
I or manu
BK Z3
GN Z4
RD Z5
A1
L1
D1
C1
GN
WH
BK
41
42
44
A1
D1/C1
L1
a (-) manu a (-) SDE
Motor mechanism (MT)

NSX cord
3P + N
N L1 L2 L3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
a (220/240 V)
+ -
HL
Downstream BSCM B4
Z1
Z2
B4 GN
Z2 YE
Z1 VT
Q I U
T1
T2 auto
ENVT 0 I
manu
BK Z3
GN Z4
RD Z5
OR A1
ENCT
H2 T1
Z3
Z4
Z5
A4
H1 T2 a
Communicating motor
mechanism (MTc)
The diagram is shown with circuits de-

energised, all devices open, connected and
charged and relays in normal position.
D-4
Indication contacts Carriage switches
Open Closed Fault Fault Closed Open Fault Connected Disconnected

DB115710
42
32
22
12
82
84
92
94
44
34
24
14
72
74
42 GN
82 GN
92 GN
44 RD
84 RD
94 RD
32 YE
22 YE
12 YE
72 YE
34 VT
24 VT
14 VT
74 VT
102
314
312
352
354
104
134
124
WH
GY
GY
RD
YE
VT
VT
VT
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO1 SDV CE CD
WH
YE
YE
GY
RD
131
121
101
BK 41
GY 31
GY 21
BK 81
BK 91
311
351
GY 71
GY 11
41
31
21
71
81
91
11
Micrologic A or E Remote operation

A/E Communication MN: undervoltage release
H(WH), L(BL): data or
- (BK), + (RD): 24 V DC power supply
MX: shunt release
A/E ZSI (Zone Selective Interlocking)
Z1: ZSI OUT SOURCE Motor mechanism (MT)
Z2: ZSI OUT A4: opening order
Z3: ZSI IN SOURCE A2: closing order
Z4: ZSI IN ST (short time)
Z5: ZSI IN GF (ground fault) B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
Note: Z3, Z4, Z5 for NSX400/630 only. L1: manual position (manu)
A/E ENCT: external neutral current transformer: B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for automatic or remote
- shielded cable with 1 twisted pair (T1, T2) recharging)
- shielding earthed at one end only (CT end). BPO: opening pushbutton
Connection L = 30 cm max. BPF: closing pushbutton
- maximum length of 10 metres
- cable size 0.4 to 1.5 mm2 Communicating motor mechanism (MTc)
- recommended cable: Belden 8441 or equivalent. B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
E ENVT: external neutral voltage tap for connection to the BSCM: breaker status and control module
neutral via a 3P circuit breaker.
Colour code for auxiliary wiring Indication contacts
RD: red VT: violet OF2 / OF1: device ON/OFF indication contacts
WH: white GY: grey OF4 / OF3: device ON/OFF indication contacts (NSX400/630)
YE: yellow OR: orange SDE: fault-trip indication contact
BK: black BL: blue (short-circuit, overload, ground fault, earth leakage)
GN: green SD: trip-indication contact
CAF2/CAF1: early-make contact
Terminals shown in red v / O must be connected by the customer.
(rotary handle only)
CAO1: early-break contact
(rotary handle only)
SDV: earth leakage fault trip indication contact (add-on Vigi
module)
D-5
Motor mechanism
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Motor mechanism (MT) with automatic reset
DB114666
a (+)
SDE 81
After tripping initiated by the "Push to trip" button or by BPO BPF
the undervoltage (MN) release or the shunt (MX)
release, device reset can be automatic, remote or
82 84
manual.
A4
A2
B4
B2
Following tripping due to an electrical fault (with an
SDE contact), reset must be carried out manually.
Q
auto
0 I
manu
A1
manu L1 SDE
a (-)
Motor mechanism (MT) with remote reset

DB114667
a (+)
SDE 81
BPO BPF Reset
82 84
A4
A2
B4
B2
Q
auto
0 I
manu
A1
L1
manu SDE
a (-)
Motor mechanism (MT) with manual reset

DB114668
a (+)
SDE 81
BPO BPF
82 84
Symbols
A4
A2
B4
B2
Q: circuit breaker
A4 : opening order
A2: closing order
B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
Q
L1: manual position (manu) auto
0 I
B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for correct manu
operation)
A1
L1
BPO: opening pushbutton

BPF: closing pushbutton manu SDE
SDE: fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit,
a (-)
overload, ground fault, earth leakage)
D-6
Communicating motor mechanism (MTc)
DB114669
NSX cord
a (220/240 V)
+ -
HL
BSCM
B4
Q
auto 0 I
manu
A1
a
Schematic representation of the communicating motor mechanism (MT).

DB115436
RSU screen for the communicating motor mechanism (MTc)

DB114670
B4
Auto SD SD
Manu
RSU utility setup screen for the communicating motor Enable
mechanism. reset
even if
SDE SDE
220
VAC Open Close
command command
Enable
automatic Reset
reset command
OF OF
Open motor Close motor Reset motor

A1
Single-line diagram of communicating motor mechanism

Opening, closing and reset orders are transmitted via the communication network.
The "Enable automatic reset" and "Enable reset even if SDE" parameters must be
set using the RSU software via the screen by clicking the blue text.
"Auto/manu" is a switch on the front of the motor mechanism.
Symbols
Q: circuit breaker
B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
BSCM: breaker status and control module
Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer.
D-7
SDx module with Micrologic
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Connection

DB115711
a (+) 24 415 V
STD PAL Ir
or output 1 or SDG
or output 2
SD3 SD2 SD4
Symbols
SDx
SD1, SD3: SDx-module power supply
SD2: output 1 (80 mA max.)
Q
SD4: output 2 (80 mA max.)
SD2 SD4
Micrologic 2 SDT -
Micrologic 5 SDT or output 1 PAL Ir or output 2 SD1
Micrologic 6 SDT or output 1 SDG or output 2
a (-)
Operation
DB115712
tr at 6 Ir
> 105 % Ir
> 90 % Ir
I
PAL Ir
SDG
SDT
Circuit breaker Circuit breaker

trip order reset
I: charge current
PAL Ir: thermal overload pre-alarm
SDG: ground-fault signal
SDT: thermal-fault signal
Q: circuit breaker
D-8
SDTAM module with Micrologic M
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Connection

DB115713
a (+) 24 to 415 V
Manual Closing
reset SDT KA1 order
KM1
SD3 SD2 SD4
Symbols
SDTAM
SD1, SD3: SDTAM-module power supply
6 8 Opening
SD2: thermal-fault signal output 4 10 order
(80 mA max.) Q
2 12
SD4: contactor-control output 1 14
(80 mA max.) OFF 15 KA1
Auto reset (minutes)
SD2 SD4 SD1
Micrologic 2-M SDT KA1 KM1
Micrologic 6 E-M SDT KA1 KM1

a (-)
Operation
DB115714
Class (tr) at 7.2 Ir

> 95 % T
400 ms
< 95 % T
I
SDT
KA1
KM1
%T 400 ms before Contactor

circuit-breaker closing order
tripping order
%T Manual or
automatic reset
I: charge current
SDT: thermal-fault signal
KA1: auxiliary relay (e.g. RBN or RTBT relay)
KM1: motor contactor
Q: circuit breaker
D-9
Reinforced discrimination
Compact NSX Additional characteristics
Contents

Wiring diagrams D-1
Tripping curves
Compact NSX100 to 250 protection of distribution systems E-2
Compact NSX100 to 250 motor protection E-6
Compact NSX400 to 630 protection of distribution systems E-8
Compact NSX400 to 630 motor protection E-10
Compact NSX100 to 630 reflex tripping E-12
Current and energy limiting curves E-13

Glossary G-1
E-1
Additional characteristics Tripping curves
TM magnetic trip units

TM16D / TM16G TM25D / TM25G
DB114759
DB114760
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
TM16D : Im = 12 x In TM25D : Im = 12 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
TM16G : Im = 4 x In
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 TM25G : t < 10 ms
Im = 3.2 x In
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
TM32D / TM40D / TM40G TM50D / TM63D / TM63G

DB114761
DB114762
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
TM40D : Im = 12 x In TM63D : Im = 8 x In
1 1
.5 .5
TM50D : Im = 10 x In
.2 TM32D : Im = 12.5 x In .2
TM40G : TM63G :
.1 .1
Im = 2 x In Im = 2 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
E-2
TM magnetic trip units (cont.)
TM80D / TM100D TM125D / TM160D
DB114763
DB114764
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5 TM125D : Im = 10 x In
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 1
.5 .5 TM160D :
TM80D/TM100D : Im = 8 x In
.2 Im = 8 x In .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
TM200D / TM250D
DB114765
10 000
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2 TM200D/TM250D :
1 Im = 5 ... 10 x In
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01 t < 10 ms
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
E-3
Protection of distribution systems (cont.)
Micrologic 2.2 and 2.2 G electronic trip units

Micrologic 2.2 - 40... 160 A Micrologic 2.2 - 250 A
DB114766
DB114767
10 000 10 000
5 000 40 A : Ir = 16 ...40 A 5 000
100 A : Ir = 36 ...100 A 250 A : Ir = 90 ...250 A
2 000 160 A : Ir = 57 ...160 A 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01
t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
Ii = 15 x In Ii = 12 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
Micrologic 2.2 G - 40... 160 A Micrologic 2.2 G - 250 A

DB114768
DB114769
10 000 10 000
40 A : Ir = 16 ...40 A
5 000 5 000
100 A : Ir = 36 ...100 A 250 A : Ir = 90 ...250 A
2 000 160 A : Ir = 57 ...160 A 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 1.5 ...9 x Ir Isd = 1.5 ...9 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
E-4
Micrologic 5.2 and 6.2 A or E electronic trip units
Micrologic 5.2 and 6.2 A or E - 40... 160 A Micrologic 5.2 and 6.2 A or E - 250 A
DB114770
DB114771
10 000 10 000
40 A : Ir = 16 ...40 A
5 000 5 000 250 A : Ir = 90 ...250 A
100 A : Ir = 36 ...100 A
2 000 160 A : Ir = 56 ...160 A 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
tr = 0.5 ...16 s tr = 0.5 ...16 s
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir t(s) Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir
2 2
1 1
It ON It ON
.5 0.4 .5 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 .2 0.2
.1 It OFF 0.1 .1 It OFF 0.1
.05 .05 0
0
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 t < 10 ms .005 t < 10 ms
.002 .002
Ii = 1.5 ...15 In Ii = 1.5 ...12 In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50
I / Ir I / In I / Ir I / In
Reflex tripping.
Micrologic 6.2 A or E (ground-fault protection)

DB114772
10 000
5 000
2 000 40 A : Ig = 0.4 ...1 x In

1 000 > 40 A : Ig = 0.2 ...1 x In
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s) It ON
2
1
.5
0.4
0.3
.2
It OFF 0.2
.1 0.1
.05
0
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
I / In
E-5
Motor protection
MA magnetic trip units

MA2.5... MA100 MA150 and MA220
DB118546
DB115716
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500 Thermal withstand
200 200 MA220

100 100 MA150
Thermal withstand
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Im = 6 ... 14 x In Im = 9 ... 14 x In
1 Im = 9 ... 14 x In 1
.5 (MA100 4P) .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
Micrologic 2.2 M electronic trip units

Micrologic 2.2 M - 25 A Micrologic 2.2 M - 50... 220 A
DB114775
DB114776
10 000 10 000
50 A : Ir = 25 ...50 A
5 000 25 A : Ir = 12 ...25 A 5 000
100 A : Ir = 50 ...100 A
2 000 2 000 150 A : Ir = 70 ...150 A
220 A : Ir = 100 ...220 A
1 000 1 000
500 class 20 500 class 20
class 10 class 10
200 200
class 5 class 5
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
E-6
Micrologic 6.2 E-M electronic trip units
Micrologic 6.2 E-M - 25 A Micrologic 6.2 E-M - 50... 220 A
DB114777
DB114778
10 000 10 000 50 A : Ir = 25 ...50 A
5 000 5 000 80 A : Ir = 35 ...80 A
25 A : Ir = 12 ...25 A
2 000 2 000 150 A : Ir = 70 ...150 A
class 30 220 A : Ir = 100 ...220 A
1 000 1 000
class 20
500 500 class 30
class 10
class 20
100 100 class 5
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
Micrologic 6.2 E-M (ground-fault protection)

DB114791
10 000
5 000
2 000 25 A : Ig = 0.6 ...1 x In

50 A : Ig = 0.3 ...1 x In
1 000
> 50 A : Ig = 0.2 ...1 x In
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
1
.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 0.2
.1 0.1 0.1
.05
0 0
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
I / In
E-7
Micrologic 2.3, 5.3 and 6.3 A or E electronic trip units

Micrologic 2.3 - 250... 400 A Micrologic 2.3 - 630 A
DB114780
DB114781
10 000 10 000
5 000 250 A : Ir = 63 ...250 A 5 000
630 A : Ir = 225 ...630 A
400 A : Ir = 144 ...400 A
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
Micrologic 5.3 and 6.3 A or E - 400 A Micrologic 5.3 and 6.3 A or E - 630 A
DB114782
DB114783
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
400 A : Ir = 100 ...400 A 630 A : Ir = 225 ...630 A
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
tr = 0.5 ...16 s tr = 0.5 ...16 s
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir t(s) Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir
2 2
1 1
It ON It ON
.5 0.4 .5 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 .2 0.2
.1 It OFF 0.1 .1 It OFF 0.1
.05 0 .05
0
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 t < 10 ms .005 t < 10 ms
.002 .002
Ii = 1.5 ...12 In Ii = 1.5 ...11 In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50
I / Ir I / In I / Ir I / In
Reflex tripping.
E-8
Micrologic 6.3 A or E electronic trip units (cont.)
Micrologic 6.3 A or E (ground-fault protection)
DB114772
10 000
5 000
2 000 40 A : Ig = 0.4 ...1 x In

1 000 > 40 A : Ig = 0.2 ...1 x In
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s) It ON
2
1
.5
0.4
0.3
.2
It OFF 0.2
.1 0.1
.05
0
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
I / In
E-9
Motor protection
Micrologic 1.3 M and 2.3 M electronic trip units

Micrologic 1.3 M - 320 A Micrologic 1.3 M - 500 A
DB115717
DB115718
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 Thermal withstand 100 Thermal withstand
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 1
.5 .5
.2 Isd = 5 ...13 x In .2 Isd = 5 ...13 x In

.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / In I / In
Reflex tripping.
Micrologic 2.3 M - 320 A Micrologic 2.3 M - 500 A

DB114787
DB114788
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
320 A : Ir = 160 ...320 A 500 A : Ir = 250 ...500 A
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
class 10 class 10
200 200
class 5 class 5
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
E-10
Micrologic 6.3 E-M electronic trip units
Micrologic 6.3 E-M - 320 A Micrologic 6.3 E-M - 500 A
DB114789
DB114790
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
320 A : Ir = 160 ...320 A 500 A : Ir = 250 ...500 A
2 000 2 000
1 000 class 30 1 000 class 30
class 20 class 20
class 5 class 5
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Reflex tripping.
Micrologic 6.3 E-M (ground fault protection)

DB115634
10 000
5 000
2 000
Ig = 0.2 ...1 x In
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
1
.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 0.2
.1 0.1 0.1
.05
0 0
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
I / In
E-11
Reflex tripping
DB115721
Compact NSX100 to 630 devices incorporate the
exclusive reflex-tripping system.
This system breaks very high fault currents. 20
The device is mechanically tripped via a "piston"
actuated directly by the pressure produced in the
breaking units by the short-circuit. NSX630
For high short-circuits, this system provides a faster
break, thereby ensuring discrimination.
Reflex-tripping curves are exclusively a function of the NSX400
10
circuit-breaker rating.
t
8
(ms)
7
6
NSX250
5
4
NSX100
NSX160
3
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200
kA rms
E-12
Current and energy limiting
curves
The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its aptitude Ics = 100 % Icu
to let through a current, during a short-circuit, that is The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NSX range greatly reduces the
less than the prospective short-circuit current. forces created by fault currents in devices.
The result is a major increase in breaking performance.
In particular, the service breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100 % of Icu.
The Ics value, defined by IEC standard 60947-2, is guaranteed by tests comprising
(Isc) the following steps:
DB115719
Prospective b break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100% of Icu
Isc peak
b check that the device continues to function normally, that is:
Prospective v it conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise
current
v protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standard
v suitability for isolation is not impaired.
Prospective
Isc Longer service life of electrical installations
Limited Isc Current-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuits
peak on installations.
Actual
current Thermal effects
Limited Less temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables.
Isc
Mechanical effects
(t) Reduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or busbars
being deformed or broken.
The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NSX range is
due to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid natural Electromagnetic effects
repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc voltages Fewer disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits.
in-series with a very steep wave front).
Economy by means of cascading
Cascading is a technique directly derived from current limiting. Circuit breakers with
breaking capacities less than the prospective short-circuit current may be installed
downstream of a limiting circuit breaker. The breaking capacity is reinforced by the
limiting capacity of the upstream device. It follows that substantial savings can be
made on downstream equipment and enclosures.
Current and energy limiting curves

The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which are a
function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow if no
protection devices were installed):
b the actual peak current (limited current)
b thermal stress (A2s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor
with a resistance of 1 .
Example
What is the real value of a 150 kA rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 kA peak)
limited by an NSX250L upstream ?
The answer is 30 kA peak (curve page E-14).
Maximum permissible cable stresses

The table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cables
depending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area
(CSA). CSA values are given in mm and thermal stresses in A2s.
CSA 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 4 mm 6 mm 10 mm
PVC Cu 2.97x104 8.26x104 2.12x105 4.76x105 1.32x106
Al 5.41x105
PRC Cu 4.10x104 1.39x105 2.92x105 6.56x105 1.82x106
Al 7.52x105
CSA 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm
PVC Cu 3.4x106 8.26x106 1.62x107 3.31x107
6 6 6
Al 1.39x10 3.38x10 6.64x10 1.35x107
PRC Cu 4.69x106 1.39x107 2.23x107 4.56x107
Al 1.93x106 4.70x106 9.23x106 1.88x107
Example
Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm adequately protected by an NSX160F?
The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.32x106 A2s.
All short-circuit currents at the point where an NSX160F (Icu = 35 kA) is installed are
limited with a thermal stress less than 6x105 A2s (curve page E-14).
Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the
circuit breaker.
E-13
Additional characteristics Current and energy limiting
curves
Current-limiting curves
Voltage 400/440 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC
Limited short-circuit current (k peak) Limited short-circuit current (k peak)
DB116369
DB116370
300 300
200 200
146 146
100 100
80 80
70 70
60 L NSX630 60
50 S 50
H NSX400
40 N 40 L NSX630
k F L NSX250 k S
30 S 30 H NSX400
H NSX100
N
F NSX160 L
20 20 F, N S NSX250
B
NSX100
NSX160
10 10 N, H
8 8 F
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300
65
kA rms kA rms
Energy-limiting curves
Voltage 400/440 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC
Limited energy Limited energy
DB116371
DB116372
9 9
10 10
5 5
3 3
2 2
1.41 1.41
8 8
10 10
5 5
3 3
2 2
7 7
10 10
2 2 L
As 5 S L As 5 S NSX630
F N H NSX630 H
3 NSX400 3 NSX400
2 2 F, N
6 6 L
10 B F N H S L 10 S NSX250
NSX250 N, H
NSX100 F NSX100
5 NSX160
5 NSX160
3 3
2 2
5 5
10 10
5 5
3 3
2 2
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300
kA rms kA rms
E-14
E-15
Simplicity of catalogue numbers
Compact NSX Catalogue numbers
Contents

Wiring diagrams D-1
NSX100 to 250 F-3
NSX400 to 630 F-29
Order form Compact NSX100 to 630 F-52
Glossary G-1
F-1
559E6000.indd 1 08/10/2008 16:50:34

F-2
Compact NSX Compact NSX100 to 250
Contents
NSX100/160/250B: complete fixed/FC device F-4

Compact NSX100/160/250B (25 kA 380/415 V) F-4
Vigicompact NSX100/160/250B (25 kA 380/415 V) F-5
NSX100/160/250F: complete fixed/FC device F-6

Compact NSX100/160/250F (36 kA 380/415 V) F-6
Vigicompact NSX100/160/250F (36 kA 380/415 V) F-8
NSX100/160/250N: complete fixed/FC device F-9

Compact NSX100/160/250N (50 kA 380/415 V) F-9
NSX100/160/250H: complete fixed/FC device F-11

Compact NSX100/160/250H (70 kA 380/415 V) F-11
NSX100/160/250NA: complete fixed/FC device F-13

Compact NSX100/160/250NA F-13
NSX100/160/250B/F/N/H/S/L: fixed/FC device based

on separate components F-14
Compact and Vigicompact F-14
Trip unit accessories F-16

Compact and Vigicompact NSX100/160/250 F-16
Installation and connection F-17

Accessories F-18
Monitoring and control, test tools F-27

F-3
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250B:
complete fixed/FC device
Compact NSX100/160/250B
(25 kA 380/415 V)
Compact NSX100/160/250B
With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
DB112222
Compact NSX100B (25 kA at 380/415 V)

Rating 3P 2d 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d
TM16D LV429547 LV429557 LV429567 LV429577
TM25D LV429546 LV429556 LV429566 LV429576
TM32D LV429545 LV429555 LV429565 LV429575
TM40D LV429544 LV429554 LV429564 LV429574
TM50D LV429543 LV429553 LV429563 LV429573
TM63D LV429542 LV429552 LV429562 LV429572
TM80D LV429541 LV429551 LV429561 LV429571
TM100D LV429540 LV429550 LV429560 LV429570
TM80D LV430303 LV430313 LV430323 LV430333
TM100D LV430302 LV430312 LV430322 LV430332
TM125D LV430301 LV430311 LV430321 LV430331
TM160D LV430300 LV430310 LV430320 LV430330
TM125D LV431103 LV431113 LV431123 LV431133
TM160D LV431102 LV431112 LV431122 LV431132
TM200D LV431101 LV431111 LV431121 LV431131
TM250D LV431100 LV431110 LV431120 LV431130
With electronic trip unit Micrologic 2.2 (LSOI protection)
DB112223

Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2
40 LV429777 LV429787
100 LV429775 LV429785
100 LV430746 LV430751
160 LV430745 LV430750
100 LV431142 LV431152
160 LV431141 LV431151
250 LV431140 LV431150
With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5.2 A (LSI protection, ammeter)
DB112224

Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2, 3d + OSN
40 LV429872 LV429877
100 LV429870 LV429875
Mode
OK
100 LV430871 LV430876
160 LV430870 LV430875
100 LV431147 LV431157
160 LV431146 LV431156
250 LV431145 LV431155
With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5.2 E (LSI protection, energy meter)
To be ordered with 2 catalogue numbers: 1 basic frame + 1 trip unit
With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6.2 A (LSIG protection, ammeter)

With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6.2 E (LSIG protection, energy meter)
F-4
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250B:
Vigicompact NSX100/160/250B
(25 kA 380/415 V)
Vigicompact NSX100/160/250B
DB112243
Vigicompact NSX100B (25 kA at 380/415 V) equipped with MH Vigi module (200 to 440 V)
Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d 4P 4d
TM16D LV429667 LV429707 LV429967
TM25D LV429666 LV429706 LV429966
TM32D LV429665 LV429705 LV429965
TM40D LV429664 LV429704 LV429964
TM50D LV429663 LV429703 LV429963
TM63D LV429662 LV429702 LV429962
TM80D LV429661 LV429701 LV429961
TM100D LV429660 LV429700 LV429960
TM80D LV430343 LV430353 LV430363
TM100D LV430342 LV430352 LV430362
TM125D LV430341 LV430351 LV430361
TM160D LV430340 LV430350 LV430360
TM125D LV431903 LV431913 LV431963
TM160D LV431902 LV431912 LV431962
TM200D LV431901 LV431911 LV431961
TM250D LV431900 LV431910 LV431960
DB115674
40 LV429975 LV429985
100 LV429974 LV429984
40 LV430962 LV430997
100 LV430961 LV430996
160 LV430960 LV430995
100 LV431977 LV431987
160 LV431976 LV431986
250 LV431975 LV431985
With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5.2 A or 5.2 E (LSI protection, ammeter or energy meter)
F-5
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250F:
Compact NSX100/160/250F
(36 kA 380/415 V)
DB112222
Compact NSX100F (36 kA at 380/415 V)

TM16D LV429627 LV429637 LV429647 LV429657
TM25D LV429626 LV429636 LV429646 LV429656
TM32D LV429625 LV429635 LV429645 LV429655
TM40D LV429624 LV429634 LV429644 LV429654
TM50D LV429623 LV429633 LV429643 LV429653
TM63D LV429622 LV429632 LV429642 LV429652
TM80D LV429621 LV429631 LV429641 LV429651
TM100D LV429620 LV429630 LV429640 LV429650
TM80D LV430623 LV430633 LV430643 LV430653
TM100D LV430622 LV430632 LV430642 LV430652
TM125D LV430621 LV430631 LV430641 LV430651
TM160D LV430620 LV430630 LV430640 LV430650
TM125D LV431623 LV431633 LV431643 LV431653
TM160D LV431622 LV431632 LV431642 LV431652
TM200D LV431621 LV431631 LV431641 LV431651
TM250D LV431620 LV431630 LV431640 LV431650
DB112223

40 LV429772 LV429782
100 LV429770 LV429780
100 LV430771 LV430781
160 LV430770 LV430780
100 LV431772 LV431782
160 LV431771 LV431781
250 LV431770 LV431780
DB112224

40 LV429882 LV429887
100 LV429880 LV429885
Mode
OK
100 LV430881 LV430886
160 LV430880 LV430885
100 LV431862 LV431867
160 LV431861 LV431866
250 LV431860 LV431865

F-6
complete fixed/FC device (cont.)
(36 kA 380/415 V) (cont.)
With magnetic trip unit MA
DB115664

Rating 3P 3d
MA2.5 LV429745
MA6.3 LV429744
MA12.5 LV429743
MA25 LV429742
MA50 LV429741
MA100 LV429740
Rating 3P 3d
MA100 LV430831
MA150 LV430830
Rating 3P 3d
MA150 LV431749
MA220 LV431748
With electronic trip unit Micrologic 2.2-M (LSOI motor protection)
DB112223

Rating 3P 3d
25 LV429828
50 LV429827
100 LV429825
Rating 3P 3d
100 LV430986
150 LV430985
Rating 3P 3d
150 LV431161
220 LV431160
With electronic trip unit Micrologic 6.2 E-M (LSIG motor protection, energy meter)
F-7
Vigicompact NSX100/160/250F
(36 kA 380/415 V)
Vigicompact NSX100/160/250F
DB112243
Vigicompact NSX100F (36 kA at 380/415 V) equipped with MH Vigi module (200 to 440 V)
TM16D LV429937 LV429947 LV429957
TM25D LV429936 LV429946 LV429956
TM32D LV429935 LV429945 LV429955
TM40D LV429934 LV429944 LV429954
TM50D LV429933 LV429943 LV429953
TM63D LV429932 LV429942 LV429952
TM80D LV429931 LV429941 LV429951
TM100D LV429930 LV429940 LV429950
TM80D LV430933 LV430943 LV430953
TM100D LV430932 LV430942 LV430952
TM125D LV430931 LV430941 LV430951
TM160D LV430930 LV430940 LV430950
TM125D LV431933 LV431943 LV431953
TM160D LV431932 LV431942 LV431952
TM200D LV431931 LV431941 LV431951
TM250D LV431930 LV431940 LV431950
DB115674
40 LV429972 LV429982
100 LV429970 LV429980
40 LV430973 LV430983
100 LV430971 LV430981
160 LV430970 LV430980
100 LV431972 LV431982
160 LV431971 LV431981
250 LV431970 LV431980
With electronic trip unit Micrologic 5.2 A or 5.2 E (LSI protection, energy meter)
F-8
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250N:
Compact NSX100/160/250N
(50 kA 380/415 V)
DB112222
Compact NSX100N (50 kA at 380/415 V)

TM16D LV429847 LV429857 LV429867
TM25D LV429846 LV429856 LV429866
TM32D LV429845 LV429855 LV429865
TM40D LV429844 LV429854 LV429864
TM50D LV429843 LV429853 LV429863
TM63D LV429842 LV429852 LV429862
TM80D LV429841 LV429851 LV429861
TM100D LV429840 LV429850 LV429860
TM80D LV430843 LV430853 LV430863
TM100D LV430842 LV430852 LV430862
TM125D LV430841 LV430851 LV430861
TM160D LV430840 LV430850 LV430860
TM125D LV431833 LV431843 LV431853
TM160D LV431832 LV431842 LV431852
TM200D LV431831 LV431841 LV431851
TM250D LV431830 LV431840 LV431850
DB112223

40 LV429797 LV429807
100 LV429795 LV429805
100 LV430776 LV430786
160 LV430775 LV430785
100 LV431872 LV431877
160 LV431871 LV431876
250 LV431870 LV431875
DB112224

Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2, OSN
40 LV429892 LV429897
100 LV429890 LV429895
Mode
OK
100 LV430891 LV430896
160 LV430890 LV430895
100 LV431882 LV431887
160 LV431881 LV431886
250 LV431880 LV431885

F-9
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250N: complete
fixed/FC device (cont.)
(50 kA 380/415 V) (cont.)
DB115664

Rating 3P 3d
MA2.5 LV429755
MA6.3 LV429754
MA12.5 LV429753
MA25 LV429752
MA50 LV429751
MA100 LV429750
Rating 3P 3d
MA100 LV430833
MA150 LV430832
Rating 3P 3d
MA150 LV431753
MA220 LV431752
DB112223

Rating 3P 3d
25 LV429833
50 LV429832
100 LV429830
Rating 3P 3d
100 LV430989
150 LV430988
Rating 3P 3d
150 LV431166
220 LV431165
F-10
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250H:
Compact NSX100/160/250H
(70 kA 380/415 V)
DB112222
Compact NSX100H (70 kA at 380/415 V)

TM16D LV429677 LV429687 LV429697
TM25D LV429676 LV429686 LV429696
TM32D LV429675 LV429685 LV429695
TM40D LV429674 LV429684 LV429694
TM50D LV429673 LV429683 LV429693
TM63D LV429672 LV429682 LV429692
TM80D LV429671 LV429681 LV429691
TM100D LV429670 LV429680 LV429690
TM80D LV430673 LV430683 LV430693
TM100D LV430672 LV430682 LV430692
TM125D LV430671 LV430681 LV430691
TM160D LV430670 LV430680 LV430690
TM125D LV431673 LV431683 LV431693
TM160D LV431672 LV431682 LV431692
TM200D LV431671 LV431681 LV431691
TM250D LV431670 LV431680 LV431690
DB112223

40 LV429792 LV429802
100 LV429790 LV429800
100 LV430791 LV430801
160 LV430790 LV430800
100 LV431792 LV431802
160 LV431791 LV431801
250 LV431790 LV431800
DB112224

40 LV429794 LV429804
100 LV429793 LV429803
Mode
OK
100 LV430795 LV430805
160 LV430794 LV430804
100 LV431797 LV431807
160 LV431796 LV431806
250 LV431795 LV431805

F-11
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250H:
(70 kA 380/415 V) (cont.)
DB115664

Rating 3P 3d
MA2.5 LV429765
MA6.3 LV429764
MA12.5 LV429763
MA25 LV429762
MA50 LV429761
MA100 LV429760
Rating 3P 3d
MA100 LV430835
MA150 LV430834
Rating 3P 3d
MA150 LV431757
MA220 LV431756
DB112223

Rating 3P 3d
25 LV429838
50 LV429837
100 LV429835
Rating 3P 3d
100 LV430992
150 LV430991
Rating 3P 3d
150 LV431171
220 LV431170
F-12
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250NA:
Compact NSX100/160/250NA
Compact NSX100/160/250NA switch-disconnector

With NA switch-disconnector unit
DB112244
Compact NSX100NA
Rating 2P 3P 4P
100 LV429619 LV429629 LV429639
Compact NSX160NA
Rating 2P 3P 4P
160 LV430619 LV430629 LV430639
OK
Compact NSX250NA
Rating
Mode
2P 3P 4P
250 LV431619 LV431629 LV431639
F-13
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250B/F/N/H/S/L:
fixed/FC device based on
separate components
Compact and Vigicompact
Basic frame
DB112245
Compact NSX100
3P 4P
NSX100B (25 kA 380/415 V) LV429014 LV429015
NSX100F (36 kA 380/415 V) LV429003 LV429008
NSX100N (50 kA 380/415 V) LV429006 LV429011
NSX100H (70 kA 380/415 V) LV429004 LV429009
NSX100S (100 kA 380/415 V) LV429018 LV429019
NSX100L (150 kA 380/415 V) LV429005 LV429010
Compact NSX160
3P 4P
NSX160B (25 kA 380/415 V) LV430390 LV430395
NSX160F (36 kA 380/415 V) LV430403 LV430408
NSX160N (50 kA 380/415 V) LV430406 LV430411
NSX160H (70 kA 380/415 V) LV430404 LV430409
NSX160S (100 kA 380/415 V) LV430391 LV430396
NSX160L (150 kA 380/415 V) LV430405 LV430410
Compact NSX250
3P 4P
NSX250B (25 kA 380/415 V) LV431390 LV431395
NSX250F (36 kA 380/415 V) LV431403 LV431408
NSX250N (50 kA 380/415 V) LV431406 LV431411
NSX250H (70 kA 380/415 V) LV431404 LV431409
NSX250S (100 kA 380/415 V) LV431391 LV431396
NSX250L (150 kA 380/415 V) LV431405 LV431410
+ Trip unit
Distribution protection
DB112246
Thermal-magnetic TM-D
TM16D LV429037 LV429047 LV429057
TM25D LV429036 LV429046 LV429056
TM32D LV429035 LV429045 LV429055
TM40D LV429034 LV429044 LV429054
TM50D LV429033 LV429043 LV429053
TM63D LV429032 LV429042 LV429052
TM80D LV429031 LV429041 LV429051
TM100D LV429030 LV429040 LV429050
TM125D LV430431 LV430441 LV430451
TM160D LV430430 LV430440 LV430450
TM200D LV431431 LV431441 LV431451
TM250D LV431430 LV431440 LV431450
DB112247
Micrologic 2.2 (LSOI protection)

Micrologic 2.2 40 A LV429072 LV429082
DB112248
Micrologic 5.2 A (LSI protection, ammeter)

Micrologic 5.2 A 40 A LV429091 LV429101
OK
Mode
Micrologic 5.2 E (LSI protection, energy meter)
Micrologic 5.2 E 40 A LV429096 LV429106
Micrologic 6.2 A (LSIG protection, ammeter)
Micrologic 6.2 E (LSIG protection, energy meter)
F-14
Catalogue numbers NSX100/160/250B/F/N/H/S/L:
fixed/FC device based on
separate components (cont.)
Compact and Vigicompact (cont.)
+ Trip unit (cont.)
Motor protection
DB115666
Magnetic MA (I protection)
Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d
MA2.5 LV429125
MA6.3 LV429124
MA12.5 LV429123
MA25 LV429122
MA50 LV429121
MA100 LV429120 LV429130
MA150 LV430500 LV430510
MA220 LV431500 LV431510
DB112247
Micrologic 2.2-M (LSOI protection)

Rating 3P 3d
Micrologic 2.2-M 25 A LV429174
DB112248
Micrologic 6.2 E-M (LSIG protection, energy meter)

Rating 3P 3d
Micrologic 6.2 E-M 25 A LV429184
OK
Mode
Generator protection
DB112246
Thermal-magnetic TM-G
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
TM16G LV429155 LV429165
TM25G LV429154 LV429164
TM40G LV429153 LV429163
TM63G LV429152 LV429162
DB112247
Micrologic 2.2 G (LSOI protection)

Micrologic 2.2-G 40 A LV429076 LV429086
Protection of public distribution systems
DB112247
Micrologic 2.2 AB (LSOI protection)

Rating 4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2
Micrologic 2.2-AB 100 A LV434550
DB112248
Micrologic 5.2 A-Z (LSI protection, ammeter)

Rating 3P 3d
Micrologic 5.2 A-Z 100 A LV429089
OK
Mode
+ Vigi module or insulation monitoring module

Vigi module
DB112249
3P 4P
ME type for NSX100/160 (200 to 440 V) LV429212 LV429213
MH type for NSX100/160 (200 to 440 V) LV429210 LV429211
MH type for NSX250 (200 to 440 V) LV431535 LV431536
MH type for NSX100/160 (440 to 550 V) LV429215 LV429216
MH type for NSX250 (440 to 550 V) LV431533 LV431534
Connection for a 4P Vigi on a 3P breaker LV429214
DB112249
3P 4P
200 to 440 V AC LV429459 LV429460
Connection for a 4P insulation monitoring LV429214
module on a 3P breaker
F-15
Catalogue numbers Trip unit accessories
NSX100/160/250
Trip unit accessories

External neutral CT for 3 pole breaker with Micrologic 5/6
DB112733
25-100 A LV429521
150-250 A LV430563
24 V DC wiring accessory for Micrologic 5/6

24 V DC power supply connector
DB112730
LV434210
ZSI wiring accessory for NS630b NW with NSX

DB115665
ZSI module LV434212
External power supply module (24 V DC - 1 A), class 4

24-30 V DC
DB112736
54440
48-60 V DC 54441
100-125 V DC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
Battery module
24 V DC battery module
DB112729
54446
L4
L3 Inpu
t
24VDC
Output
AD 24VDC G2
220A
G1
F-16
Catalogue numbers Installation and connection
NSX100/160/250
Fixed/RC device = fixed/FC device + rear connection kit

DB112251
Short RC kit
Kit 3P 3 x LV429235
Kit 4P 4 x LV429235
Mixed RC kit
Kit 3P Short RCs 2x LV429235
Long RCs 1x LV429236
Plug-in version = fixed/FC device + plug-in kit

Kit for Compact
DB112252
2P (3P) 3P 4P
Plug-in kit LV429288 LV429289 LV429290
Comprising:
Base = 1 x LV429265 = 1 x LV429266 = 1 x LV429267
Power connections + 2 x LV429268 + 3 x LV429268 + 4 x LV429268
Short terminal shields + 2 x LV429515 + 2 x LV429515 + 2 x LV429516
Safety trip interlock + 1 x LV429270 + 1 x LV429270 + 1 x LV429270
Kit for Vigicompact

DB112253
3P 4P
Vigicompact plug-in kit LV429291 LV429292
Comprising:
Base = 1 x LV429266 = 1 x LV429267
Power connections + 3 x LV429269 + 4 x LV429269
Short terminal shields + 2 x LV429515 + 2 x LV429516
Safety trip interlock + 1 x LV429270 + 1 x LV429270
Withdrawable version = fixed/FC device + withdrawable kit

Kit for Compact
DB112731
2P (3P) 3P 4P
Kit for Compact Kit for Compact Kit for Compact
= = =
Plug-in kit 1 x LV429288 1 x LV429289 1 x LV429290
+ + +
Chassis side plates 1 x LV429282 1 x LV429282 1 x LV429282
for base + + +
Chassis side plates 1 x LV429283 1 x LV429283 1 x LV429283
for breaker
Kit for Vigicompact

DB112732
3P 4P
Kit for Vigicompact Kit for Vigicompact
= =
Plug-in kit 1 x LV429291 1 x LV429292
+ +
Chassis side plates 1 x LV429282 1 x LV429282
for base + +
for breaker
F-17
Catalogue numbers Accessories
NSX100/160/250
Connection accessories (Cu or Al)

Rear connections
DB112225
2 short LV429235
2 long LV429236
Bare cable connectors

1 x (1.5 to 95 mm) ; y 160 A
DB112226
Steel connectors Set of 3 LV429242

Set of 4 LV429243
1 x (25 to 95 mm) ; y 250 A

DB112225
Aluminium connectors Set of 3 LV429227

Set of 4 LV429228
1 x (120 to 185 mm) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429259
Set of 4 LV429260
DB112726
Clips for connectors Set of 10 LV429241
Aluminium connectors for 2 cables (1) 2 x (50 to 120 mm) ; y 250 A

DB112227
Set of 3 LV429218
Set of 4 LV429219
Aluminium connectors (1) for 6 cables 6 x (1.5 to 35 mm) ; y 250 A

DB112228
Set of 3 LV429248
Set of 4 LV429249
DB112724
6.35 mm voltage tap for steel or aluminium connectors Set of 10 LV429348
"Polybloc" distribution block (for bare cable)

160 A (40 C) 6 cables S y 10 mm
DB115613
1P 04031
250 A (40 C) 9 cables S y 10 mm 3P 04033
4P 04034
Terminal extensions
45 terminal extension (1)
DB112230
Set of 3 LV429223
Set of 4 LV429224
Edgewise terminal extensions (1)

DB112231
Set of 3 LV429308
Set of 4 LV429309
Right-angle terminal extensions (1)

DB112232
Set of 3 LV429261
Set of 4 LV429262
Straight terminal extensions (1)

DB112233
Set of 3 LV429263
Set of 4 LV429264
Double-L terminal extensions (1)

DB112234
Set of 3 LV429221
Set of 4 LV429222
Spreaders from 35 to 45 mm pitch (1)

DB112235
3P LV431563
4P LV431564
DB112236
One-piece spreader from 35 to 45 mm pitch 3P LV431060

4P LV431061
Front alignment base (for one-piece spreader) 3P/4P LV431064
(1) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.
F-18
Catalogue numbers Accessories (cont.)
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)
Crimp lugs for copper cable (1)

DB112237
For cable 120 mm Set of 3 LV429252

Set of 4 LV429256
Set of 4 LV429257
Set of 4 LV429258
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable (1)
DB112238

Set of 4 LV429505
Set of 4 LV429507
Insulation accessories
DB112239
1 short terminal shield for breaker or plug-in base 3P LV429515

4P LV429516
DB112240
1 long terminal shield for breaker or plug-in base 3P LV429517

4P LV429518
DB112241
Interphase barriers for breaker or plug-in base Set of 6 LV429329

DB112734
Connection adapter for plug-in base 3P LV429306

4P LV429307
DB112242
2 insulating screens for breaker (45 mm pitch) 3P LV429330

4P LV429331
F-19
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
OF or SD or SDE or SDV
DB112254
29450
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
SDE adapter, mandatory for trip unit TM, MA or Micrologic 2 LV429451
SDx output module for Micrologic

SDx module 24/415 V AC/DC
DB112275
LV429532
SDTAM contactor tripping module (early-break thermal fault signal) for Micrologic 2.2-M/6.2 E-M
SDTAM 24/415 V AC/DC overload fault indication
DB112276
LV429424
Voltage releases
DB111454
Voltage MX MN
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV429384 LV429404
48 V 50/60 Hz LV429385 LV429405
110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429386 LV429406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz and 208-277 V 60 Hz LV429387 LV429407
380-415 V 50 Hz and 440-480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408
525 V 50 Hz and 600 V 60 Hz LV429389 LV429409
DC 12 V LV429382 LV429402
24 V LV429390 LV429410
30 V LV429391 LV429411
48 V LV429392 LV429412
60 V LV429383 LV429403
125 V LV429393 LV429413
250 V LV429394 LV429414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
DB115631
Composed of: MN 48 V DC LV429412

Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz LV429426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
Delay unit 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429427
MN 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 33680
MN110-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 110-130 V 50/60 Hz 33681
MN 220-250 V 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 220-250 V 50/60 Hz 33682
F-20
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)
Motor mechanism
Motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
DB115690
Voltage MT100/160 MT250

AC 48-60 V 50/60 Hz LV429440 LV431548
110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429433 LV431540
220-240 V 50/60 Hz and LV429434 LV431541
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50/60 Hz and LV429435 LV431542
440-480 V 60 Hz
DC 24-30 V LV429436 LV431543
48-60 V LV429437 LV431544
110-130 V LV429438 LV431545
250 V LV429439 LV431546
Communicating motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Motor mechanism module MTc 100/160 220-240 V 50/60 Hz
DB112265
LV429441
MTc 250 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV431549
+
Breaker and Status BSCM LV434205
Communication Module
+
NSX cord Wire length L = 0.35 m LV434200
Wire length L = 1.3 m LV434201
Wire length L = 3 m LV434202
U > 480 V AC wire length L = 0.35 m LV434204
F-21
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)

Ammeter module
Rating (A)
DB112256
100 160 250

3P LV429455 LV430555 LV431565
4P LV429456 LV430556 LV431566
I max. ammeter module

Rating (A)
DB112256
100 160 250

3P LV434849 LV434850 LV434851
Current transformer module

Rating (A)
DB112257
125 150 250

3P LV429457 LV430557 LV431567
4P LV429458 LV430558 LV431568
Current transformer module and voltage output

Rating (A)
DB112257
125 150 250

3P LV429461 LV430561 LV431569
4P LV429462 LV430562 LV431570
Voltage presence indicator

3P/4P
DB112258
LV429325
Rotary handles
Direct rotary handle
DB112259
With black handle LV429337

With red handle on yellow front LV429339
MCC conversion accessory LV429341
CNOMO conversion accessory LV429342

DB112260

With telescopic handle for withdrawable device LV429343
Accessories for direct or extended rotary handle

Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact LV429345
2 early-make contacts LV429346
F-22
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)
Locks
Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
DB112261
By removable device 29370
By fixed device
DB112262
LV429371
Locking of rotary handle

Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
DB112263
LV429344
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
Locking of motor mechanism module

Keylock adapter + Ronis keylock (special)
DB112264
LV429449
F-23
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)
Interlocking
Mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers
DB111486
With toggles LV429354

DB111487
With rotary handles LV429369
Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles

Keylock kit (keylock not included) (1)
DB112268
LV429344
1 set of 2 keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 41950
(1 key only, keylock kit not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878
Installation accessories
Front-panel escutcheons
DB112269
IP30 escutcheon for all control types LV429525

IP30 trip unit access escutcheon for toggle LV429526
IP30 escutcheon for Vigi module LV429527
IP30
DB112737

IP40 escutcheon for Vigi or ammeter module LV429318
IP40
IP43 rubber toggle cover

DB112738
1 toggle cover LV429319
Lead-sealing accessories
DB115615
Bag of accessories LV429375
Din rail adapter

DB112739
1 adapter LV429305
60 mm busbar adapter
DB111428
3P 60 mm busbar adapter 29372
(1) For only 1 device.
F-24
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)
Plug-in/withdrawable version accessories

DB117159
1 connection adapter for plug-in base 3P LV429306

4P LV429307
Auxiliary connections
1 9-wire fixed connector (for base)
DB117160
LV429273
DB117161
1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker) LV429274

DB117162
1 support for 2 moving connectors LV429275
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)

DB115885
LV429272
Plug-in base accessories

DB117164
2 long insulated right angle terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429276

DB117165
2 IP40 shutters for base LV429271

DB117166
Base 2P LV429265
3P LV429266
DB117167
Base 4P LV429267
2/3/4P
DB117168
2 power connections LV429268
2/3P
DB117169
1 short terminal shield LV429515

DB117170
1 short terminal shield 4P LV429516
2/3/4P
DB117171
1 safety trip interlock LV429270
Chassis accessories
DB117172
Escutcheon collar Toggle LV429284

DB117173
Escutcheon collar Vigi module LV429285

DB117163
Locking kit (keylock not included) LV429286

2 carriage switches (connected/disconnected position indication)

DB111426
LV429287
F-25
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)
Spare parts
DB111430
10 spare toggle extensions (NSX250) LV429313

DB115620
Bag of screws LV429312
12 snap-in nuts (fixed/FC) M6 for NSX100N/H/L

DB111431
LV429234
M8 for NSX160/250N/H/L LV430554
NS retrofit escutcheon
DB111432
Small cut-out LV429528
Compact NS type/small cut-out

DB111433
IP40 toggle escutcheon 29315
1 set of 10 identification labels

DB111438
LV429226
DB111429
1 base for extended rotary handle LV429502
3P/4P Compact NSX100-250

DB111434
Torque limiting screws (set of 12) LV429513
LCD display for electronic trip unit

DB111435
Micrologic 5 LV429483
Mod
e
OK
Micrologic 6 E-M LV429486
DB111436
5 transparent covers for trip unit TM, MA, NA LV429481

Micrologic 5/6 LV429478
5 opaque covers for Micrologic 5/6
DB115886
LV429479
Individual enclosures
IP55 steel enclosure
Compact NSX100/160 with black extended rotary handle
DB112270
LV431215
Compact NSX100/160 with red and yellow extended rotary handle LV431216
Compact NSX250 or Vigicompact NSX100-250 with black extended rotary handle LV431217
Compact NSX250 or Vigicompact NSX100-250 with red and yellow extended rotary handle LV431218
IP55 insulating enclosure

Compact NXS100/160 with black extended rotary handle
DB112271
LV429465
Vigicompact NXS100/160 with black extended rotary handle LV429466
Compact NXS250 with black extended rotary handle LV431573
Vigicompact NXS250 with black extended rotary handle LV431574
Visible break disconnect function

See catalogue dealing with "Interpact INV products (visible break)" and the associated accessories.
The visible break disconnection function is compatible with fixed front-connected/rear-connected Compact NSX devices.
F-26
Catalogue numbers Monitoring and control, test tools
NSX100/160/250
Monitoring and control (remote operation)

Circuit breaker accessories
BSCM (1)
DB111439
Breaker Status Control Module LV434205
ULP display module (2)

Switchboard front display module FDM121
DB111440
TRV00121
FDM mounting accessory (diameter 22 mm) TRV00128
ULP communication module

DB111441
Modbus interface Modbus SL communication interface module TRV00210
ULP wiring accessories

NSX cord L = 0.35 m
DB111442
LV434200
NSX cord L = 1.3 m LV434201
NSX cord L = 3 m LV434202
NSX cord for U > 480 V AC L = 1.3 m LV434204
DB115621
10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules TRV00217
(3)
DB111443
10 Modbus line terminators VW3A8306DRC
RS 485 roll cable (4 wires, length 60 m)

DB115622
50965
5 RJ45 connectors female/female

DB115623
TRV00870
10 ULP line terminators

DB111444
TRV00880
10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.3 m

DB111445
TRV00803
10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.6 m TRV00806
5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 1 m TRV00810
Power supply modules
External power supply module 100-240 V AC 110-230 V DC / 24 V DC-3 A class 2 (3)
DB112278
ABL8RPS24030
External power supply module 24 V DC-1 A OVC IV

DB112736
24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
100-125 V AC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
Battery module
DB112729
54446
L4
L3 Inpu
t
24VDC
Output
AD 24VDC G2
220A
G1
(1) SDE adapter mandatory for trip unit TM, MA or Micrologic 2 (LV429451).
(2) For measurement display with Micrologic A and E or status display with BSCM.
(3) See Telemecanique catalogue.
F-27
Catalogue numbers Monitoring and control,
test tools (cont.)
NSX100/160/250 (cont.)
Test tool, software, demo
Test tool
DB111449
Pocket battery for Micrologic NSX100-630 LV434206

0
Test
DB111451
Maintenance case TRV00910

Comprising:
- USB maintenance interface
- Power supply
- Micrologic cord
- USB cord
- RJ45/RJ45 male cord
Spare USB maintenance interface

DB111450
TRV00911
DB111452
Spare power supply 110-240 V AC TRV00915
Spare Micrologic cord for USB maintenance interface

DB111453
TRV00917
Bluetooth/Modbus option for USB maintenance interface (1)

DB111448
VW3A8114
Software
Configuration and setting software RSU (2)
DB117158
LV4ST100
Test software LTU LV4ST121 (2)
Monitoring software RCU LV4SM100 (2)
Demo tool
Demo case for Compact NSX LV434207
(2) Downloadable from http://schneider-electric.com.
F-28
Compact NSX Compact NSX400 to 630
Contents
NSX400/630F: complete fixed/FC device F-30

Compact NSX400/630F (36 kA 380/415 V) F-30
Vigicompact NSX400/630F (36 kA 380/415 V) F-31
NSX400/630N: complete fixed/FC device F-32

Compact NSX400/630N (50 kA 380/415 V) F-32
Vigicompact NSX400/630N (50 kA 380/415 V) F-33
NSX400/630H: complete fixed/FC device F-34

Compact NSX400/630H (70 kA 380/415 V) F-34
NSX400/630NA: complete fixed/FC device F-35

Compact NSX400/630NA F-35
NSX400/630F/N/H/S/L: fixed/FC device based

on separate components F-36
Compact and Vigicompact F-36
Trip unit accessories F-37

Compact and Vigicompact NSX400/630 F-37
Installation and connection F-38

Accessories F-40
Monitoring and control, test tools F-49

Spare Parts F-51

User manuals F-51
F-29
Catalogue numbers NSX400/630F:
Compact NSX400/630F
(36 kA 380/415 V)
Compact NSX400/630F
Electronic trip unit Micrologic 2.3 (LSOI protection)
4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2
DB111455
3P 3d
Compact NSX400F (36 kA at 380/415 V) 250 A LV432682 LV432683
400 A LV432676 LV432677
Electronic trip unit Micrologic 5.3 A (LSI protection, ammeter)

4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2, 3d + OSN
DB111456
3P 3d
OK
Mode
Electronic trip unit Micrologic 1.3-M (I motor protection)

DB111457
3P 3d
Compact NSX400F 1.3-M (36 kA at 380/415V) 320 A LV432748
Electronic trip unit Micrologic 2.3-M (LSOI motor protection)

DB111457
3P 3d

F-30
Catalogue numbers NSX400/630F:
Vigicompact NSX400/630F
(36 kA 380/415 V)
Vigicompact NSX400/630F
4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2
DB111458
3P 3d
Vigicompact NSX400F (36 kA at 380/415 V) 400 A LV432731 LV432732
Vigicompact NSX630F (36 kA at 380/415 V) 630 A LV432931 LV432932
OK
Mode

F-31
Catalogue numbers NSX400/630N:
Compact NSX400/630N
(50 kA 380/415 V)
Compact NSX400/630N
4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2
DB111455
3P 3d
Compact NSX400N (50 kA at 380/415 V) 250 A LV432707 LV432708
400 A LV432693 LV432694

4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2, 3d + OSN
DB111456
3P 3d
OK
Mode
Electronic trip unit Micrologic 1.3-M A (I motor protection)

DB111457
3P 3d
Compact NSX400N 1.3-M (50 kA at 380/415V) 320 A LV432749

DB111457
3P 3d

F-32
Catalogue numbers NSX400/630N:
Vigicompact NSX400/630N
(50 kA 380/415 V)
Vigicompact NSX400/630N
4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2
DB111458
3P 3d
Vigicompact NSX400N (50 kA at 380/415 V) 400 A LV432733 LV432734
Vigicompact NSX630N (50 kA at 380/415 V) 630 A LV432933 LV432934
OK
Mode
F-33
Catalogue numbers NSX400/630H:
Compact NSX400/630H
(70 kA 380/415 V)
Compact NSX400/630H
4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2
DB111455
3P 3d
Compact NSX400H (70 kA at 380/415 V) 250 A LV432709 LV432710
400 A LV432695 LV432696

4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2, 3d + OSN
DB111456
3P 3d
OK
Mode
Electronic trip unit Micrologic 1.3-M (I motor protection)

DB111457
3P 3d
Compact NSX400H 1.3-M (70 kA at 380/415V) 320 A LV432750

DB111457
3P 3d
Only available as separate components.
Only available as separate components.
F-34
Catalogue numbers NSX400/630NA:
Compact NSX400/630NA
Compact NSX400/630 0.3 NA switch-disconnector

With 0.3 NA switch-disconnector unit
DB111459
3P 4P
Compact NSX400 0.3 NA LV432756 LV432757
Compact NSX630 0.3 NA, 45 mm pitch LV432956 LV432957
F-35
Catalogue numbers NSX400/630F/N/H/S/L: fixed/
FC device based on separate
components
Basic frame
DB111460
Compact NSX400
3P 4P
NSX400F (36 kA 380/415 V) LV432413 LV432415
NSX400N (50 kA 380/415 V) LV432403 LV432408
NSX400H (70 kA 380/415 V) LV432404 LV432409
NSX400S (100 kA 380/415 V) LV432414 LV432416
NSX400L (150 kA 380/415 V) LV432405 LV432410
Compact NSX630
3P 4P
NSX630F (36 kA 380/415 V) LV432813 LV432815
NSX630N (50 kA 380/415 V) LV432803 LV432808
NSX630H (70 kA 380/415 V) LV432804 LV432809
NSX630S (100 kA 380/415 V) LV432814 LV432816
NSX630L (150 kA 380/415 V) LV432805 LV432810
+ Trip unit
Distribution protection
DB111461
Micrologic 2.3 (LSOI protection)

DB111462
Micrologic 5.3 A (LSI protection, ammeter)

OK
Mode
Micrologic 5.3 E (LSI protection, energy meter)

DB111462
Micrologic 6.3 A (LSIG protection, ammeter)

OK
Mode
Micrologic 6.3 E (LSIG protection, energy meter)

Motor protection
DB111463
Micrologic 1.3-M (I protection)

Rating 3P 3d 4P 3d
Micrologic 1.3-M 320 A LV432069 LV432078
Micrologic 1.3-M 500 A LV432068 LV432077
DB111461
Micrologic 2.3-M (LSOI protection)

Rating 3P 3d
DB111462
Micrologic 6.3 E-M (LSIG protection, energy meter)

Rating 3P 3d
OK
Mode
Protection of public distribution systems

Micrologic 2.3-AB (LSOI protection)
Rating 4P 3d, 4d, 3d + N/2
Micrologic 2.3 400 A LV434557
Micrologic 5.3 A-Z (LSI protection, ammeter)
Rating 3P 3d
F-36
Catalogue numbers Trip unit accessories
Compact and Vigicompact NSX400/630
+ Vigi module or insulation monitoring module

Vigi module
DB111464
3P 4P
Type MB 200 to 440 V LV432455 LV432456
440 to 550 V LV432453 LV432454
Connection for a 4P Vigi on a 3P breaker LV432457

DB111464
3P 4P
200 to 440 V AC LV432659 LV432660
Connection for a 4P insulation monitoring LV432457
module on a 3P breaker
Trip unit accessories

External neutral CT for 3 pole breaker with Micrologic 5/6
DB112277
400-630 A LV432575
24 V DC wiring accessory for Micrologic 5/6

24 V DC power supply connector
DB112730
LV434210
ZSI accessory for NS630b-NW with NSX

DB115665
ZSI module LV434212
External power supply module (24 V DC - 1 A), class 4

24-30 V DC
DB112736
54440
48-60 V DC 54441
100-125 V DC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
Battery module
DB112729
54446
L4
L3 Inpu
t
24VDC
Output
AD 24VDC G2
220A
G1
F-37
Catalogue numbers Installation and connection
Fixed/RC device = fixed/FC device + rear connection kit

Mixed RC kit
Kit 3P Short RCs
DB111465
2x LV432475
Fixed/FC device with 52.5 mm or 70 mm pitch = fixed/FC device with 45 mm pitch + spreaders
The pitch of all Compact and Vigicompact NSX400/630 devices is 45 mm. Spreaders are available for fixed front, plug-in or withdrawable connection with pitch of
52.5 mm or 70 mm.
Upstream or downstream spreaders (1)

DB111466
52.5 mm 3P LV432490
4P LV432491
70 mm 3P LV432492
4P LV432493
Plug-in version = fixed/FC device + plug-in kit
Kit for Compact
DB111467
3P 4P
Plug-in kit LV432538 LV432539
Comprising:
Base = 1 x LV432516 = 1 x LV432517
Kit for Vigicompact

DB111469
3P 4P
Vigi plug-in kit LV432540 LV432541
Comprising:
Base = 1 x LV432516 = 1 x LV432517
F-38
Catalogue numbers Installation and connection (cont.)
NSX400/630 (cont.)
Withdrawable version = fixed/FC device + withdrawable kit

Kit for Compact
DB111468
3P 4P
Kit for Compact Kit for Compact
= =
Plug-in kit: 1 x LV432538 1 x LV432539
+ +
for base + +
for breaker
Kit for Vigicompact

DB117174
3P 4P
Kit for Vigicompact Kit for Vigicompact
= =
Plug-in kit: 1 x LV432540 1 x LV432541
+ +
for base + +
for breaker
F-39
Catalogue numbers Accessories
Connection accessories (Cu or Al)

Rear connections
DB111471
2 short LV432475
2 long LV432476
Bare cable connectors (1)

DB115624
Aluminium connectors 1 x (35 to 300 mm) Set of 3 LV432479

Set of 4 LV432480
DB115625
Aluminium connectors for 2 cables 2 x (35 to 300 mm) Set of 3 LV432481

Set of 4 LV432482
DB112724
6.35 mm voltage tap for steel or aluminium connectors Set of 10 LV429348
Terminal extensions (1)

DB115649
45 terminal extensions Set of 3 LV432586

Set of 4 LV432587
DB115650
Edgewise terminal extensions Set of 3 LV432486

Set of 4 LV432487
Right-angle terminal extensions

DB115651
Set of 3 LV432484
Set of 4 LV432485
DB115652
Spreaders 52.5 mm 3P LV432490

4P LV432491
70 mm 3P LV432492
4P LV432493
Crimp lugs for copper cable (1)
DB112237

Set of 4 LV432501
Set of 4 LV432503
Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable (1)
DB112238

Set of 4 LV432505
Set of 4 LV432507
Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers
F-40
NSX400/630 (cont.)
DB111472
Short terminal shield, 45 mm (1 piece) 3P LV432591

4P LV432592
DB111473
Long terminal shield, 45 mm (1 piece) 3P LV432593

4P LV432594
DB115626
Long terminal shield for spreaders, 52.5 mm (1 piece) (supplied with insulating plate) 3 P LV432595
4P LV432596
DB115632
Interphase barriers Set of 6 LV432570

DB115627

4P LV432585
DB115628
2 insulating screens (70 mm pitch) 3P LV432578

4P LV432579
F-41
NSX400/630 (cont.)
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
OF or SD or SDE or SDV
DB112254
29450
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
SDx output module for Micrologic electronic trip unit

SDx module 24/415 V AC/DC
DB112275
LV429532
SDTAM contactor tripping module (early-break thermal fault signal) for Micrologic 2.3-M/6.3 E-M
SDTAM 24/415 V AC/DC overload fault indication
DB112276
LV429424
Voltage releases
DB111454
Voltage MX MN
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV429384 LV429404
48 V 50/60 Hz LV429385 LV429405
110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429386 LV429406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz and 208-277 V 60 Hz LV429387 LV429407
380-415 V 50 Hz and 440-480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408
525 V 50 Hz and 600 V 60 Hz LV429389 LV429409
DC 12 V LV429382 LV429402
24 V LV429390 LV429410
30 V LV429391 LV429411
48 V LV429392 LV429412
60 V LV429383 LV429403
125 V LV429393 LV429413
250 V LV429394 LV429414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
DB115631

Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz LV429426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
Delay unit 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429427
MN 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 33680
MN110-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 110-130 V 50/60 Hz 33681
MN 220-250 V 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 220-250 V 50/60 Hz 33682
F-42
NSX400/630 (cont.)
Motor mechanism
Motor mechanism module
DB111475
Voltage MT400-630
AC 48-60 V 50/60 Hz LV432639
110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV432640
220-240 V 50/60 Hz and 208-277 V 60 Hz LV432641
380-415 V 50 Hz LV432642
440-480 V 60 Hz LV432647
5...8
DC 24-30 V LV432643
man
u
auto
48-60 V LV432644
110-130 V LV432645
250 V LV432646
Operation counter LV432648
Communicating motor mechanism module
Motor mechanism module MTc 400/630 220-240 V 50/60 Hz
DB111476
LV432652
5...8
+
auto
u
man
Breaker status BSCM LV434205

Communication Module
+
NSX cord Wire length L = 0.35 m LV434200
Wire length L = 1.3 m LV434201
Wire length L = 3 m LV434202
U > 480 V AC wire length L = 0.35 m LV434204
F-43
NSX400/630 (cont.)

Ammeter module
Rating (A)
DB111477
400 630
3P LV432655 LV432855
4P LV432656 LV432856
A
I max. ammeter module

Rating (A)
DB111477
400 630
3P LV434852 LV434853
Current transformer module

Rating (A)
DB117179
400 600
3P LV432657 LV432857
4P LV432658 LV432858
Current transformer module and voltage output

Rating (A)
DB117179
400 600
3P LV432653 LV432861
4P LV432654 LV432862
Voltage presence indicator

3P/4P
DB111479
LV432566
Rotary handles
Direct rotary handle
DB111480

MCC conversion accessory LV432606
CNOMO conversion accessory LV432602

DB111481

With telescopic handle for withdrawable device LV432603
Accessories for direct or extended rotary handle

Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact LV432605
2 early-make contacts LV429346
F-44
NSX400/630 (cont.)
Locks
Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
DB111483
By removable device 29370
By fixed device
DB111482
LV432631
Locking of rotary handle

DB111484
LV432604
Locking of motor mechanism module

DB111485
LV432649
F-45
NSX400/630 (cont.)
Interlocking
Mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers
DB111486
With toggles LV432614

DB111487
With rotary handles LV432621
Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles

Keylock kit (keylock not included) (1)
DB112268
LV432604
1 set of 2 keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 41950
(1 key only, keylock kit not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878
Installation accessories
Front-panel escutcheons
DB111488

IP30 trip unit access escutcheon for toggle LV432559
IP30
DB111489

IP40 escutcheon for Vigi or ammeter module LV429318
IP40
IP43 rubber toggle cover
DB111490
1 toggle cover LV432560
Lead-sealing accessories
DB115615
Bag of accessories LV429375
60 mm busbar adapter
DB111491
3P 60 mm busbar adapter 32623

L3
L2
L1
20 Nm
L2
20 Nm
L3
20 Nm
L3
2
L2
L1
(1) For only 1 device.
F-46
NSX400/630 (cont.)
Plug-in/withdrawable version accessories

DB117159

4P LV432585
Auxiliary connections
1 9-wire fixed connector (for base)
DB117160
LV429273
DB117161
1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker) LV432523

DB116368
1 support for 3 moving connectors LV432525
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)

DB115885
LV429272
Plug-in base accessories

DB117164
Long insulated right angle terminal extensions Set of 2 LV432526

DB117165
2 IP40 shutters for base LV432521
Base 3P LV432516
DB117180
DB117181
Base 4P LV432517
3/4P
DB117182
Power connections LV432518

DB117183
Short terminal shields 3P LV432591

DB117184
Short terminal shields 4P LV432592
3/4P
DB117171
Safety trip interlock LV432520
Chassis accessories
DB117172
Escutcheon collar Toggle LV432534

DB117173
Escutcheon collar Vigi module LV429285

DB117163
Locking kit (keylock not included) LV429286

2 carriage switches (connected/disconnected position indication)

DB111426
LV429287
F-47
NSX400/630 (cont.)
Spare parts
Additional toggle extension for NSX400/630
DB115633
32595
DB111430
5 spare toggle extensions LV432553

DB115620
Bag of screws LV432552
Compact NS retrofit escutcheon

DB111493
Small cut-out LV432571
Compact NS type/small cut-out

DB111433
IP40 toggle escutcheon 32556
3P/4P Compact NSX400-630

DB111434
Torque limiting screws (set of 12) LV432513
1 set of 10 identification labels

DB111438
LV429226
DB111495
1 base for extended rotary handle LV432498
LCD display for electronic trip unit

DB111435
Mod
e
OK
Micrologic E-M LV429486
DB111436
5 transparent covers for electronic trip unit Micrologic 2 LV432459

Micrologic 5/6 LV432461
5 opaque covers for Micrologic 5/6

DB115907
LV432460
Individual enclosures
IP55 steel enclosure
DB111496
Compact NSX400 with black extended rotary handle LV431219

Compact NSX400 with red and yellow extended rotary handle LV431220
Compact NSX630 or Vigicompact NSX400/630 with black extended rotary handle LV431221
Compact NSX630 or Vigicompact NSX400/630 with red and yellow extended rotary handle LV431222
IP55 insulating enclosure

Compact NSX400/630 with black extended rotary handle
DB111497
LV432665
Vigicompact NSX400/630 with black extended rotary handle LV432666
Visible break disconnect function

See catalogue dealing with "Interpact INV products (visible break)" and the associated accessories.
The visible break disconnection function is compatible with fixed front-connected/rear-connected Compact NSX devices.
F-48
Catalogue numbers Monitoring and control, test tools
NSX400/630
Monitoring and control (remote operation)

Circuit breaker accessories
DB111439
Breaker Status Control Module BSCM LV434205
ULP display module (1)

Switchboard front display module FDM121
DB111440
TRV00121
FDM mounting accessory (diameter 22 mm) TRV00128
ULP communication module

DB111441
Modbus interface Modbus SL communication interface module TRV00210
ULP wiring accessories

NSX cord L = 0.35 m
DB111442
LV434200
NSX cord L = 1.3 m LV434201
NSX cord L = 3 m LV434202
NSX cord for U > 480 V AC L = 1.3 m LV434204
DB115621
10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules TRV00217
(2)
DB111443
10 Modbus line terminators VW3A8306DRC
RS 485 roll cable (4 wires, length 60 m)

DB115622
50965
5 RJ45 connectors female/female

DB115623
TRV00870
10 ULP line terminators

DB111444
TRV00880
10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.3 m

DB111445
TRV00803
10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.6 m TRV00806
Power supply modules
External power supply module 100-240 V AC 110-230 V DC / 24 V DC-3 A class 2 (2)
DB112278
ABL8RPS24030
External power supply module 24 V DC-1 A OVC IV

DB112736
24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
100-125 V AC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
Battery module
DB112729
54446
L4
L3 Inpu
t
24VDC
Output
AD 24VDC G2
220A
G1
(1) For measurement display with Micrologic A and E or status display with BSCM.
F-49
Catalogue numbers Monitoring and control, test
tools (cont.)
NSX400/630 (cont.)
Test tool, software, demo
Test tool
DB111449
Pocket battery for Micrologic NSX100-630 LV434206

0
Test
DB111451
Maintenance case TRV00910

Comprising:
- USB maintenance interface
- Power supply
- Micrologic cord
- USB cord
- RJ45/RJ45 male cord
Spare USB maintenance interface

DB111450
TRV00911
DB111452
Spare power supply 110-240 V AC TRV00915
Spare Micrologic cord for USB maintenance interface

DB111453
TRV00917
Bluetooth/Modbus option for USB maintenance interface (1)

DB111448
VW3A8114
Software
Configuration and setting software RSU (2)
DB117158
LV4ST100
Test software LTU LV4ST121 (2)
Monitoring software RCU LV4SM100 (2)
Demo tool
Demo case for Compact NSX LV434207
(2) Downloadable from http://schneider-electric.com.
F-50
Catalogue numbers COMPACT NSX
Spare Parts
Instructions
User manual
Circuit breaker (French) LV434100
(English) LV434101
Micrologic 5.6 (French) LV434103
(English) LV434104
Modbus (French) LV434106
(English) LV434107
ULP (French) TRV99100
(English) TRV99101
F-51
Order form Compact NSX100 to NSX630
Circuit breakers and switch-
disconnectors
To indicate your choices, check the applicable square boxes Indication and measurement
or note the quantity Ammeter module standard 3P 4P
and enter the appropriate information in the rectangles I max 3P
Current-transformer module 3P 4P
Circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Current-transformer module + TCU 3P 4P
Compact type NSX100/160/250 Insulation-monitoring module 3P 4P
NSX400/630 Voltage-presence indicator
Rating A Auxiliary contact OF, SD, SDE or SDV Standard Low level
Circuit breaker B, F, N, H, S, L SDE adapter (TM, MA or Micrologic 2 trip units)
Switch-disconnector NA SDX module
Number of poles 2, 3 or 4 Remote operation
Number of poles tripped 2d, 3d or 4d Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
Fixed device Front connections Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
Plug-in/withdr. Plug-in Withdrawable MN AC DC V
Earth-leakage protection ME, MH, MB Fixed time delay MN AC DC V
Vigi module Voltage V Adjust. time delay MN AC DC V
4P option on 3P NSX Rotary handles
Trip unit Direct Black Red and yellow front
Thermal-mag. TMD rating (16 ... 250 A) MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
TMG rating (16 ... 63 A) Extended Black Red and yellow front
MA rating (2.5 ... 220 A) Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
Electronic Micrologic 2.2 Micrologic 2.3 Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-make switches
Micrologic 2.2-G Micrologic 2.3-AB Locking
Micrologic 2.2-AB Micrologic 5.3 A Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed
Micrologic 5.2 A Micrologic 5.3 E Rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
Micrologic 5.2 E Micrologic 5.3 A-Z Keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Micrologic 5.2 A-Z Micrologic 6.3 A Motor mechanism Keylock adapter + keylock Ronis (special) NSX100/250
Micrologic 6.2 A Micrologic 6.3 E Keylock adapter (keylock not included) NSX400/630
Micrologic 6.2 E Micrologic 1.3 M Keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Micrologic 2.2 M Micrologic 2.3 M Interlocking
Micrologic 6.2 E-M Micrologic 6.3 E-M Mechanical Toggle operated Rotary Handle
SDTAM Module By key (2 keylocks, 1 key) Locking kit without locks
External neutral CT for rotary handle Keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
24 V DC power supply connector Installation accessories
ZSI wiring accessory for NSX630b NW/NT IP30 escutcheon for all types (toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism)
External power supply module 24 V DC IP30 escutcheon (with access to toggle + trip unit)
24-30 V DC 48-60 V DC IP30 escutcheon for Vigi module
100-125 V AC 110-130 V AC IP40 escutcheon for all types (toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism)
200-240 V AC 380-415 V AC IP40 escutcheon for Vigi module
Battery module IP40 escutcheon for Vigi or ammeter module
Connection Toggle cover
Rear-connection kit Short Long Sealing accessories
Mixed DIN rail adapter NSX100/250
NSX100/250 connectors Snap-on 1.5v to 95v (< 160 A) 3P 60 mm busbar adapter
Snap-on 25v to 95v (< 250 A) Plug-in / withdrawable configuration accessories
Snap-on 120v to 185v (< 250 A) Auxiliary connections 1 automatic connector fixed part with 9 wires (for base)
Distribution 6 x 1.5v to 35v 1 automatic connector moving part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker)
Aluminium 2 cables 50v to 120v 1 support for 3 automatic connector 1 support for 2
NSX400/630 connectors 1 cable 35v to 300v moving parts automatic connector
2 cables 35v to 240v 9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)
Right-angle terminal extensions Plug-in base accessories Long insulated terminals Set of 2
Straight extensions NSX100/250 2 IP4 shutters for base
Edgewise extensions 45 terminal Double-L terminal Chassis accessories Escutcheon collar Toggle Vigi
extension extensions Locking kit (keylock not included)
Spreader NSX100/250 (one piece) (45 mm) 2 carriage switches (conn./disconnected position indication)
NSX400/630 (52.5 mm) (70 mm) Parts or plug-in Plug-in base FC/RC 2P 3P 4P
Cu cable lugs NSX100/250 120v 150v 185v Withdrawable kits Set of two power connections Standard Vigi
NSX400/630 240v 300v Safety trip for advanced opening
AI cable lugs NSX100/250 150v 185v For 3P/4P chassis Moving part
NSX400/630 240v 300v Fixed part
Voltage measurement For lugs NSX100/250 y 185v Adapter for plug-in base (for terminal shield or interphase barriers)
Input for connector For lugs NSX400/630 Communication
Terminal shields NSX100/250 Short Long NSX Cord L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 1.3 m
NSX400/630 Short Long NSX Cord U > 480 V AC L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 3 m
Long for 52.5 mm spreaders BSCM
Interphase barriers Set of 6 Communicating motor mechanism 220-240V
2 insulating NSX100/250 Switchboard front display module FDM121
screens: NSX400/630 70 pitch FDM mounting accessory
Test tool Modbus interface
Pocket battery for Micrologic Stacking accessory
Maintenance case ULP line termination
USB maintenance interface RJ45 connectors female/female Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
Power supply 110-240 V AC L = 0.3 m L = 0.6 m
Spare Micrologic cord Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
L=1m L=2m
Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
L=3m L=5m
F-52
F-53
559E6220.indd 53 08/10/2008 16:40:17

Glossary
Glossaire
Compact NSX Glossary
Contents

Wiring diagrams D-1
Accessories G-2
Circuit-breaker characteristics (IEC 60947-2) G-2

Communication G-4
Components G-5
Controls G-5
Discrimination / Cascading G-6
Environment G-7
Harmonics G-8
Measurements G-8
Protection G-9
Relays and auxiliary contacts G-10
Switchgear G-10
Three-phase asynchronous motors and their protection G-11

Trip units G-12
G-1
For each major section (Accessories, Switchgear, etc.) and for each item (Adapter
for plug-in base, Connection terminal, etc.), this glossary provides:
b the page number in the concerned catalogue
b the reference standard
b the standardised IEC symbol
b the definition.
Text in quotation marks is drawn from the standards.
Accessories ...................................................................................................
Adapter for plug-in base A-72 The adapter is a plastic component that can be installed upstream and/or
downstream of the plug-in base and enables use of all the connection accessories of
the fixed device.
Bare-cable connector A-71 Conducting part of the circuit breaker intended for connection to power circuits. On
Compact NSX, it is an aluminium part that screws to the connection terminals of the
circuit breaker. There are one or more holes (single or multiple cable connector) for
the ends of bare cables.
Connection terminals A-70 Flat copper surface, linked to the conducting parts of the circuit breaker and to which
power connections are made using bars, connectors or lugs.
One-piece spreader A-70 The spreader is a plastic component with copper connectors that can be installed
upstream and/or downstream of a Compact NSX100 to 250 circuit breaker with a
pole pitch of 35 mm. It increases the pitch of the circuit-breaker terminals to the
45 mm pitch of a NSX400/630 device to facilitate connection of large cables.
Spreaders A-70 Set of three (3P device) or four (4P) flat, conducting parts made of aluminium. They
are screwed to the circuit-breaker terminals to increase the pitch between poles.
Circuit-breaker characteristics (IEC 60947-2) ............................................

Breaking capacity A-6 Value of prospective current that a switching device is capable of breaking at a
stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour. Reference is
generally made to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) and the service breaking
capacity (Ics).
Degree of protection (IP) A-5 Defines device protection against the penetration of solid objects and liquids, using
IEC 60529 two digits specified in standard IEC 60259. Each digit corresponds to a level of
protection, where 0 indicates no protection.
b First digit (0 to 6): protection against penetration of solid foreign objects.
1 corresponds to protection against objects with a diameter > 50 mm, 6 corresponds
to total protection against dust.
b Second digit (0 to 8): protection against penetration of liquids (water).
1 corresponds to protection against falling drops of water (condensation),
8 corresponds to continuous immersion.
The enclosure of Compact NSX circuit breakers provides a minimum of IP40
(protection against objects > 1 mm) and can reach IP56 (protection against dust and
powerful water jets) depending on the installation conditions.
Degree of protection against A-6 Defines the aptitude of an object to resist mechanical impacts on all sides, indicated
external mechanical impacts (IK) by a number from 0 to 10 (standard IEC 62262). Each number corresponds to the
impact energy (in Joules) that the object can handle according to a standardised
procedure.
0 corresponds to no protection, 1 to an impact energy of 0.14 Joules, 10 to an impact
energy of 20 Joules. Compact NSX provide IK07 (2 Joules) and can provide IK08
(5 Joules) depending on the installation conditions.
Durability A-6 The term "durability" is used in the standards instead of "endurance" to express the
expectancy of the number of operating cycles which can be performed by the
equipment before repair or replacement of parts. The term "endurance" is used for
specifically defined operational performance.
Electrical durability A-6 With respect to its resistance to electrical wear, equipment is characterised by the
IEC 60947-1 number of on-load operating cycles, corresponding to the service conditions given in
the relevant product standard, which can be made without re replacement.
G-2
Frame size A-70 "A term designating a group of circuit breakers, the external physical dimensions of
which are common to a range of current ratings. Frame size is expressed in amperes
corresponding to the highest current rating of the group. Within a frame size, the
width may vary according to the number of poles. This definition does not imply
dimensional standardization."
Compact NSX has two frame sizes covering 100 to 250 A and 400 to 630 A.
Insulation class A-5 Defines the type of device insulation in terms of earthing and the corresponding
safety for user, in one of three classes.
b Class I. The device is earthed. Any electrical faults, internal or external, or caused
by the load, are cleared via the earthing circuit, thus ensuring user safety.
b Class II. The device is not connected to a protective conductor. User safety is
ensured by reinforced insulation around the live parts (an insulating case and no
contact with live parts, i.e. plastic buttons, moulded connections, etc.) or double
insulation.
b Class III. The device may be connected only to SELV (safety extra-low voltage)
circuits. The Compact NSX are class II devices (front) and may be installed through
the door in class II switchboards (standards IEC 61140 and IEC 60664-1), without
reducing insulation, even with a rotary handle or motor mechanism module.
Making capacity Value of prospective making current that a switching device is capable of making at a
stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour. Reference is
generally made to the short-circuit making capacity Icm.
Maximum break time A-17 Maximum time after which breaking is effective, i.e. the contacts separated and the
current completely interrupted.
Mechanical durability A-6 With respect to its resistance to mechanical wear, equipment is characterised by the
number of no-load operating cycles which can be effected before it becomes
necessary to service or replace any mechanical parts.
Non-tripping time A-17 This is the minimum time during which the protective device does not operate in spite
of pick-up overrun, if the duration of the overrun does not exceed the corresponding
voluntary time delay.
Pollution degree A-6 "Conventional number based on the amount of conductive or hygroscopic dust,
of environment conditions ionized gas or salt and on the relative humidity and its frequency of occurrence,
resulting in hygroscopic absorption or condensation of moisture leading to reduction
IEC 60947-1 in dielectric strength and/or surface resistivity". Standard IEC 60947-1 distinguishes
IEC 60664-1 four pollution degrees.
b Degree 1. No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs.
b Degree 2. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however,
a temporary conductivity caused by condensation may be expected.
b Degree 3. Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non-conductive pollution occurs
which becomes conductive due to condensation.
b Degree 4. The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused, for instance, by
conductive dust or by rain or snow. Compact NSX meets degree 3, which
corresponds to industrial applications.
Prospective short-circuit current E-13 Current that would flow through the poles if they remained fully closed during the
short-circuit.
Rated current (In) A-6 This is the current that the device can carry continuously with the contacts closed
and without abnormal temperature rise.
Rated impulse withstand voltage A-6 "The peak value of an impulse voltage of prescribed form and polarity which the
(Uimp) equipment is capable of withstanding without failure under specified conditions of
test and to which the values of the clearances are referred. The rated impulse
withstand voltage of an equipment shall be equal to or higher than the values stated
for the transient overvoltages occurring in the circuit in which the equipment is fitted".
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) A-6 "The rated insulation voltage of an equipment is the value of voltage to which
dielectric tests and creepage distances are referred. In no case shall the maximum
value of the rated operational voltage exceed that of the rated insulation voltage".
Rated operational current (Ie) "A rated operational current of an equipment is stated by the manufacturer and takes
into account the rated operational voltage, the rated frequency, the rated duty, the
utilization category and the type of protective enclosure, if appropriate".
Rated operational voltage (Ue) A-6 "A value of voltage which, combined with a rated operational current, determines the
application of the equipment and to which the relevant tests and the utilisation
categories are referred. For multipole equipment, it is generally stated as the voltage
between phases".
This is the maximum continuous voltage at which the equipment may be used.
G-3
Rated short-time withstand current "Value of short-time withstand current, assigned to the equipment by the
(Icw) manufacturer, that the equipment can carry without damage, under the test
conditions specified in the relevant product standard". Generally expressed in kA for
0.5, 1 or 3 seconds. This is an essential characteristic for air circuit breakers. It is not
significant for moulded-case circuit breakers for which the design targets fast
opening and high limiting capacity.
Service breaking capacity (Ics) A-6 Expressed as a percentage of Icu, it provides an indication on the robustness of the
device under severe conditions. It is confirmed by a test with one opening and one
closing/opening at Ics, followed by a check that the device operates correctly at its
rated current, i.e. 50 cycles at In, where temperature rise remains within tolerances
and the protection system suffers no damage.
Short-circuit making capacity (Icm) A-58 Value indicating the capacity of the device to make and carry a high current without
repulsion of the contacts. It is expressed in kA peak.
Suitability for isolation A-5 This capability means that the circuit breaker meets the conditions below.
(see also Positive contact indication, b In the open position, it must withstand, without flashover between the upstream
and downstream contacts, the impulse voltage specified by the standard as a
page G-5) function of the Uimp indicated on the device.
b It must indicate contact position by one or more of the following systems:
v position of the operating handle
v separate mechanical indicator
v visible break of the moving contacts
b Leakage current between each pole, with the contacts open, at a test voltage of
1.1 x the rated operating voltage, must not exceed:
v 0.5 mA per pole for new devices
v 2 mA per pole for devices already subjected to normal switching operations
v 6 mA, the maximum value that must never be exceeded.
b It must not be possible to install padlocks unless the contacts are open. Locking in
the closed position is permissible for special applications. Compact NSX complies
with this requirement by positive contact indication.
Suitable for isolation with positive A-5 Suitability for isolation is defined here by the mechanical reliability of the position
contact indication indicator of the operating mechanism, where:
b the isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position
(see also Suitability for isolation, page b the operating handle cannot indicate the "OFF" position unless the contacts are
G2) effectively open.
The other conditions for isolation must all be fulfilled:
b locking in the open position is possible only if the contacts are effectively open
b leakage currents are below the standardised limits
b overvoltage impulse withstand between upstream and downstream connections.
Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) A-6 Expressed in kA, it indicates the maximum breaking capacity of the circuit breaker. It
is confirmed by a test with one opening and one closing/opening at Icu, followed by a
check that the circuit is properly isolated. This test ensures user safety.
Communication.............................................................................................
BSCM A-27 The optional BSCM for Compact NSX is used to acquire device status indications
(Breaker status and control module) and control the communicating remote-control function. It includes a memory used to
manage the maintenance indicators. It serves as a converter between the analog
outputs of the device indication contacts (O/F, SD, SDE) and the digital
communicating functions.
Ethernet TCP/IP A-28 Ethernet is a very common network protocol and complies with IEEE standard 802.3.
(Transmission Control Protocol / Ethernet TCP/IP is the protocol that brings web functions to Ethernet networks.
Most PCs have an Ethernet 10/100 card (10 or 100 Mbit/s) for connection to the
Internet Protocol) internet. Data communicated from Compact NSX via Modbus are accessible on a
PC via a TCP/IP-Modbus gateway such as MPS100 or EGX100.
Network Set of communicating devices that are interconnected by communication lines in

order to share data and resources.
Open protocol 3 A protocol for system communication, interconnection or data exchange for which
technical specifications are public, i.e. there are no restrictions on access or
implementation. An open protocol is the opposite of a proprietary protocol.
Protocol A-28 Standardised specification for dialog between digital components that exchange
data. It is an operating mode based on the length and structure of binary words and it
must be used by all the components exchanging data between themselves.
Communication is not possible without using a protocol.
G-4
RJ45 connector A-26 Universal, 8-wire connector that is widely used in digital communication networks.
The RJ45 connector is used to interconnect computer equipment (Ethernet,
Modbus, etc.), telephones and audiovisual equipment.
RS485 Modbus A-28 Modbus is the most widely used communication protocol in industrial networks. It
operates in master-slave mode. An RS485 multipoint link connects the master and
slaves via a pair of wires offering throughputs of up to 38400 bits/second over
distances up to 1200 m). The master cyclically polls the slaves which send back the
requested information.
The Modbus protocol uses frames containing the address of the targeted slave, the
function (read, write), the datum and the CRC (cyclical redundancy check).
SDTAM A-81 Relay module with two static outputs specifically for the motor-protection Micrologic
trip units 1 M, 2 M and 6 E-M. An output, linked to the contactor controller, opens the
contactor when an overload or other motor fault occurs, thus avoiding opening of the
circuit breaker. The other output stores the opening event in memory.
SDx A-81 Relay module with two outputs that remotes the trip or alarm conditions of
Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped with a Micrologic electronic trip unit.
Static output A-81 Output of a relay made up of a thyristor or triac electronic component. The low
switching capability means that a power relay is required.
This is the case for the SDx and SDTAM outputs.
ULP (Universal Logic Plug) A-31 Connection system used by Compact NSX to communicate information to the
Modbus interface via a simple RJ45 cable. Compatible modules are indicated by the
symbol opposite.
Components...................................................................................................
ASIC (Application Specific Integrated A-8 Integrated circuit designed, built and intended for a specific application. It carries out
Circuit) repetitive sequences of instructions engraved in the silicon chip. For that reason, it is
extremely reliable because it cannot be modified and is not affected by environment
conditions.
Micrologic trip units use an ASIC for the protection functions. The ASIC cyclically
polls the network status at a high frequency, using the values supplied by captors.
Comparison with the settings forms the basis for orders to the electronic trip units.
Microprocessor A-8 A microprocessor is a more general purpose device than an ASIC. In Micrologic, a
microprocessor is used for measurements and it can be programmed. It is not used
for the main protection functions that are carried out by the ASIC.
Controls .........................................................................................................
Communicating motor mechanism A-82 For Compact NSX remote control via the communication system, a communicating
motor mechanism is required. Except for the communication function, it is identical to
the standard motor mechanism module and connects to and controlled by the BSCM
module.
CNOMO machine-tool rotary handle A-84 Handle used for machine-tool control enclosures and providing IP54 and IK08.
Direct rotary handle A-84 This is an optional control handle for the circuit breaker. It has the same three
positions I (ON), O (OFF) and TRIPPED as the toggle control. It provides IP40, IK07
and the possibility, due to its extended travel, of using early-make and early-break
contacts. It maintains suitability for isolation and offers optional locking using a
keylock or a padlock.
Emergency off A-83 In a circuit equipped with a circuit breaker, this function is carried out by an opening
mechanism using an MN undervoltage release or an MX shunt release in
conjunction with an emergency off button.
Extended rotary handle A-84 Rotary handle with an extended shaft to control devices installed at the rear of
switchboards. It has the same characteristics as direct rotary handles. It offers
multiple locking possibilities using a keylock, a padlock or a door interlock.
Failsafe remote tripping A-83 Remote tripping is carried out by an opening mechanism using an MN undervoltage
release in conjunction with an emergency off button. If power is lost, the protection
device opens the circuit breaker.
G-5
Manual toggle control A-89 This is the standard control mechanism for the circuit breaker, with a toggle that can
be flipped up or down. In a moulded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), there are three
positions, I (ON), O (OFF) and TRIPPED. Once in the TRIPPED position, manual
reset is required by switching to O (OFF position before reclosing.The TRIPPED
position does not offer isolation with positive contact indication. This is guaranteed
only by the O (OFF) position.
MCC rotary handle A-84 Handle used for motor control centres and providing IP43 and IK07.
Motor mechanism module A-82 The optional motor mechanism module is used to remotely open, close and recharge
the circuit breaker.
Discrimination / Cascading ..........................................................................

Cascading Cascading implements the current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker, making it
possible to install downstream circuit breakers with lower performance levels.
The upstream circuit breaker reduces any high short-circuit currents. This makes it
possible to install downstream circuit breakers with breaking capacities less than the
prospective short-circuit current at their point of installation.
The main advantage of cascading is to reduce the overall cost of switchgear.
Because the current is limited throughout the circuit downstream of the limiting circuit
breaker, cascading applies to all the devices located downstream.
Current discrimination Discrimination based on the difference between the current-protection settings of the
circuit breakers. The difference in settings between two successive circuit breakers
in a circuit must be sufficient to allow the downstream breaker to clear the fault
before the upstream breaker trips.
Discrimination A-8 Discrimination is ensured between upstream and downstream circuit breakers if,
when a fault occurs, only the circuit breaker placed immediately upstream of the fault
trips.
Discrimination is the key to ensuring the continuity of service of an installation.
Energy discrimination A-8 This function is specific to Compact NSX (see Reflex tripping on page G-7) and
supplements the other types of discrimination.
Partial discrimination A-8 Discrimination is partial if the conditions for total discrimination are not met up to the
ultimate short-circuit current Icu, but only up to a lesser value. This value is called the
discrimination limit. If a fault exceeds the discrimination limit, both circuit breakers
trip.
Time discrimination Discrimination based on the difference between the time-delay settings of the circuit
breakers. The upstream trip unit is delayed to provide the downstream breaker the
time required to clear the fault.
Total discrimination A-8 Total discrimination is ensured between upstream and downstream circuit breakers
if, for all fault values, from overloads up to solid short-circuits, only the downstream
circuit breaker trips and the upstream circuit breaker remains closed.
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) A-18 A number of circuit breakers with Micrologic electronic trip units are interconnected
one after another by a pilot wire. In the event of a short-time or ground fault:
b in the absence of information from downstream, the circuit breaker directly
concerned by the fault (i.e. located just upstream of the fault) shifts to the shortest
time delay and sends a signal upstream
b the upstream device, on receiving the signal from the downstream device,
maintains its normal time delay.
In this manner, the fault is cleared rapidly by the circuit breaker closest to the fault.
Environment..................................................................................................
EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) A-5 EMC is the capacity of a device not to disturb its environment during operation
(emitted electromagnetic disturbances) and to operate in a disturbed environment
(electromagnetic disturbances affecting the device). The standards define various
classes for the types of disturbances. Micrologic trip units comply with annexes F
and J in standard IEC IE60947-2.
Power loss B-10 The flow of current through the circuit-breaker poles produces Joule-effect losses
Pole resistance caused by the resistance of the poles.
G-6
Product environmental profile (PEP) A-4 An assessment on the impact of the construction and use of a product on the
LCA: Life-cycle assessment environment, in compliance with standard ISO 14040, Environmental management,
life-cycle assessment (LCA), principles and framework.
ISO 14040 For Compact NSX, this assessment is carried out using the standardised EIME
(Environmental Impact and Management Explorer) software, which makes possible
comparisons between the products of different manufacturers.
It includes all stages, i.e. manufacture, distribution, use and end of life, with set
usage assumptions:
b use over 20 years at a percent load of 80% for 14 hours per day and 20% for ten
hours
b according to the European electrical-energy model.
It provides the information presented below.
b Materials making up the product: composition and proportions, with a check to
make sure no substances forbidden by the RoHS directive are included.
b Manufacture: on Schneider Electric production sites that have set up an
environmental management system certified ISO 14001.
b Distribution: packaging in compliance with the 94/62/EC packaging directive
(optimised volumes and weights) and optimised distribution flows via local centres.
b Use: no aspects requiring special precautions for use. Power lost through Joule
effect in Watts (W) must be < 0.02% of total power flowing through the circuit
breaker. Based on the above assumptions, annual consumption from 95 to 200 kWh.
b End of life: products dismantled or crushed. For Compact NSX, 81% of materials
can be recycled using standard recycling techniques. Less than 2% of total weight
requires special recycling.
Product environmental profile (PEP) A-4 Environmental indicators are also frequently used for the PEP (sheet available on
Environmental indicators request for Compact NSX):
b Depletion of natural resources
b Depletion of energy
b Depletion of water
b Potential for atmospheric warming (greenhouse effect)
b Potential for stratospheric ozone depletion
b Creation of atmospheric ozone (ozone layer)
b Acidification of air (acid rain)
b Production of hazardous waste.
RoHS directive A-4 European directive 2002/95/EC dated 27 January 2003 aimed at reducing or
(Restriction of Hazardous substances) eliminating the use of hazardous substances. The manufacturer must attest to
compliance, without third-party certification. Circuit breakers are not included in the
list of concerned products, which are essentially consumer products.
That not withstanding, Schneider Electric decided to comply with the RoHS directive.
Compact NSX products are designed in compliance with RoHS and do not contain
(above the authorised levels) lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium or
flame retardants (polybrominated biphenyls PBB and polybrominated diphenyl ether
PBDE).
Safety clearances A-4 When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be
maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection systems
installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity,
are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2.
Temperature derating B-8 An ambient temperature varying significantly from 40C can modify operation of
magnetic or thermal-magnetic protection functions. It does not affect electronic trip
units. However, when electronic trip units are used in high-temperature situations, it
is necessary to check the settings to ensure that only the permissible current for the
given ambient temperature is let through.
Vibration withstand B-2 Circuit breakers are tested in compliance with standard IEC 60068-2-6 for the levels
IEC 60068-2-6 required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd's, etc.):
b 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude of 1 mm
b 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration of 0.7 g.
WEEE directive A-4 European directive on managing the waste of electrical and electronic equipment.
(Waste of Electrical and Electronic Circuit breakers are not included in the list of concerned products.
However, Compact NSX products respect the WEEE directive.
Equipment)
Harmonics.....................................................................................................
G-7
Current harmonics A-20 Non-linear loads cause harmonic currents that flow in the 50 Hz (or 60 Hz)
distribution system. Total harmonic current is the sum of sinusoidal AC currents for
which the rms values can be measured and broken down into:
b the fundamental current at the 50/60 Hz frequency of the distribution system, with
an rms value of IH1
b harmonic currents with whole, odd multiples (3, 5, 7, etc.) of the 50/60 Hz
frequency, called the third-order, fifth-order, etc. harmonics. For example, IH3, the
third-order harmonic at 150/180 Hz, IH5, the fifth-order harmonic at 250/300 Hz, etc.
The presence of harmonics in the system must be monitored and limited because it
results in temperature rise, currents in the neutral (caused by the third-order
harmonics and multiples), malfunctions of sensitive electronic devices, etc.
Micrologic E trip units take into account harmonics up to order 15 in the THDI and
THDU calculations.
Non-linear load Systems producing harmonics are present in all industrial, commercial and
residential sectors. Harmonics are caused by non-linear loads. A load is said to be
non-linear when the current drawn does not have the same waveform as the supply
voltage. Typically, loads using power electronics are non-linear.
Examples of non-linear loads include computers, rectifiers, variable-speed drives,
arc furnaces and fluorescent lighting.
Total harmonic distortion of current A-21 THDI characterises the distortion of the current wave by harmonics.
(THDI) It indicates the quantity of harmonics in the resulting waveform. It is expressed in
percent.
The higher the THDI, the more the current is distorted by harmonics.
THDI should remain below 10%. Above that level, there is said to be harmonic
pollution that is considered severe when it rises above 50%.
Total harmonic distortion of voltage A-21 THDU characterises the distortion of the voltage wave by harmonics.
(THDU) It indicates the quantity of harmonics in the resulting waveform. It is expressed in
percent.
The higher the THDU, the more the system voltage is distorted by harmonics. It is
advised not to exceed 5% for low-voltage systems.
Voltage harmonics A-20 For each current harmonic IHk, there is a voltage harmonic UHk of the same order k,
where the resulting voltage is the sum of the two waves.
The voltage wave is therefore distorted with respect to the standard sinusoidal wave.
Measurements ..............................................................................................
Contact wear A-23 Each time Compact NSX opens, the Micrologic 5 / 6 trip unit measures the
interrupted current and increments the contact-wear indicator as a function of the
interrupted current, according to test results stored in memory.
Current transformer with iron-core 10 It is made up of a coil wound around an iron frame through which a power busbar
toroid runs. The current flowing in the bar, on passing through the sensor, induces a
magnetic field that reverses for each half period. This variation in the field in turn
creates an induced current in the coil. This current is proportional to the current
flowing in the bar. It is sufficient to supply the measurement electronics.
The disadvantage of iron-core measurement current transformers (CT) is that they
rapidly saturate for currents > 10 In.
Current transformer with Rogowski 10 It is made up of a coil without an iron frame, through which a power busbar runs. The
toroid or air-core CT output voltage at the coil terminals is proportional to the current flowing through the
bar. The result is a current transformer (CT) with a voltage output. The advantage is
that it never saturates whatever the primary current and thus enables measurement
of high currents. The output is however a very low current that is too low to supply the
measurement electronics.
For Micrologic, Rogowski CTs measure the current and a second CT, with an iron
core, provides the electrical supply.
Demand current, demand power and A-21 Average of the instantaneous current or power values over an adjustable fixed or
peak values sliding time interval. The highest value observed over the time interval is the peak
value. The time interval runs from the last reset.
Instantaneous current A-21 True rms value of the current measured by the current transformers over a sliding
time interval. Available on Micrologic 5/6 A or E.
G-8
Instantaneous voltage A-21 True rms value of the voltage measured by the voltage sensors over a sliding time
interval. Available on Micrologic 5/6 A or E.
Maximeters/minimeters A-20 Micrologic 5 and 6 A or E can record the minimum and maximum values of electrical
parameters over set time periods.
Overvoltage category A-32 Standard IEC 60664-1 stipulates that it is up to the user to select a measurement
(OVC - Overvoltage category) device with a sufficient overvoltage category, depending on the network voltage and
the transient overvoltages likely to occur.
IEC 60947-1. Annex H Four overvoltage categories define the field of use for a device.
b Cat. I. Devices supplied by a SELV isolating transformer or a battery.
b Cat. II. Residential distribution, handheld or laboratory tools and devices
connected to standardised 2P + earth electrical outlets (230 V).
b Cat. III. Industrial distribution, fixed distribution circuits in buildings (main low
voltage switchboards, rising mains, elevators, etc.).
b Cat. IV. Utility substations, overhead lines, certain industrial equipment.
Percent load A-23 Percentage of current flowing through the circuit breaker with respect to its rated
current. Micrologic 6 E-M offers this information and can sum it over the total
operating time to provide the load profile for the following ranges, 0 to 49%, 50 to
79%, 80 to 89% and u 90%.
Phase sequence A-23 The order in which the phases are connected (L1, L2, L3 or L1, L3, L2) determines
the direction of rotation for three-phase asynchronous motors. Micrologic 6 E-M trip
units provide this information.
Power and energy metering A-21 The digital electronics in Micrologic 5/6 E calculate the instantaneous power levels,
(consumption) apparent (S in kVA), active (P in kW) and (Q in kV), and integrate over a time interval
to determine the corresponding energies (kVAh, kWh kvarh). Calculations are for
each phase and for the total.
Time-stamped histories A-23 Micrologic trip units store information on events (e.g. alarms and their cause) that are
time-stamped to within a millisecond.
Protection .......................................................................................................
Ground-fault protection G (Ig) A-19 Protection function specific to electronic circuit breakers, symbolised by G (Ground).
This protection can calculate high-threshold residual earth-leakage currents (in the
order of tens of Amperes) on the basis of phase-current measurements. Micrologic
5/6 offers this protection function with adjustable pick-up Ig and time delay.
Instantaneous protection I (Ii) A-19 This protection supplements Isd. It provokes instantaneous opening of the device.
The pick-up may be adjustable or fixed (built-in). This value is always lower than the
contact-repulsion level.
Long-time protection L (Ir) A-19 Protection function where the adjustable Ir pick-up determines a protection curve
similar to the thermal-protection curve (inverse-time curve I2t). The curve is generally
determined on the basis of the Ir setting which corresponds to a theoretically infinite
tripping time (asymptote) and of the point at 6 Ir at which the tripping time depends
on the rating.
Magnetic protection (Im) A-14 Short-circuit protection provided by magnetic trip units (see this term). The pick-up
setting may be fixed or adjustable.
Neutral protection (IN) A-16 The neutral is protected because all circuit-breaker poles are interrupted. The setting
may be that used for the phases or specific to the neutral, i.e. reduced neutral (0.5
times the phase current) or OSN (oversized neutral) at 1.6 times the phase current.
For OSN protection, the maximum device setting is limited to 0.63 In.
Residual-current earth-leakage A-34 Protection provided by Vigi modules, in which the residual-current toroids directly
protection (In) detect low-threshold earth-leakage currents (in the order of tens of mA) caused by
insulation faults.
Short-delay protection S (Isd) A-19 Protection function specific to electronic circuit breakers, symbolised by S (Short
delay or short time). This protection supplements thermal protection. The reaction
time is very short, but has a slight time delay to enable discrimination with the
upstream device. The short-delay pick-up Isd is adjustable from approximately 1.5 to
10 Ir.
Short-delay protection with fixed A-17 Short-delay protection, but with a fixed time delay. This function is available on
time delay So (Isd) Micrologic 2. It is symbolised by So. It ensures discrimination with downstream
devices.
G-9
Thermal protection (Ir) A-15 Overload protection provided by thermal trip units (see this term) using an inverse-
time curve (I2t).
Relays and auxiliary contacts .......................................................................

Auxiliary contact "Contact included in an auxiliary circuit and mechanically operated by the switching
IEC 60947-1 device".
Break contact A-84 "Control or auxiliary contact which is open when the main contacts of the mechanical
IEC 60947-1 switching device are closed and closed when they are open".
Make contact A-84 "Control or auxiliary contact which is closed when the main contacts of the
IEC 60947-1 mechanical switching device are closed and open when they are open".
Relay (electrical) A-18 "Device designed to produce sudden, predetermined changes in one or more
IEC 60947-1 electrical output circuits when certain conditions are fulfilled in the electrical input
circuits controlling the device".
Relay module with static output A-81 Output of a relay made up of a thyristor or triac electronic component. The low
interrupting capacity means that a power relay is required. This is the case for the
SDx and SDTAM outputs.
Switchgear .....................................................................................................
Circuit breaker A-6 "Mechanical switching device, capable of making, carrying and breaking currents
IEC 60947-2 under normal circuit conditions and also making, carrying for a specified time and
breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short
circuit". Circuit breakers are the device of choice for protection against overloads
and short-circuits. Circuit breakers may, as is the case for Compact NSX, be suitable
for isolation.
Circuit-breaker utilisation category A-6 The standard defines two utilisation categories, A and B, depending on breaker
IEC 60947-2 discrimination with upstream breakers under short-circuit conditions.
b Category A. Circuit breakers not specifically designed for discrimination
applications.
b Category B. Circuit breakers specifically designed for discrimination, which
requires a short time-delay (which may be adjustable) and a rated short-time
withstand current in compliance with the standard.
Compact NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers are category A, however, by design, they
provide discrimination with downstream devices (see the Complementary technical
information guide).
Contactor A-36 "Mechanical switching device having only one position of rest, operated otherwise
IEC 60947-1 than by hand, capable of making, carrying and breaking currents under normal
circuit conditions including operating overload conditions". A contactor is provided for
frequent opening and closing of circuits under load or slight overload conditions. It
must be combined and coordinated with a protective device against overloads and
short-circuits, such as a circuit breaker.
Contactor utilisation categories A-37 The standard defines four utilisation categories, AC1, AC2, AC3 and AC4 depending
IEC 60947-4-1 on the load and the control functions provided by the contactor. The class depends
on the current, voltage and power factor, as well as contactor withstand capacity in
terms of frequency of operation and endurance.
Current-limiting circuit breaker A-36 "A circuit-breaker with a break-time short enough to prevent the short-circuit current
IEC 60947-2 reaching its otherwise attainable peak value".
Disconnector "Mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with the
IEC 60947-3 requirements specified for the isolating function". A disconnector serves to isolate
upstream and downstream circuits. It is used to open or close circuits under no-load
conditions or with a negligible current level. It can carry the rated circuit current and,
for a specified time, the short-circuit current.
Switch-disconnector A-56 "Switch which, in the open position, satisfies the isolating requirements specified for
IEC 60947-3 a disconnector". A switch-disconnector serves for switching and isolation. The switch
function breaks the circuit under load conditions and the disconnection function
isolates the circuit. Protection is not provided. It may be capable of making short-
circuit currents if it has the necessary making capacity, but it cannot break short-
circuit currents. Compact NSX100 to 630 NA switch-disconnectors have a making
capacity.
G-10
Switch-disconnector utilisation A-57 The standard defines six utilisation categories, AC-21A or B, AC-22 A or B, AC23 A or
category B. They depend on the rated operational current and the mechanical durability (A for
frequent operation or B for infrequent operation). Compact NSX NA switch-
IEC 60947-3 disconnectors comply with utilisation categories AC22A or AC23A.
Three-phase asynchronous motors and their protection.............................

Locked-rotor protection (Ijam) A-44 This function steps in when the motor shaft cannot or can no longer drive the load.
The result is a high overcurrent.
Long-start protection (Ilong) A-44 An overly long start means the current drawn remains too high or too low for too long,
with respect to the starting current. In all cases, the load cannot be driven and the
start must be interrupted. The resulting temperature rise must be taken into account
before restarting.
Phase-unbalance or phase- loss A-43 This protection function steps in if the current values and/or the unbalance in the
protection (Iunbal) three phases supplying the motor exceeds tolerances. Currents should be equal and
displacement should be one third of a period. Phase loss is a special case of phase
unbalance.
Starting current A-38 Start-up of a three-phase, asynchronous motor is characterised by:

b a high inrush current, approximately 14 In for 10 to 15 ms
b a starting current, approximately 7.2 In for 5 to 30 seconds
b return to the rated current after the starting time.
Starting time A-38 Time after which the motor ceases to draw the starting current and falls back to the
operating current Ir (y In).
Thermal image of the rotor and A-44 The thermal image models the thermal behaviour of a motor rotor and stator, taking
stator into account temperature rise caused by overloads or successive starts, and the
cooling constants. For each motor power rating, the algorithm takes into account a
theoretical amount of iron and copper which modifies the cooling constants.
Thermal protection Protection against overcurrents following an inverse time curve I2t = constant, which
defines the maximum permissible temperature rise for the motor.
Tripping occurs after a time delay that decreases with increasing current.
Trip class A-38 The trip class determines the trip curve of the thermal protection device for a motor
IEC 60947-4-1 feeder. The standard defines trip classes 5, 10, 20 and 30. These classes are the
maximum durations, in seconds, for motor starting with a starting current of 7.2 Ir,
where Ir is the thermal setting indicated on the motor rating plate.
Under-load protection (Iund) A-44 This function steps in when the driven load is too low. It detects a set minimum phase
current which signals incorrect operation of the driven machine. In the example of a
pump, under-load protection detects when the pump is no longer primed.
Trip units .......................................................................................................

Electronic trip unit (Micrologic) A-16 Trip unit that continuously measures the current flowing through each phase and the
neutral if it exists. For Micrologic, the measurements are provided by built-in current
sensors linked to an analog-digital converter with a high sampling frequency. The
measurement values are continuously compared by the ASIC to the protection
settings. If a setting is overrun, a Mitop release trips the circuit-breaker operating
mechanism.
This type of trip unit offers much better pick-up and delay setting accuracy than
thermal-magnetic trip units. It also provides a wider range of protection functions.
Magnetic release A-14 Release actuated by a coil or a lever. A major increase in the current (e.g. a short-
circuit) produces in the coil or the lever a change in the magnetic field that moves a
core. This trips the circuit breaker operating mechanism. Action is instantaneous.
The pick-up setting may be adjustable.
Reflex tripping A-8 Compact NSX circuit breakers have a patented reflex-tripping system based on the
energy of the arc and that is independent of the other protection functions. It
operates extremely fast, before the other protection functions. It is an additional
safety function that operates before the others in the event of a very high short-
circuit.
G-11
Release Device, mechanically connected to a mechanical switching device (e.g. a circuit

IEC 60947-1 breaker), which releases the holding means and permits the opening or the closing
of the switching device. For circuit breakers, releases are often integrated in a trip
unit.
Shunt release (MX) A-83 This type of release operates when supplied with current. The MX release provokes
circuit-breaker opening when it receives a pulse-type or maintained command.
Thermal-magnetic trip unit A-14 Trip unit combining thermal protection for overloads and magnetic protection.
Thermal release A-14 Release in which a bimetal strip is heated by the Joule effect. Above a temperature-
rise threshold that is a function of the current and its duration (I2t curve = constant,
which is representative of temperature rise in cables), the bimetal strip bends and
releases the circuit-breaker opening mechanism. The pick-up setting may be
adjustable.
Undervoltage release (MN) A-83 This type of release operates when the supply voltage drops below the set minimum.
G-12
ART834519 2008 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

89, boulevard Franklin Roosevelt As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation
F - 92505 Rueil-Malmaison cedex (France) of the information given in this publication.
Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00
This document has been printed on ecological paper.
http://www.schneider-electric.com
Design: Schneider Electric

Photos: Schneider Electric
Printed: Imprimerie du Pont de Claix/JPF - made in France
LVPED208001EN 09-2008
559E0000.indd 4 08/10/2008 16:45:31

07 - Compact NSX Catalogue

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

07 - Compact NSX Catalogue

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

07 - Compact NSX Catalogue

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Low Voltage

Compactness, discrimination and modularity all of the features which defined

Far more than a circuit breaker, Compact NSX is a measurement

Safety and performance

> Exceptional fault current limitation guarantees

> 36-50 kA standard applications

> 70-100 kA high performance

> 150 kA demanding applications (maritime).

> add a Schneider Electric contactor;

> A Micrologic electronic tripping device

> These electronic systems are designed

> The originality lies in how Compact NSX

> Compact NSX has an optional functional

> All Compact NSX devices can be equipped

> The switchboard "plug & play" display unit

> Event logs and tables are continuously-

> Local and remote displays offer easy access

Performance, Attractively designed.

Adding an SDTAM module allows remote

> the module allows for machine restart

Solutions for the future

The objective is dramatically to reduce energy

* RoHS = Restriction of Hazardous Substances

Wiring diagrams D-1

Additional characteristics E-1

Catalogue numbers F-1

Compact NSX100 to 630 offers high performance and

Switchboard display unit

Compact NSX equipped with Micrologic

Compliance with standards

Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate: Pollution degree

(1) -40 C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.

Suitable for isolation with positive contact

Installation in class II switchboards

NSX100 NSX160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX630

100 160 250 400 630

35/45 mm 35/45 mm 35/45 mm 45/52.5 mm 45/52.5 mm

Accurate measurements for complete protection

Numerous security functions

Coordinated tripping systems

E.g. NSX100F Ir Isd Ii Reflex threshold Icu

Currents 100 A 1000 A

Understanding the names of Micrologic electronic trip units

1: I 2: NSX100/160/250 A: Ammeter Distribution, otherwise

5: LSI AB: Public distribution

I: Instantaneous 3: NSX400/630 E: Energy

S0: Short time (1)

b Distribution and motors b Distribution

Circuit breakers and trip units

MA Distribution and TM-D Distribution

Settings and indications

Adjustment and Adjustment and

b Distribution b Distribution b Distribution b Motors

Micrologic 6.3 E-M

2.3 Distribution 5.3 A Distribution 6.3 A Distribution 6.3 E-M Motors

Alarm History 2/3

Adjustment and reading Adjustment and reading

Fine adjustment via

Adjustable time delays